PA 258 










■ 




V'^'V* \'^tt % \<^ \°y?^\S* \ **! 



V4* • 



£°* 













► V * SKS • *2n & *A 












4>> « 



,«• 



o_ *; 



-by 












v*3KPv ** v, -yj^. aV -^ .JEWS. <&' %, Vi 



4°* 






I* ^f> ^ *. 

* AV "Sv . 










h<^ 



V 

><*. 



U"5 



? v wm , ♦*"*♦ . m* 8 /\ w . ^ 



O, "o . » * A 




•* <o 



4°* 



o* ..'-J-, *« 



^ *« • * * A 



G v ♦ 



<*> * 




•- -ov* 



** • • * • 




*,/ ,-»tt ; %/ ••ate- \s ••• 







^ ^ 
W 




^ " - • * • ^ ^ ^ ^ < & 












4? ******* * V ' * iil% %> *0* ♦ •••* % 



* VW>^ v#/ \'w ^ 

111'. ^ .'Ife W :4wf-. ^ ;£lb 



& .tf*°- 






•o.. *•. 






4^ ., 



: % * ^ h 









5 s % 












:- ^ ^ 



»5°^ 






^^ J . 






^ ^ •*' 










THE 






ELEMENTS 



OF 



GREEK GRAMMAR; 



WITH NOTES 



FOR THE USE OF THOSE, WHO HAVE MADE SOME 
PROGRESS IN THE LANGUAGE. 



Cfje JFourtf) ©jttioru 




lontion : 



d 



Printed by A. J. Valpy, Tooke's Court, Chancery Lane. 

SOLD BY LONGMAN, HURST, REES, ORME, AND BROWN J 
LAW ; LACKINGTON AND CO. J RIVINGTONS ; 

RICHARDSON ; LUNN ; AND DULAU. 

I 



J814. 









Hi 



^equaquam me pcenitet hujus studii, quod per hanc recensi- 
onem in tractatione veterum Grammaticoi'um consumsi. Imo 
tantum eo me adjutum sentio, non modo ad hoc opus, sed ad 
oranem facultatem linguae Graecae, neniinem ut arbitrer in Grcecis 
scriptoribus intelligendis proficere posse, nisi siniili cursu lecti- 
onis pracepta iilorum collegerit y et ad optimas rationes exami- 
naverit. 

Wolfius, Prokg. ad Homer. 



C A/^^ S3 Urjn,,r/r^ 



a) 

ay 

b(i a/j 

oaJY 

7* 



ft 



7i 

JVC 



a 
ai 
a\ 

aXX 
av 
av 

a xo 

avro 
avTov 

yeXX 
7 tv 

JiV 
YlVZTai 

re 

re™ 

it 

& i V 



20CL %A <$ia 

* ^ ^ ^ 



(fir 

ItU 



OM 



IKIV 

M 

£Ttf 
>7 V 

7< ala 



^T^ XS(pa)\ato> 




ri 
To 



jy/ff^ 



/VW opposite page J. 



: ^ 



mm&rumj 



5 <&*/ 



TT 



UAJ 

o 

Za 

Zcu 

3 

r] 

r 

^ ) 

a 

T 



6 



era 
crav 

<r6 

crOai 

(T (T 

a1 

CT VV 

* x 

rai 

Tavla 
TaiS 

Ti 

TV\V 

ri 

To 



-r 



T^ 



CAyf 

s 

M 

UM ~^J\> 



14 



Tov 

tov 

TovS 
Tovlo 



Vox 

Tpo 



Ttu 

TbbV 
V 
VI 
V V 

v rcb 
v 5 

vcrx 
jta, 

XL 

to 



place, opposite page 1. 



JLhere are twenty-four letters in Greek 



a 



A a I Alpha 

B |3 C Beta b 

rvf Gamma g 

zf 3 Delta d 

E 6 s Epsilon e 

Z ? £ Zeta z 

H 7} - Eta e 

6 6 $ Theta th 

I i Iota i 
K h Kappa k 
A \ Lambda 1 
M ft, Mu m 
N v Nu 

a § xi 

O o - Omicron 

II 7T *r Pi p 
P ^ $ Rho r 
X C. <r, final $ Sigma s 
T ti -Tau t 
T v Upsilon u 
4> <p Phi ph 
X ^ - Chi ch 
<F %(/ Psi ps 
12 cu Omega 5 



2 

Of these, seven are Vowels : 

s, ©/ short, 

7i, «), long/ 

a, i, o, doubtful. 5 
There are twelve Diphthongs : 

Six proper : ai, cto, si, su, of, ot>. 
Six improper : a, ? n tp, tju, vi, o>u. 4 

k M ■ 

* The letters, s, o, o, and co were called £/, ou, v and w, without 
the adjective, during many centuries after the Christian era. 

In e psilon, o micron, u psilon, i is long. But the names of 
these letters have, since the adoption of the distinctive adjectives, 
been pronounced in this country as single words with the English 
accent, tpsilon, omicron, upsilon. Some persons have lately 
resumed the former pronunciation. On this principle, omega must 
be called o mega. 

The addition of psilon to v appears unnecessary, as that vowel is 
not, like s and o, distinguished from a corresponding letter. 

a Anciently e was used for y, and o for w or ov : thus, K0PE2 for 
Ko^, ©EON for Szwv, and HEPOAO for *H;w?o& The long 
mark was then placed over s and o, thus i, o, for ij, w. 

3 They are called doubtful, because they are long in some sylla- 
bles and short in others. 

4 In the formation of the proper diphthongs, * and v are placed 
after a, s, or a. Hence t and v are called Subjunctive, and the rest 
Prepositive. 

In the formation of the improper diphthongs, t and u are placed 
after the same vowels made long, U, tj, or w. The /, then become 
s ilent, is subscribed, or placed under the former vowel. For the 
same reason vt is sometimes written y. 

The silent * was anciently either omitted, or added to the former 
vowel, as appears from Inscriptions and ancient MSS. thus, APAN or 
APAIN for fyav. It is still sometimes joined to capital letters, thus A*. 



Of the seventeen Consonants, nine are mutes, 
divided into, 

Three soft, tt, k, t ; 

Three middle, 0, y, 8 ; 
Three aspirate, <p, %, 6. 
Each soft mute has its corresponding middle and aspi- 
rate, into each of which it is frequently changed ; thus, 
7r has /3 for its middle, and <p for its aspirate. 1 

X z may be called a soli tan/ consonant, which placed 
after the mutes assists in forming 
Three double letters \ thus, 

7TS, &S, <PS, form i>; 
*S, 7$, %S, form |"; 
t£, oV, $c 3 form £. 
And four are liquids: X, jx, v, ^>. 5 

Perhaps in strictness ecu and vi should be considered sometimes as 
proper, sometimes as improper, diphthongs, according to the quantity 
of the former vowel. 

When two vowels, which generally coalesce into a diphthong, 
retain their separate sounds, two dots are placed over the latter vowel, 
and form a diasresis, as a.virvo$. -- 

1 When two mutes come together, they must be both either 
soft, middle, or aspirate: thus, rkrviiroii, irvpfyv, not retviptai, 

* Called Sigma in the Ionic, San in the Doric, dialect. 

3 r before y, h, £, p£, is pronounced like v ; thus ayyz'Ai; is 
pronounced avyshos, like n in angle. 

f 7 before y, x, £, % ; 
N is changed into < \j* before /3, /x, tf, <p, vj/ ; 

(- X, £, and <r before A, £, o*. 



4 

There are two breathings, one of which is placed 
over every vowel or diphthong beginning a word : 

The soft ('), the aspirate ('),* 

Apostrophe ('•) shows that a vowel is cut off, 
as, aXX* lyao for qCKKol syd). 2. 



Thus, eyyga,0cv for ivygoi<p'jj ; spfioclvcv for syfixlvcc ; <tuuw*vjo for 
crvvfj,svtv : so in Latin, impedio for inpedio ; illudo for inludo, &c. 
and anciently aggulus for angulus, &c. 

N is added to Dative Plurals in <n, and to Verbs of the third 
person in e and f, when the next word begins with a vowel ; thus 
sXsyev ccvrty for sXsye ocvtcv. 

The negative ou is used before a. consonant, oux before a soft vowel, 
ou% before an aspirate: ej before a consonant becomes ex.: ovtw, 
%x§t, and psx$ l De ^ ore a vowel take $, as, oura,^ e<pr t . 

1 The aspirate has the force of A : thus, o is pronounced ho. 

T and £ at the beginning of a word have always the aspirate. If 
two ^ come together, the former has the soft, the latter the aspirate : 
thus sppsov. 

Anciently H was the aspirate in Greek, as it is in Latin : thus, 
HEKATON was written for exarov. The parts of the H were taken 
to denote the breathings. Thus the mark of the soft was -1, of the 
aspirate, f . This form was afterwards simplified into j and l; 
and lastly rounded into the present shape, ' and \ 

The iEolians, who avoided the aspirate, used another sound, 
similar to a V or a W, to prevent the hiatus occasioned by the 
meeting of vowels in. different syllables: this they called the digamma, 
because its figure resembled two gammas, one over the other, thus, 
F or f. Thus fetrirega for so-tfsga., ai/ov for ujov, touro ffiov for 
?ovro ?<W. Hence the Latin vespera, ovum, video, &c. 

s * The vowels thus cut off ape a, s, i, o, and the diphthongs aa and 
m ; but ir eg) and up never lose their final vowel. 



When an apostrophe takes place, a soft mute before 
an aspirate vowel is changed into its corresponding aspi- 
rate : thus, for awo o5, air o3 is changed into a$' ov. 

There are three accents : the acute ('), the grave 
{ v j, and the drainiflex (").' 

The acute is placed on one of the three last syllables 
of a word. 

The grave is never placed but on the last syllable. 

The circumflex is placed on a long vowel or diphthong 
in one of the two last syllables. 4 

There are only four points or stops i 

The comma, like the Latin (,). 
The note of interrogation (;). 
The colon, or point at top (•). 
The full stop, like the Latin (.) 



These vowels and diphthongs are sometimes cut off at the begin- 
ning of a word by the Attics : thus, w^/M for u> dyafe. 

Two words are sometimes joined in one by Crasis ; as, Koiyu for 
tlcl) syu>, Kara, for kol) slra, d'vvg for o dv^, eyyfa for syta olfa, &c. 

" The circumflex was first marked *, then ", lastly ~. 

2 Words accented on the last syllable are called oxytons or 
acutitons; words not accented on the last syllable are called bary- 
tons or gravitoiis. 



PARTS OF SPEECH. 

There are eight species of words, called Parts of 
Speech : Article, Noun, Adjective, Pronoun, Verb, 
Adverb, Preposition, Conjunction. 1 

The four first are declined with Gender, Number, 
and Case. 

There are three genders : Masculine, Feminine 9 
and Neuter. 

There are three numbers : 

The Singular speaks of one. 
The Dual, 2 " of two, or a pair. 
The Plural, of more than two. 

There are five cases : Nominative, Genitive, Dative, 
Accusative, Vocative. 1 

The Nominative and Vocative are frequently the 
same in the singular, always in the dual and plural. 

The Dative has always ;, either final, or irj. a diph- 
thong in the last syllable. 

* The Interjections are included by the Greeks in the Adverbs. 

* The dual, which adds precision to the Greek language, is not 
used in the /Eolic dialect, or in Latin. It is not found in the New 
Testament, in the Septuagint, or in the Fathers. Jn the corruption 
of the language by the modern Greeks, it was omitted. Thus it was 
used in that copious language, the Arabic, and does not exist in the 
Persian. 

3 An Ablative was admitted by ancient grammarians ; but as it 
is always the same as the Dative, it is generally omitted. 



The Genitive plural always ends in cov. 

The Dual has only two terminations, one for the 
Nominative, Accusative, and Vocative 5 the other for 
the Genitive and Dative. 

Neuters have the Nominative, Accusative, and Voca- 
tive alike ; and in the plural those cases end in a. In 
the dual they are like the masculine. 





ARTICLE. 








•0, i, to, The. 1 






Singular. 


Dual. 




, Plural. 


M. F. N. 






M. F. N. 


N. 6, r), to, 


M. F. N. 


N T . 


oi, al, Ta t 


G. tou, T^g, tov, 


N. A. T'JQ, TX, Tc/J, 


G. 


T&V, 


D. TOO, Ttj, T-Jj, 


G. D. TOiVj Tcciv, toIv. 


D. 


T0~$, Talc, ToTr, 


A. TQV, Tr)V> TO. 




A. 


TO'JC, TUC, TSL, 



NOUN. 

Declensions of Nouns are three, answering to 
the three first Declensions in Latin. 

The Jir*st ends in a, 75 feminine, and in ag and yg 
masculine. 

The second ends in og generally masculine and some- 
times feminine, and ov neuter. 

The third ends in a, /, u neuter ; a> feminine ; v, £, 
p, g, -ty of all genders, and increases in the Genitive. 



1 The article usually answers to the definite article the In English. 
When no article is expressed in Greek, the English article indefinite 
a is signified. Thus, avSowirog means a man, or man in general ; and 
uvSgwiroc, the man. This article, which does not exist in Latin, 
has been found of great utility in modern languages. 



Singular. 

H.uYyVfo5<r-# 3 

Dejt Mo6<r-Y,, 1 

A. M0U<T'UV 9 

V. £ Mouar-a. 



8 



FIRST DECLENSION. 
Dual. 



N.A.V. MouV-a, 
G. D. MoJcr-aty. 



Plural. 

N. Mov<r-ui, 

G . M0V(T-C0V t 

D. Afoyo--«»f, 
A. Mov<r-a$, 
V. MoDcr-ai. 



, Nouns in 8a, 6a, ^a, and a pure ^ make the Genitive 
in a& and the Dative in a, and the rest like Mou<ra z 
thus, N. <pj?ua, G. <p*x/a£, D. $i?Ja. 3 

Nouns in ?j make the Accusative in tjv, and the 
Vocative in y, and the rest like Mouca : thus, N. ri^ 

A. T<///qV, V. T/^ir;. ' 

Nouns in ag make the Genitive in ou, 4 and the Dative 



1 The two first Declensions subscribe i in the Dative singular. 

a A vowel is called pure, when it follows a vowel; impure, when 
it follows a consonant. In the former case it is called pure, 
because it forms a syllabic of itself, without being mixed with a 
consonant. 

The termination in a, which makes as in the Genitive, is generally 
long. Hence words in a contracted, as, \Ai7jya, wva } &c. make a*. 
For the same reason, evXccxu makes svXaxas. But axcoQcc, whose 
final a is short, makes dxoivfys. 

3 From this Genitive in as is derived the ancient Genitive of the 
first Declension of Latin nouns, as, Paterfamilias. From the 
Dative in cm or a, is formed the Dative in a. The similarity between 
the Accusative in av and the Latin am is obvious. 

* Some nouns in as make the Genitive in a as well as in ov ; as, 
IlvQayocas, G. -ov and -a ; Ua?%a\oias 3 G. -ov and -a. Some keep 
a exclusively; as, ®cupds> G. ©wpj Boppds, G. Bo#5 ; Sarava^, 



9 

In or, and the rest like Movcra, : thus, N. ra/Ja£, G. ra- 

Nouns in vj£ make the Genitive in ou, the Accusative 
in 75 V, and the Vocative in 75, and the rest like Movcra : 
thus, N. TeXtovys, G. tsKmvou, A. rs'kwvriVy V. teXwvv}. 1 





SECOND DECLENSION. 


/ 


Singular. 




Dual. 




Plural. 


N. Xoy-o$, 






N. 


Xoy-oi, 


G. Xoy-ov, 




N.A.V. AoV-w, 


G. 


Xoy-uiVy 


D. Xoy-co, 






D. 


Xoy-oig, 


A. koy-ov, 




G. D. Xoy-oiv. 


A. 


Xoy-ovc 9 


V. Xoy-s. 






V. 


Xoy-oi. x 



G. Sarava ; TtoLitiiccc, G. itantita.. These Genitives in a were the 
Doric form. 

* It seems to be a general principle to shorten the termination of the 
N. to form the V. Hence the following make the V. in a : nouns in 
fys ; compounds in itr^, as yjovwitr^ ; nouns in 7}$ derived from psrgu), 
itw\w> r^lfiov, as, ysofjLst^yjs ; or denoting nations, as, Usgo-ys, Per- 
sian, V. ITg^cra, but Us^trrjs, the name of a man, Hs§<n) : xdyvrrf, 
fisvodxy.YjS, Tt\j(jCf!i"/ihr i g also make a. But Alyrrjs, alvaostrtf, xccXXi- 
AapffgTTjj' make tj. Nouns in crrry; make a and y). 

The iEolians and Macedonians adopted the termination a even in 
the N. of these nouns : thus, litirora, for frbzWijj, vstpsXyys^ra, for 
ysfpsXrjys^srrjs. Hence the Latin N. Poeta, Athleta, &c. 

The second Declension of Latin nouns is analogous to this: 
thus, Xoyo$, Domimis, anciently written Dominos ; Xoyov, Domini; 
Xoyw, Domino, anciently Dominoi; Xoyoy, Dominum, anciently Do- 
minom; Xoye, Domine, &c. 



B 



10 





THIRD DECLENSION. 




Singular. 




Dual. 




Plural. 


N. o-WTyg, 






N. 


<rwTrip-es 9 


G. (TCUTYjg-OS, 




N.A.V. <7C0TYjg-S, 


G. 


(TCOTYjp-WV, 


D. (TCOTYip-l, 






D. 


<ru)TYip-<rt, 


A. <TQ0TY)O-0t } 




G. D. G-airfjp-oiv. 


A. 


<rooTr)p-u$, 


V. (TCOTSp. 






V. 


<rcoTYip-s$. 1 



' The correspondence of the third Declension of Latin nouns with 
the third of the Greek is obvious. In the plural of the three Declen- 
sions, it is striking. 

It has been conjectured that all nouns of t his Declension originally 
ended in $, and that the Genitive was formed by the insertion of o 
before £, as it is still in o<pi£, o<pio$ ; jxSV, fjt,vog ; ijccuc, yjgwo$, &c. 
thus, yiva.iy.St o$; a$a@$, o$ ; nfaXwits, o$ ; fivjXS-> fe» 7^$, $$> &c. 
On this principle, the terminations were e\ir\$$ t o; ; ifu§g, o$ ; 
z\s$3Lvr$, oc, &c. The effect of time on language is to abbreviate 
words, particularly those which occur most frequently ; hence fa&vf$ 
has been abbreviated into laa;, itgdypaTs into it^ay^a, itl§s into nous, 
&c. Sometimes one, sometimes the other, of the two final conso- 
nants is dropt; thus, pagTvos is softened sometimes into ^a^rup and 
sometimes into pa.gru$, cek<piv$ into §s\<p)y and 8e\<p(;. 

This analogy takes place in the Latin third Declension, of which 
the termination was in s, and formed the Genitive by the insertion 
of t, as it is still in sus, suis ; plebs, plebis ; heros, herois ; and in 
pacs, pads; rcgs, regis, &c. Hence nocts has been abbreviated 
into nox, lacts into lac, supellecti/s into supellex, &c. On the 
same principle the terminations were lapids, is; dents, is; vers, 
.is; leons, is, &c. It seems indeed as natural that orbis should be 
formed from orbs, as urbis is from urbs. To pursue the analogy to 
the end, arbors, honors, labors, are softened into arbor, and some- 
times into arbos, &c. 



11 



Accusative. , 

Nouns in ig, vg, aug, &j& whose Genitive ends in o$ 
pure, change g into v ; l as, (dor pug, G. fiorpvog, A. j3©- 
rpuv. z 

Barytons in ig and vc, whose Genitive ends in og im- 
pure, make both a and v ; as,, spig, G. sp&og, A. tpiZa 
epiv. 



and — •< J 



Vocative. 

The termination of the Vocative either, 1. shortens 
the long vowel of the Nominative, as, "Exrwp, V. "Exrty; 
or, 2. drops c, as, ju,0& V. ^.0 ; or 3. changes £ into v 9 
as, rahag, V. TaAav. 4 

Hence the Latin Ace. of the third Declension in n and m. 

Axocg also makes \6Cocv. A\g, Aiog, makes A/a. The Poets 
frequently use the regular termination in a. 

3 K\e)$, kXstiof has both terminations. Arjpoo-Qsv-ys makes sa 
and ijv. Xd%i$, a Grace, has Xa^ira j %a^, favor, %a^/v. 

4 The consonant preceding the £ final of the Nominative had 
been dropt, but re-appears in the Vocative, which is thus shortened, 
as, TaAav$-, V. raAav. 

Some Vocatives remain the same as their Nominatives : as, 
1. Participles. 2. 'OSovs and 1:015 ; but OlSlirov and ^aAxotfou 
are sometimes found. 3. Oxyton Nouns in 1$ and u$, as s\ir)$ 9 
XXctpvs. 4. Nouns, in tjv, as irojpjv. 5. Oxytonsin wv, as Dafinj&yy. 
6.*Aff"n^, n/Tjp, &c. 

But the Poets, in many of these, prefer the termination shortened 
either in quantity or in the number of letters. Nouns in £/;, svro$, 
make the V. in si and ev, as, ya^zii, V. x^'isi and x a §' iey ' Fvveu% 
makes yvvcti ; oVag often makes avec. 



12 



The Dative Plural 

is formed from the Dative Singular by inserting <r 
before / ; as, g-wttjp, (rwTrjpi, crcorrjptTi ; yxrty, yv7r), yu\|//. 
But o\ 0, v, r, are dropped for the sake of softness, as 
7ia[x7ra^i, Xa^7rcto"<. Ovti is changed into ov<ri, as 

TU7TT0VT/, T\>7TT0VG-i. 

Words ending in g after a diphthong add i to the 
Nominative Singular ; as, Tvwsig, tottsTo-*. 1 

Nouns syncopated make the Dative in ouri ; as, 
7ra,T7jf>, ira/repi, 7rotrp>) } irarpao'iJ' 



CONTRACTION. 

Two syllables, in which two or more vowels meet 
together, are often contracted into one. 

A contraction of two syllables into one, without a 
change of letters, is called Synarresis ; as, tsi%$\\ tsi%£i> 

If there is a change of vowels, it is called Crasis ; as, 
T£i%sog, T£i%ovg. 

Contraction takes place in every Declension. 



x Except JtreVf, y.i'sori ; tyopeus, tyo^'scrr, vlsv$, vlscri ; ou^, wVi ; 
irov$, m<r) ; which are regular from xtsv), tyopei, vis'i, wt), iroSL 
T%£i$ makes f§i <ri. 

a This is done to avoid harshness. Thus in dvfydivi, § is inserted 
because g> never follows v. Tacn^ retains yoccrrrj^cri. Xe)§ makes 
X £ Z? 1 from the poetic %eci. 

These rules apply to adjectives and participles as well as to 
substantives. 



13 

In the First Declension, sa is contracted into yj ; as 
ysa, yr i9 G. ykag, yvjg, &c. 

Pea, and all other terminations, drop the former 
vowel ; as, Ipsa, epd, G. epsag, spdg, &c as-Xoij, a7rX^, 
G. a7rAo7jC, a.7r?^rjC, &C. 

In the Second Declension, if the latter vowel is short, 
the contraction is in 00 ; if long, the former vowel is 
dropt ; as, voog, vo*jg, G. i)oou, vov, &C. 1 

Contracts of the Third Declension. 

1. Nouns in vg, uog, have only two contractions, usg 
and nag into ug ; thus fiorpug, PI. N. V. fdorpueg, fiorpvg, 
A. fiorp'jagj (dorpug. 2 ' 

2. Nouns in ig and 1 have ///red contractions, ti into i, 
i?c and iag into *c ; thus, 

N. >k, 

PL N. V. o$igf, o<f>i^ 

A. o^-iag, fyig. 

Neuters in * make the plural in ia, i. z 

1 The compounds of voo$ and poos are not contracted in the 
neuter plural, or in the Genitive: thus we say, sCvocx,, svvowv, not 
suva, zvvcov. 

Y<£o$ is contracted thus : Sing. N. <rdo$, <rw$ t A. craov, <rw : PI. A. 
trdovs, <raoc$, coo$ ; <raa, ca. 

2 Nouns in ovg also contract the same cases : as, /Sou;, PI. N. A. 
fios$ and /3oa;, jSouj. Nay; makes in the PI. A. vaa;, ><x,v$. 

3 This form in i$, 105, is properly Ionic. Nouns in ;; are more 
commonly inflected in so$, D. si, si. Dual. N. eg, G. £0<v. PI. N. 
V. £s;, s;;. G. ecuv, D. sen, A. sa$, si$. But the most usuaj form 
of the Genitives is the Attic, in sw$ and ewy. 



14 

3. Nouns in m and mg J have three contractions, oog 
into 0O5, oi' into o r , and oa into a> : thus, 



N. 


«<§W£, 




G. 


OiMOOCy 


cdtouc, 


D. 


uMoiy 


ailoi) 


A. 


cdlociy 


aiHoo. 



4. Nouns in svg, uc, and u, making in the Genitive 
soc, have yowr contractions, si' into s7, se into ij, ssg and 
sa£ into slg ; thus, 



N. fiu<ri\sv$ 9 

D. fia<n\s'i, /3a<r/As7; 

Dual. N.A.V. f}ot<ri\is 9 poto-iXn; 

Plural. N. V. fiuTi\h$, (oaai\fi$, 

A. (5u(ri\iag, (3oc(n\slg. 

Neuters in u make the N. A. and V. PL in sa, tj. 

5. Nouns in yg, eg and o£ are contracted in evert/ 
case, except the N. and V. Sing, and the D. PL thus, 



Singular. 

N. T(>tY)p-Y)S, 

G. TgiYjp-svs, ovg, 

J). TglYjps'i, Sly 

A. T^p-My fly 

V. Tpiyp-sg. 



Dual. 

N.A.V. TpiY)g-e6yY h 

G.jy. TplYip~e<HV,OlV. 



PluraL 

N. Tgfy-SES, £l$y 

G. rpiYip-ecov, a*v, 

D. TglYjg-SCTl, 

A. Tgiyg-sotey eig, 
V. Tyloses, ei$. 



1 These terminations are similar to those of the 4th Latin Declen- 
sion, gelu, gradus. 



* The V. Singular ends in oi. 



15 

Neuters in eg and oj make the N. A. and V. PI. in 

6. Neuters in ag pure and p*g are both syncopated 
and contracted in every case, except the N. A. and V. 
Sing, and the D. PI. thus, 

G. XSgUTOg, X=pX0$, X = OMC y 

D. X5§UTl 9 xipa'i, xspu. 

Dual. 
N.A.V. xiqvrz, xsgete, xeptx, 

G.D. XSpiXTOIVy XSgUOiV, XSgXV. 

Plural. 

N.A.V. xefUTCt, xlpctct, xiqct, '_ 
G. xepuTMV, xepuoov, xspuiv. 

7. Some nouns are contracted in every case : thus, 
la/?, r)p 9 G. sapog, ypog, &c. Xaac, hag, G. Xaaoc, Xaoc, &C 

IRREGULAR NOUNS. 

Some nouns have different genders in the singular 
and in the plural/ 



1 Proper names -in x?Jr^ are doubly contracted : thus, 'H^axX-sr^ 
ijS, A. 'HtaxA-eso^, sous, -so;, ou$, &c. 

Nouns in oj; pure contract the A. into a. as well as into q: thus, 
$'j<pvr^, A. ev<pv&&) svCvrj and evtpva. 

'Av/Jo, ATjpjri^, and Quydrr^ are syncopated in all cases, except 
the D. PI. So also dor,-/, d^svoc, devof ; xvouv, xvovo$, xvvo$. To 
these may be joined 7rarr^, ^yr>j£>, and yao-rr^ ; but they are not 
syncopated in the A. Sing, in the G. or A. PI. to avoid the .similarity 
with irar^a, pjrgia, and yajrr^a, of the first Declension. 

* Masculine in the Sing, and neuter in the PI. 8l<p§-o$, -a -, e^sr/x-o;, 



16 

Some have different Declensions. 
Some are undeclined.* 



-a; X>vy-o$> -a; po^X-os, -a.; vcot-o;, -cc; vrctfy-os, -a;ra^ap-o^, -a; 
T^dyrriX-og, -a. This neuter comes from the obsolete Sing, in ov. 

Masculine in the Sing, masculine and neuter in the Plural, htr^-oc, 
-o) and a ; xvx\-o$,-oi and a ; \v%y-o$,-oi and oc. 

Feminine in the Singular, feminine and neuter in the Plural, 
•xsXevQ-osy-oi and a. 

1 Some have different terminations in the Nom. as, MwinJV and 
Mcv<revs ; ung 3 vku$ and vlo$ ; udxctg, wdxec^s and ^ccxd^io$ ; 8dx§u 9 
Sdxgvov ; 7TAavc»f, tfXdvy ; crri^avo^, o-retpdvr, ; <rrgctTo$, o-rgoLria; itXa.- 
cryg, itXccG-T^; ; tritdvis, o-rfavla,; Ssvfyos, £gv5f0v ; dsQXov, deQXiov ; 
6V, 6<v; &>£U, Sogots ; yovv and yova, &c. So we find jarjAa and 
/x^Aara, it^o^droig and tffo/3acn, ys^ovroi; and ysgoviri, &c. Thus 
in Latin thematis for tkematibus, &c> 

Some admit different inflections from the same Nominative, as 
*iy§-if» ~ l °S and -*Jo^ ; Qep-t$, -ifog and -faros ; 0aA-->js, -oy and 
-tjt'oj ; w A§'r t $ 9 -oy, -eo$ and -Tjrof ; the compounds of tfoyV make in 
the Gen. Troy and irooos. &c. 

Some nouns are declined from obsolete Nominatives ; as, yyvij, 
yvvouxos, from yvvaig ; yaAa, ydXa.xrog y from yaAa£ ; ojffa^, Tjffa- 
ros; (pgsccg, <pgia,ros ; yoVjf, vSxtos, &c. 

'lrj(rov$ makes 'Ir y croyV in the A. and 'I^coy in the other cases. 

AfOv&V makes AfOvOV in the A. and AfOvy in the other cases. The 
name of Jupiter is thus varied : 

Zed;, G. , D. , A. Zavv, V. Zeu. 

or AsyV, or BSdg, 

Zyv, Zrpos, Zyv), Ztjvcc. 

AV> AfoV, Af)", Ala. 

a Aptots : £cJ for SvS{ia ; xaca ; the names of the letters; foreign, 
names not susceptible of Greek inflexions, as, 'A/S^oca/xj and all 
numbers from itevre to iMrw, both inclusive. 



17 

Some have one case only. 1 

Some have but two cases.* 

Others have only three cases. 5 

Some have no Singular, 4 others no Plural. 5 



* Monoptots: in the Sing. N. &w$. V. w tiv. 

In the PI. N. -xaraxAwfle^. G. idow. V.w itQitoi. 

Diptots : aptpcv, dfx0oHv ; fQolss," pflo/of ; Afc, A7v. 

3 Triptots : G. aAAiJAwy, D. dX\rj\-oif, ou$, ot$, A. aAAijA-oy;, 
«;, a. These have only the N. A. and V. jS^sra^, fc'jxa$-, Astfaf, 

4 The names of festivals ; some names of cities, &c. 

5 *AA;, yij, sXcuov, irvg, and many others known by the sense- 



Patronymics. 



From the Father's name the Greeks form an appellative for the 
descendants, generally according to the following rules : 

1 . To form the names of Men, the termination of the G. of the 
Father's name is" changed into i$r t $, as Kjovoy, K§9vi8r t s, 'Argk; 
'Argei8ri$. From names of the First Declension, or which have 1 in 
the penult, the change is into afys, asBogsov Bo§ed8r i c/K?dou , H?udS^- 
If the penult, is long, the change is into i&Sijc, as, TsXa^wvos 
'TeXcL^uuvid^g. 

The Ionic form is wy, the iEolic Biog, as, KfowW, Kgovlhof. 

2. To form the names of Women, the termination is changed 
into a;, 1$, ivij and iwi}, as Ugidpov Ilf tap.);, 'Axfjowu *Axf<«wy5j. 

A vowel is sometimes added, as, EtyAsiflifyf for IT7jAe/fy;; qi 
dropt, as, Nijfiiyij for liityf siyrj. 

c 



18 



ADJECTIVE. 

Adjectives are declined like substantives* 
Declensions of adjectives are three : 

The first of three terminations ; 

The second of two ; 

The third of one. 

1 . Adjectives of three terminations end in 



M. 


F. 


N.. 


Hi 


«> 


ov7 


*** 


*l> 


ov; 


"$> 


CHTCty 


av; 


«s. 


aw*, 


av; 


sis, 


SU7U, 


ev; 


"h 


strtrct., 


if 


w> 


SIVCt, 


ev; 


ov$, 


Qva-a, 


ov; 


ou$, 


ov<r<rot, 


ov; 


vs> 


ZiOL, 


t>; 


<>S> 


v<rot, 


vv; 


w, 


6UT0C, 


ov; 


cav, 


w<rat, 


wv; 


CUV, 


ova-en. 


ovv; 


«}$, 


ui<ru, 


<*>$; 


*h 


viet, 


0$. 



1 Eo$, sa 9 sov is contracted into ov$, a, ovv, as, dgyvg-sos, sot, sov 
into dgyv§~ov$, oi, ovv. 

* Oo$, or}, oov, and so;, sm, sov, are contracted into ov$, yj, ovv ; 
as, dtX-oo;, 6y, oov into difK-ovs, ij, ovv; %f>u'cr-£C>/, ey, sov into 
Xfuc-ou;, ij, ovv. 

3 Ms\iro-si$, £o-<roc, sv is contracted into pfXir-ovf, ourfoi, ovv ; 
firsts, sera, sv into tf'jx-TjV, yjco~z, ijv* 



19 



Adjectives in og pure and pog make the feminine in a ,• 
other adjectives in o$ make it in 71. * 



Singular. 

N. [iccxg-o$y a, ov, 
G. paxp~ov, ci$, ov, 
D. potxp-ip, a, aS, 
A. /xaxp-ov, ay, ov, 
V. jx-axp-e, a, ov. 



Dual. 

N.A.V. (Ji,otxp-co,a,co, 

G .D.ftaxp-o7v,a7v,oiv. 



Plural. 

N. fxotxg-o), a), a, 
G. ftax^-wv, 

D. [xaxp-ols, otls, ois, 
A. ffcaxp-ou$, a$, a, 
V. paxg-o), «», a. 



Singular 



N. x«X-o^, 
G. xaA-oD, 
D. xaA-ay, 
A. xaA.-ov, 
V. xaA-e, 




In the Dual and Plural like /xaxpo'j. 



Four adjectives, aXXoc, ttjX/koutoc, toioutos, tootoutos ; 
and four pronouns, o$- relative, ay-roc, and its compounds, 
turog, sxs7vo$, make the neuter in o. z 



* Adjectives in so$ and oo$, not preceded by g> , make the Fern, 
in ij. 

The Attics use the termination 05 for masc. and fern, particularly 
in compounds and derivatives. Thus quis is used by Plautus for 
masc. and fern. 



* Toiovrov, T0<rovrov and fdvrov, neuters, are sometimes found, 



20 



Singular. 




Singular* 


\ 


N. 7T*$, 


Trawra, 


TtSiVj 


N. TtHr-S»$, 


e7<ra, 


kr 


G. xuvtoSj 


TraoTjf, 


irctVTbs, 


G. TW7T-£vT0$, 


6I(HJJ, 


kvT0$ 9 


D. 7ravT», 


ira<rjj, 


tiravri, 


D. TUTT-EVTi, 


6I(T1}, 


kvri, 


A. ffaVTa, 


Tracrav, 


ItUVy 


A. TU7T-£VT«, 


s'ktocv, 


■**. 


V. 'wis, 


7ra<ra, 


irotv. 


V. TV7r-e)$, 


eiara, 


6V. 




Dual. 




Dual. 




N.A.V.jravre, 7nx<Tcc f 


TTOLVTSy 


N-A-V.-iw-eWe, efoet 


j ewe, 


G.D. 7t«vtojv, 7ra<raiv 


f TTOLVTOIV, 


G.D. TV7r-SVT0lV f eiffOUVj CVTWl 




Plural. 




Plural. 




N. iruvres, 


itaurcuy 


%0LVT0L t 


N. TV7t-£vTS$, 


iltraty 


evra, 


G. wa vtojVj 


wotcwv, 


iravrcav, 


G. TU7r-evra)V, 


ei<reev, 


SVT60V 


D. ?ra<n, 


7Tix<rou$, 


noun, 


D. TUTT-SJCn, 


elrcus, eieri, 


A. wavTaj, 


ireio-as, 


KOLVTCl, 


A. TOTr-evra^, 


ela-otg, 


evT«, 


V. 9ravTS£, 


TtOLVOLi) 


<na.VTU. 


V. Tvw-evres, 


ZifTCHy 


evra. 



Singular. 
N. (i£\-a$, 
G. y,sK-ctvo 3 y 

D. fUk-OlViy 

A. fteA-ava, 



ocivoc, 

etlwiS, 

aivY), 

UIVQLV, 



uvog, 



av, 



«v. 



Dual. 

N.A.V. pix-ave, a»Wj 
G.D. fx.e\-a.voiv s uivenv, 

Plural. 
N. fxik-otvss, OLIVCLI, 

G. fieX-avwv, ouvcbv> uvcdv, 

D. juiX-acrf, otivMg, ct<r i, 

A. [AsX-ctvas, ctlvctg, etvct, 

V. /*eA-ave£, «4V«i, av«. 



ava, 



Singular. 

N. xotpl-eic, e<rcr<x, sv, 
G. xoiqi-svTO$, e<r<r>}?, evToj, 
D. %ag»-em, eV<r*j, evri, 
A. x,*pl-evTOL 9 s<r<rctv, sv, 
V. x/otpi-ei or -ev, e<r<ra, e#. 

Dual. 

N.A.V.^aj9i-svTe,eWa,£VT*, 
G. D.^agj-gvTOJV^ecro-aiv, gVTSitf. 

Plural. 
N. %ag*-6VT£j, ecrai, evT«, 
G. ^a^i-evTcoy, s<rcr(ov. ivroov, 
D. xupi-eun, s<r<rau$, «<n, 
A. %oigl-evTot$, eVcraj, evrot, 



21 



Singular. 



N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 

N. 
G. 



TSg-SVOC, 

rsg-evt, 
Tsp-evu, 
rep-sv, 



Siva 
t 






6V> 

€VOf, 

en. 



g<vav, ev, 



Dual. 



ev. 



A.V, 



Tip-eve, siva , ev= 9 



N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 



D. rs^-svoiv, slvctiv, ivoiv. 

Plural. 

feg~eve$, sivoti, evcc, 

Teg-ivwv, etvcov, svoov, 

reg-scri, elvctt$, £<ri 9 

Tep-EVa$ } slva$ 9 eva, 

rip-svec 9 eivoti, svx. 



N. Sole, 



Singular. 



>OUCT«, 



bOV, 



G. SoVTOS, $QV<n\$ } d0VT0C y 
D. &0VT1, SouVlJ, 80VTI, 

A. §6vT0t, Soucrav, 8ov, 
V. Souj, SoDcra, $ov. 

Dual. 

N . A . V . 8oro> Soucra, lovre, 

G. D. loVTQW, doVG-CtlV, SOVTGIV. 

Plural. 

N. 8ovT£j, 5o0<rai, &o'vr#, 

:G. loVTCtiV, Soutmv, &OVTWV, 

D. ~8oD<ri, Sowraig, S0&V1, 

A. SoVraj, §o6<ruc, SoVra, 

V. .Sovtsj, $oti<r«i, SoVra. 



Singular. 

N..wXax-ou$, otJcrcra, oSv, 
G. TrAax'OuvTO^ouo-cn^, oui/to$, 
D. 7rAax-ouvTi, ovW>j, ouvn, 
A. 7rXax-ouvT«, ou<r<rav, ouv, ' 
V. n\ctX'Qvv or ou, oOWa, ouv. 

Dual. 

N . A . V .7r\ax-ovvTs,ov<ra'oi,ovvTe } 
G . D. 7r\otx-ovvTow, ov<r<ruiVy 

QVVTOIV. 

Plural. 

N. TAax-oyvT££, ov<r<r«/, ouvfa, 
G.TrXax-ouyrwv, oyo-<rwv, ouvtwv, 

D . TtKuX-OUGl, 0U<T(TCtiS 3 OU(Tly 

A.nKux-ovvTcte, ovcr<rct$, ovvtoc, 

V .7T\0tK-0VVT£$y QlHTVUly oOVT«. 



Singular. 

N. 6g-V$, fiCty 

G. of-eo^ slasy 

Dif. A. ~ / 

. 0£-S», 61, £12, 

A. 6%-VVy StCiVy 

V. o£-ti, sTa, 



60£, 



Dual. 

N.A.V. o£-es, £i«, 65, 
G. D. 6%-iotVy elctiVy sow. 

Plural. 

N. 6%-isg, He, fixiy kuy 

G. og-ecoVy eiwv, ecov, 

D. o£-£<n, sioa;, gTJ, 

A. o%4u$y ei$, slots, eot, 

V. o£-e=j, eT;, slaty eeu 



£2 



Singular. 
N. &vyv-v$, vast, 

G. %zVyV-VVTO$, V<TY}S, 

D. Z~vyv-vvTt, very, 
A. Zzvyv-vvra, v<rav, 
V. Xeuyv-itg, vvu., 



Wy 

VVTOCy 

vv. 



Dual. 

N.A.V- %evyv-vvrs, 6<rcc, vvts, 

G.D. ^SVyV-UVTOlV^UG-CUVfVVTOlV. 

Plural. 

N. &vyv-vvTE$, v<rai, vvroi, 
G. ^evyv-vvTcov, v<roiV y vvtmv, 
D. &oyv-6<n, 6(rat$, vcri, 
A. Zsvyv-uvTug, 6<tuc, vvra, 
V. ietifv-uvTeg, v<rcu, vvret. 



Singular. 

N. ex-ujv' f Qvcrct, 

G. SK-OVTOC, OVO-W, 

D. eK-ovrt, oucryj, 
A. kxrovroi, ou(7av y 
V. sx-wv, ouo-a, 

Dual. 

N . A . V . 5X- OW, o uVa, 

G.D. s^htoiVj ouVaiv, 

Plural. 

N. ex-oVrej, oDVaj, i 
G. ex-ovTCJW, ovv&Vy 
D, sx-oviti, ov<rcti$, 
A. ex-oVra,, ftireft 
V. ol-ovtes, quvul, 



ev, 

OVTO$, 

QVTt, 
Of, 



OVTB } 
OVTOIV. 



OVTCtiVy 
OLKTly 

OVTU, 
OVTOL. 



Singular, 

N. TVTT-COV, ov<rot f ouv, 
G. twjt-ovvto$, ovorYjt, ovvrog, 
D. TOTr-oDvTi, ov<rrjy ovvri, 

A. TV7T-0VVTCI, OVGOLVy OUV, 
V. TVTT-WVy ov<?a, QW. 

Dual. 

N.A.V. TUTT-OVVTS, OtKTOt,, OVVTSy 

G .Ty.TU7r-o6vTOiv,ov<rctw,o6vTotv- 
Plural. 

N. TU7T-0VVTSC, OUVOLty OVVTOty 
G. TV7r-0VVTa)Vy OVGWV, OVVTUJV, 

D. Tt>7r-oycr<5 ov<rcit$y ovvt, 
A. TUT-ouvTas, oyfl-aj, ouvTtz, 
V. TU7r-ot)vTc^, o&Vat, ouvra. 



Singular. 

N. Ttfi-OOV) ■ aXTdy WVy 

G. Tip-wVTO$, uxrySj &VTo;y 

D. Tip-VOVTly WdYiy WT\y 
A. Tlfi-VOVTOl, OXTUVy WVy 

V. n^-coVy uxrety duy. 

Dual. 

N.A.V. Ttp-wVTSy uxreCy uivre, 

G.D. Tlfi-CUVTOlVyOXrOUVy OiVTOW 

Plural. 

N. tif*.'COVTSS 9 UXTOLl, OOVTOty 
G. Tl^-UiVTUiV, (tiCOOV, COVTCUVj 

D. Tip-wen, warousy axn, 
A. *n/x-a3vT«£, oo<rct$y oovtu, 
V. Tift-wyrs^ w<t#j, aa/ra. 



25 



Singular. 

N. T«Top-eo$, u«> o$, 

G. T5TV$-GT0S, viae, otos, 

D. T£7V$-QTl, VIOL, OTt, 

A. TSTV<P'OTa, ViUV, oV) 

V. tsT'jQ-cjoc, via, 6;. 

Dual. 

N.A.V. iteiiiQ-oTe, vice, ore, 

G.D. TSTV$-0T<HV, VICllV, 0T01V. 

Plural. 

N. TeTVty-OTSC, VltXl, QTClj 

G. TzTV$-0TMV, VM>V, OTCOV, 

D. tstu<£-oVj, u<«i£, oV<, 

A. TSTV<p-OTCl$ } VlCt$, OTOC, 

V. T5TV$-0Tc$, vlui, OTCt. 





Sing 


alar. 




N. 


etrr-cur, 


WTOty 




G. 


l(TT-«;Tor, 


&fiji, 


UTC$, 


D. 


k<7T-WTl, 


My, 


WT», 


A. 


S&T-COTClj 


Oil (XV, 


aig, 


V. 


SCTT-COC, 


iZ<r<x, 


cog. 



Dual. 

N.A.V. StTT-COTc, VXTU, WTc, 
G. D. £<PT~COT0lV, COCCUV, COTOiV. 

Plural. 

N. ecrT-corsg, covcti, a/rct, 

G. sctt-cotcov, cocrcov, corcov y 

D. karr-uxri, colt ate, wart, 

A. e<rT-uiTcts, cocrag, arret, 

V. kiTT-CUTSC, COVai, COTGt, 



2. Adjective of two terminations end In 
M. F. N. 









os, 




ov; 












*?> 




*v ; 












jf* 




ev; 












nf. 




e$i 












*$> 




*; 












ovg, 




ow; 












VS, 




»; 












cov, 




ov; 












cog, 




op; 












<»$> 




(OV. 








Singular. 




Dual. 






Plural. 


N. 


evdo%~og, 


ov, 








N. 


evSof-o/, a. 


G. 


evSog-ov, 




N.A.V. 


£v8oj*co, 


G. 


svUij-iov, 


D, 


evfo'Z-io, 










D. 


6v8o£-o<£, 


A. 


ev$o£-ov, 




G.D. 


IvcVf 


)iV. 


A. 


evM%-ovg, «, 


V. 


evfog-e, 


oy. 








V. 


ev&ojj-o», *. 



Sing. 

N. delv-CLf, av, 
G. dsivavrof, 
D. deivavfi, 
A. aelv-ixvra, av, 
V. deivctv. 

Sing. 

N. app-^v, sv, 
G. dppevo$ f 
D. dopsvi, 
A. aipp-sva,, sv, 
V. appev. 



24 

Dual. 

N.A.V. aslvavrt, 
G.p, aejyayrojy. 



Dual. 

N. A. V. appevsi 
G. D. dposvoiv. 





Plur. 


N. 


deiv-ocvtsst olvtoc, 


G. 


dsivdvYwv, 


D. 


delvao'it 


A. 


dsiv-avras, avra* 


V. 


d&w-CLrteSi oivtOL-, 




Plur. 


N. 


app-sv£$ f sva, 


G. 


dppsvtvv, 


D. 


appetrt. 


A. 


app-evoc;, svcc, 


V. 


ccpo-evsc, sva. 



Sing. 
N. d\ifi-^s, h, 
G. dXyft-eoe, ovc, 
D. dXrfi-i'if si, 
A. d\rfi-ea,y rj, eg, 
V. dkrfie;. 



Dual. 

N.A.V. aA^-c's,^, 
G.D. dXrfi-ioiV) oiv. 



Plur. 
N. dXrfi-sec, ei$ 9 ia t i- s 
G. dXvfi-ewv, «5V, 
D. aAvjflgVf, 
A. dXrfi4a,g t EigySa,y r h 
V. dXrjQ-sse, e7$, set, f. 



Sing. 
N. su%ao-;;, <> 
G. svxdftros, 
D. ev^d^itt, 
A. ey^a^-jra, jy, /, 

Sing. 
N. tfwr-ouj, oyy, 
G. Siiro$o$ t 
D." $Mr"o&, 
A. Swr-o$a, oyy, ouv, 
V, &V«oy;,oy, oyy. 



Dual. 




Plur. 




N. 


evy^-irssy ira, 


N.A.V. svydpfe, 


G. 


sv%oi§trwv 9 


G. D. gy^afiroiy. 


D. 


stydquri, 




A. 


Evxdg'iras, ttoc x 




V. 


EV%dg-lfBSt WO" 


Dual. 




Plur. 


. 


N. 


ok-ofc$ t o£a, 


N.A.V. &»&, 


G. 


&7ro£«/v, 


G.D. hitofow. 


D. 


5mto«, 




A. 


$lir-o8ct$, G&Z, 




V. 


S'nr-oSe?, o$ac. 







25 








Sing. 


Dual. 




Plur. 


N. 


ccSaxg-vs, v, 




N. 


a^axf-ug^,uf,ya, 


G. 


dSdxgvos, 


N.A.V. dSdxgvs, 


G. 


dfiaxgvojy, 


D. 


dSdxgvi, 


G. D. dSxKgvoiv. 


D. 


d8dxgv<ri, 


A. 


dSctxg-vv, v, 




A. 


dSdxg-vas* us', ua, 


V. 


afaxgu. 




V. 


dLSaxf-veSf v$, ucc. 




Sing. 


Dual. 




Plur. 


N. 


cuxpg-uiVj oy, 




N. 


<ruxpg-ovs$, OVOL, 


G. 


<ru><p§ovos, 


N. A. V. (ruxpgovs, 


G. 


aruxpgovwv, 


D. 


(TUXpQQVl, 


G. D. ruxpgoyoiy. 


D. 


<rwf§o<ri, 


A. 


ffuxpg-ova,, oy, 




A. 


trwipf-ovocs, ova, 


V. 


PWtpgQY. 




V. 


<rw(p§-Qys$ t ova,. 1 



Sing. 
N. [^syaXrjt-ujg, og, 
G. p,zya\r(togos> 
D. psyakyTOgl, 
A. pzyaX-rp-o^a, o§, 
V. ftsydXyrog. 



Dual. 

N.A.V. pzya\yro§s, 
G. D. psyahvpogoiv. 



Plur. 

N. psyaXyr-ogss, of a, 
G. jocsyaA^ropwy, 
D. [AEy<x,\rjrQg<ri, 
A. psyaXrjf-ogaSfQgcc, 
V. fi.sya,\r t r'0§es 9 o§a. 



Sing. 
N. evys-u}$, wv, 
G. stiysui, 
D. svysiv, 
A. svyswv, 
V. siiys-ws, wv. 



Dual. 

N. A. V. svysw, 
G. D. svyew. 



Plur. 

N. suys-co, ou, 
G. sijyswvi 
D. evysiyf, 
A. gt'ye-wf, w, 
V. svys-ty, cu. 



a In the same manner are declined Comparatives; but they synco- 
pate and contract the A. Sing, and the N. A. V. Plur. thus, 
S. A. ju,£iS-ova, oa, w. 
PI. N. V. jw,g/?-ov£f, oss, ous ; ova, oa; w ; 



26 



3. Adjectives of one termination are Masculine and 
Feminine, 1 and declined regularly after the third declen- 
sion of nouns. Such are Apira!;, [AOLxpQ%stp, <pvyas> & c » 



Irregular Adjectives. 

Msyag and no^bs have only the Nom. Ace. and Voc. 
Masc. and Neuter of the * Singular, and borrow the 
other cases from peyak-og, r), ov, and ttoXA-o£, y, 6v: thus, 



Sing. 
N. ME'rAS, psydXy, ME'rA, 
G. y,sydX-ov, ys, ou, 
D. psydX-cy,, r\ t cv, 
A. ME'rAN, psydXyv, META, 
V. META, pzydXr}, ME'TA. 

Dual. 
N. A. V. (x-eydx-w, a, a;, 
G.D. [LsydX-oiv, cuv, oiv. 

Plur. 

N. psyaX-oi, a/, a, 
G. psydXcvv, 
D. peydX-Qi;, «<£> Ots, 
A. psydX-ovs, asy cc, 
V. psydX-oi, a;, a. 



Sing. 
N. nOA'TS, tfoAAr), nOA'T,* 
G. tfoAA-ov, yj$, w, 
D. TtoXX-cy, ^, cT, 
A. nOA'TN, tfoAA^, ITOaX 

v. noA v r, ttoaa^, noAr. 

DupI. 

N.A.V. ttoAA-w, a, cy, 
G. D. TtoXX-tTtVy ouv> o7v. 

Plur. 

N. ttoAA-o;, a?, a, 
G. itoXXwv, 
D. TtoXX-oi$, eels, 0%, 
A. itoX\-ou$, d$, a, 

V. tfoAA-01, a), a. 3 



1 The Neuter is expressed by another adjective ; thus for the 
neuter of <x£7ta£, dgitaxriKw is used. 

2 The Poets decline the Masc. of tfoXv$ like 6%vc. 
To these may be added pdxag, [Adnata, ^dxa§. 



Comparison. 

The Comparative is formed by the addition of repog, 
the Superlative by the addition of rarog, to the Nomina- 
tive ; as fxaxoLp, [AOLxap-rspog, [xaxap-raTog. 

Adjectives in og drop g ; as [xaxp-og, orspog, oraTog. 
If the penultima is short, o is changed into <o ; as oroQ-og, 

WTSpog, WTOLTOg.* 

Adjectives in Big drop / ; as %a,pi-£ig, ea-rspog, ItrrcLTog. 

Adjectives in ac, rig, and vg add rspog and rarog to 
the neuter ; as juixac, fx&av-Tepog, rarog : Adjectives 
in wu to the Nom. Plur. Masc. as a-dxppwv, (raxppovea-- 
repog, rarog. 

Irregular Comparison. 







In 


tcov, icrrog. 


z 






*\<rxp°S> 




aifrylaiVj 


aiar^KTTog. 






*xH°s> 




&J(9lu)V f 


S^KTTOg. 






otuhog. 




xotWtoov, 


%OLKk\<TTQg* 






xutiiog, 




xvltcov, 


Kuh<TT0$* 






patiiog, 




p&oov, 


p«CTT0f. 






Tsp7rvog, 




T£g7TVlC0V f 


regirviOTog. 






$l\oc, 




<$iAiW, 


<P'l\KTT0g.* 





1 Otherwise four short syllables would come together. To avoid 
three, Homer sometimes lengthens a short one. 

BaSuf, /3fa&5;, jSfa^uf, y\v>iu$, rfivg, ntayug, ra^vg, Mg, &c. 
make <wy, itrtog, as well as te§os, rarog. Some of these also change 
the last syllable into cnrcuv, as j3a0yV, pdffcrwv ; ykvxug, yXura-cuv, &c, 

3 These are formed from the substantives syftog, x&Wog, &c. 
f ikog makes also <pl\-rsgog, rarog. 



28 



6\iyo$, 



<xyctvo$, 



In tarrepog, urrarog. 

kctklO-TSpog, Xot\lO~TOlT0$. 



6\iylo~re§o$, 



oXiylcrrarog. 



otpeivoov, 

otpetctiv, apiOToe..* 

/3sXt/cov, ") a . 

7 V jScATKJTOf. 

ftkTSpOC, y 

xpel<r<rcov, ^ 

XgSlTTCQV, S Xp&THTTOS, 

xappcovy \ 

\<mw, "> XcoVtrroj, 6 

Xcawv, 3 A«5<rroj. 

C QepT&Tog, 

<p£§TSpO$, "\ $SpUTTO$ f 

£ QepTUTTOS. 7 



1 Some are formed by the Attics in airegos, oura.ro$ ; some by 
the Attics aud Ionics in e<rrsgo$, s<rfa,ro$. 

* From dpsvos, amcenus. 'AyaQw faros is rarely found. Thus 
Varro has used bonissimus and malissimus, 

3 From v A§rj$, valiant as Mars, or from agi, eminent. 

* From fiov\o[Mu, to wish ; as optimus from opfo. 

5 From xf aruj, brave. 

6 From Aw for flgAco, to wish. 

7 From peg w, to bear. 

In the application of these different words to auyaMs, that adjec- 
tive must be understood to signify not only good, but strong and 
brave ; qualities, which were thought the most desirable in the early 
ages of civilization. Thus among the Romans Courage was thought 
the first and most manly virtue, hence called Virtus, from Vir* 



29 



xxxog, 



KoXvg, 



, J- XCtXUTTOg . 

K0CX.ICOV) y 



fisyocg, iLelfav, peyHTTog. 

C (MXgOTSpOg, 

1 fASioregog, 

(UXpOSj -i JAUOOV, fJLS~i<rTO$. 

I e\tx<r<r'jov f !A«p£«rro£ .' 



wXskov, 



7rA£7(TT0J. 4 



* FromsAa;£Uf, small. 

* From yj<r<ruj t to sit low ; or from tjkx, lowly. 

3 From itxiog, full. 

4 Sometimes a double comparison is found ; as from x e ' l § a>y » 
worse, is formed y^i^ors^og : thus in Shakespeare, worser. From 
fisicov, /m, is formed psiorsgog, thus lesser, &c. From eXa^^r^ is 
formed sXoc^KrTore^og ; from KuSurrog, xv$l<rrarog. Thus in the 
Psalms, Mostf Highest, to express the superlative excellence of the 
Supreme being. 

Comparisons are also made from nouns : 



fioLViXev-g, ts^g, fatog, 
Qsog, Qeujregog. 

XE$S-0g, tOUV, IfftOC, 

xXi^t^g, i<rra.To$. 



TTXijxr-ijj, 

nrot-rjg, 
ply-og, 
<pu>§, 



KrfOLto;. 
itrrarog. 
urrog. 



Thus in Latin, oculissimus. 
From a pronoun : 

autbg, ipse, avrorocrog, ipsissimus. 
From adverbs: 



aw, 


aw-tsgog, 


farog. 


XOCtCU, 


KOLTCU'tE^Og, 


tarog* 


cupug, 


dtpdg-i'sgog. 




TtOppUJ, 


TToppw-TSgog, 


rafog. 


£<rtv, 


e<rw-rsgog, 


farog. 


tffoVw, 


it$o<rw-Ts$og, 


rajtog. 


*&> 


£ » t 


rocrog. 


TtQVtH, 


Tt$vjiod-Te%og t 


Tortog, 


iyyvg, 


\ syyv-rs§og, 


fctfog. 


otfliru}, 


Qifto-w-rs^og, 


rocrog. 




Leyy-iwv, 


l?T0g. 


v$t, 




vypi9*rog. 



so 







Numerals. 






One. Sing. 


Two. Dual. 


Two, Plur. 


N. 


e7$, \M&> eV, 






G. 


evo$, p&, ivos, 


N. A. 860 z or Suw, 


G. SvJjVf 


D. 


ivi, pia, sv), 


G. D. 8uoiy or Sveiy.' 3 


D. W. 


A. 


evoc, puxv, sv. 







From prepositions : 

rtgo, rfgo-fsgos, Taros, by syncope and contraction aguh'os. 
Meg, vrfeg-rsgosy raro$, by syncope vtfaros. 

The relation existing between certain adjectives of frequent occur- 
rence in all the European dialects, in a similar irregularity of compa- 
rison, is remarkable. The following list, confined to one adjective, 
will prove that there is a strong analogy among them :' 

Latin, bonus, melior, optimus. 
Welsh, da, gwell, gorau. 
Armoric, mat, guel. 
Irish, maith, niossfearr. 
Russian, xorote, lytchio. 
German, gut, besscr, bestc. 
English, good, better, best. 

*The two last seem of the same origin as dyabos shortened into 
y yaA\ P'shrsgos, jSeXrioYoj. Similar to this comparative is the Per- 
sian behter. The French, Italian, Portuguese, and Spanish are not 
mentioned, as they are derived from the Latin. 

1 Thus ovh)$, ovU[l\ol, ovSev , and pj#£<;, pjfala, imjSsv, Aristotle 
uses ovQeig ; Homer, ovri$. From st$ is formed srsg-os, a, ov ; and 
from qv8s)s 9 and pySeis, ovUre§o$ and y,7}8sT£§o§. 

2 Auo is always used by the Attics. It is sometimes an aptot. 

3 Avslv is used as the feminine. From §vo is formed fovfegos and 
four at os,- 



31 



Three. Plur. 
N. *§sis, *gi&9 

G. fgiwy, 

D. f^ur), 

A. *<j£is, fgla. 



Four. Plur. 

N. feco-ag-se, oc, 

G. rEtrccigiov, 

D. fsircrago'i, 

A. rscra-aco-ag, a. 1 



The numbers according to their notation by the Greek alphabet, 
are as follow : 



afr, I, a, 1. 

Jtfo, II, ff, 2. 
t^, III, /, 3. 
rk<r<ra.%ss, IIII, 5', 4. 
Trim, II, s 3 5. 

4b ni, /; 6. 

fVra, n II, t, 7. 
iWa), II III, rj, 8. 
f yyga, n IIII, $', p. 
&?>ca, A, /, 1 0. 
J'y&=Ka, AI, td, 11. 
Sw&xa, All, //3', 12. 
fgieataiSexa, AIII, *y', 13. 
f£(r<ra§a,>tcd$£xa., AIIII, j£', 14. 
TtEVfExodfoKa,, All, if, 15. 
£>cxai££>ca, All I, */, 16. 
efffOMuSsKa, All II, /£, 17. 
0Kra>>£ai<$£>ca, All III, irj, 18. 
sYvsaxaiSexa, All IIII, #', 19. 
*7K0<r/, AA, k, 20. 
sTjcocj £%, AAI, >ca, 21. 
TpditQvra, AAA, A', 30. 



Tsovapaxoyfa, AAAA, p, 40. 
Ttsvryxoyra, W, v, 50. 
s^Kovra, J5[A, ?> 60. 
EfidopYjKovTa, ^[AA, 0, 70. 
©yfoijxoyra, !a[AAA, 7/, 80. 
evvevyxovra, JSfAAAA, ^, 90. 
sxarov, H, f', 100. 
fooatotri-oi, at, a, HH, a-', 200. 
rpaoioinoi, HHH, r, 300. 
tstrcra^aKwiot, HHHH, u, 400. 
7rsyra>co(r{o/, ]§[, <p' t 500. 
sgaxoo-ioi, ]§[H, %, 600. 
iirraatQcriQi, Jb[HH, ^', 700. 
, ovfOKOfftot, MHHH, oj, 800. 
svvEcococioi, JJHHHH, ^, 900. 
%fA/o/, X, a, 1000. 
Surxlkioi, XX, €, 2000. 
lesvraxHrxifaoi, Jx[, ; s, 5000. 
|xy'f>/o/, M, ; <, 10,000. 
Sio-pvftot, MM, y H, 20,000. 
TtEvraxHriLVgioi, JJ, y, 50,000. 
&xa>u^u'p/,]5j[]ajj[, ^, 100,000. 



To express the 9 units, the 9 tens, and the 9 hundreds, the Greeks 
used the letters of the alphabet. But as there are only 24, they 
usedr, called sTficrrj^oy, for 6 ; $, called xoWa, for 90 ; and Q, 
called ray itl, a it covered with an inverted fj*, for 900. 



32 

A mark is placed over the letters to express the numbers. Placed 
under them, it expresses thousands ; thus e is 5, s is 5000. The 
figures of the present year are jxwrf', 1814. 

In the Capitals, 

I, 1, is the niark of Unit ; H, 100, is the initial of Hsxarov ; 

IT, .5, is the initial of Usvts ; X, 1000, XiXm ; 

A, 10, AUa, ; M, 10,000,* Mv§iot. 

Each of these may be repeated four times : thus IIII, 4 ; AAA, 30 : 
MM, 20,000, &c. II inclosing a numerical letter multiplies it by 
5 ; thus pi, 50, &c. 

From 10 to 20, the large numbers may be placed first or last, 
Ssxot 8vo or 5w#£Ka, 12. From 20, the larger number is placed first, 
sixoo-i 8vo, 22. From 30, the conjunction is inserted, t^mytv. kcc) 
Svo, 32, &c. 

Of the Ordinal numbers, all under 20, except second, seventh, and 
eighth, end in ro$. From thence upwards all end in oo*ro£. Thus, 
tgwros, hvrsgog, fgi?o$, emoo'Toc;, ^iXiocrTor, &c. 

The Greeks have used the letters of the alphabet in their natural 
order, to express a consecutive series, or marks of division. Thus 
the 24 books of the Iliad and Odyssey are marked by the 24 let* 
ters, as the stanzas of the ll^th Psalm are by the Hebrew letters,. 



33 



Pronoun. 



Pronouns are divided into 



1. Personal. 



iyw, I; 
cru, thou; 
«5, of him. 



2. Possessive. 

¥~h> i ov, my; 
G-o$f <rr), <rov, thy ; 
o$ or e-oV, ij, ov, his ; 
vcoheg-os, a, .ov, our, of us two ; 
a-<paji'Ts§-o§j a, ov, your, of you 

two ; 
r)psTep-o$, a, ov, our; 
vpirep-og, a, ov, your ; 
e-tpsTep-os, a, ov, their. 



3. Relative. 
og, % o, who; 
ctvr-o$,-rj f o, he, she, it. 



4. Demonstrative. 

IxsTv-Of, >j, o, that ; 
outo£, auT>j, touto, this. 



5. Reciprocal- 
spuvTou, of myself ; 
(reauTow, of thyself ; 
savTQv, of himself. 



6. Indefinite, 
rfe t», any; 
hlvot, some one. 



Sing. 
■N. eyco, 
G. i/xou or fioVf 
D. Ifxo) or /ao», 
A. l/*g or pe. 



Dual. 


Plur 


*">% 


N. tyutsf 


N. A. vcB'i, v», 


G. fyjtAWV, 


G. D. v»iv, vaJv. 


D. rifi.lv, 




A. fyjX«?. 



34 



Sing, 



N. <rb, 

G. (TOV, 

D. <ro), 

A. *L 



Dual. 

JJ. A. o-cpdJV, tr^w, 
G. D. <r$cb'iv 9 <r<p<Zv. 



Plur. 

N. uju.s7j, 
G. v/jtwv, 

D. VfMV, 

A. u/Aaj. 



Sing. 


Dual. 


Plur 


N. 




N. o-<ps7j, 


G. OVy 


N. A. <r<pooe, <r<pe, 


G. o-<p«;v, 


D. ol, 


G. D. <t<$cojV, cr<£/V. 


D. <r<pi<n, 


A. 1 




A. «r<^«5-. 



Sing. 



N. U, % 

G. ou, fy 

A a A 



r 



Dual. 

N. A. oo, oi, oo, 
G. D. oiv, ah, oh. 



Plur. 

. oi, on, a, 
G. oov, 

D. #g, etlfy oh, 

Art «\ r/ 

. ou£, ccs, «• 



i4t>To^ and sxsjVos are declined like o$, $, ©. 

OuTog, auTY), touto is declined, and prefixes r, like 
the article, thus : 



35 



Sin! 



N. 


qiitos, 


UUTYj, 


TOVTO, 


G. 


TOUT OU, 


TCVJTY\C f 


TOUTQU, 


D. 


TOUTW, 


TXVTYj, 


TOUTGp, 


A. 


TOVTOV, 


TUVTY}Vj 


TO WTO. 



N. A. TOVTUi, 
G. D. TOVTQIV, 



Dual. 



TUVTCllV, 



Plur. 



N. 


oOto/, 


CiVTOll, 


TOLUTCtj 


G. 




TOUTCOV, 




D. 


TOUTO/£, 


TUUT/XIS, 


TOVTOig, 


A. 


TOUTOW^, 


TOtUTCtS, 


TCMTCL. 



From the Personal Pronouns and aurog are com- 
pounded " 



SfiOLVT-QV, 
(TStXVT-OVj 

kctVT-OU. 



W, GV } 



v> y, v> 



OVj >JV, 0. 



Of these the last alone has a plural : 

G. kuvT'WV, D. oiq, oug, olg y A. ov$, oi$, a. 2 



. * Homer never uses these reciprocals, but sixe ctvrov, <ri ccvrov, and 
s aurov or avrov, &c. 

For osavTou we often find, by Crasis, trauT^tT; and for iccvrov, 
avrov. The latter is used by the Attics in the three Persons. 



36 



Sing. 

N. t) 5 , t), 
G. rms f 

D. Tiv), 
A. TlVOt, Tt, 



Dual. 



N. A. 
G.D. 



TiVOiV. 



Plur. 
N. rives, riva, 
G. T/vciwv, 

D. T10"<, 

A. Tjva$, -nva.* 



N. SeTva and fc) S) 
G. 8s7va, 8g/v«T0j and heivo$, 
D. &e7va, fatvccTi and SsTvj, 
A. SeTva.. 



VERB. 

Verbs are of two kinds : 1. in /2, 2. in MI. 

Verbs have three Voices : Active, Passive, and 
Middle : z 



1 c O$ and r\$ are often joined, and signify whoever; thus, octti$, 
vfii$, ori> &c. 

2 The Middle Voice is so called because it has a middle significa- 
tion between the x\ctive and the Passive. It implies neither action 
nor passion alone, but an action reflected on the agent himself. It 
signifies what we do, I. to ourselves ; II. for ourselves. 

I. Thus (poBsotf Active signifies I frighten another person ; <po/2so- 



37 

Five Moods: Indicative, Imperative, Optative, 
Subjunctive, Infinitive. 

Nine Tenses : Present, Imperfect, Perfect* Plu- 



fMdi Passive, I am frightened by another ; but <pofieo{Ux.i Middle, 
I frighten myself, I am afraid, or I fear. QuXolttuj, I guard 
another ; <pvXdrro[MU,- I am guarded by another ; but in the Middle, 
J guard myself, or / beware. AoJoj, I wash; Aoy'oaa/, I am washed ; 
in the Middle, I wash myself or I bathe. In this sense the Middle 
combines the Active and the Passive, I frighten and am frightened, 
&c. We find the same signification in the Hithpahel form of the 
Hebrew, in the Reflective of the Shanscrit, and in the Reciprocal 
Verbs of the French. The analogy may be traced in Latin ; in 
vertor, pascor, moveor, cingor, &c. a middle sense is easily traced; 
and if no difference of inflection existed in Greek, a distinction would 
be as unnecessary as in Latin. 

II. When the Middle verb is followed by an accusative, it implies 
that the action exerted on that object is intended for the benefit or 
pleasure of the agent. Thus Xvsiv rivd signifies to set a person at 
liberty ; but when Chryses is said XvsirQou his daughter, he is under- 
stood as setting her at liberty, as redeeming her, to gratify his own 
feelings. In a slave-market ^la-^uxrag was applied to the person who 
let out slaves ; u,siM(rQu)u,£vo$ to the slave who was hired ; and pc0a;- 
<rd(Jt,evo$ to him, who hired a slave for himself. TJoXepov tfotfo-oci sig- 
nified to attack by war; but 7toiy}<rct<rQa,i to make war in self-defence. 
The latter is in more frequent use, perhaps because all states profess 
to make war only in defence of their rights or liberties. 

To this class may be referred what we procure to be done to or for 
us by another. Thus a father is said fo8d%a,<rQcu his son, when he 
has sent him to a master to be educated. 

* The Perfect expresses that, which has existed and still continues 
to exist. 



38 



perfect, First and Second Future,* First and Second 
Aorist* and in the Passive Paulo-post- Future. 1 

Three Numbers: Singular, Dual, and Plural. 



The verb s\^l, to be. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. el[ju } elg or si, \<jx\, 

1 am, thou art, he is, 
Dual. 4 earov, htiToVj 

you two are, they two are, 
Plur. i(nx,ev, lo-rs, sWl. 

we are, you are, they are.* 



1 The Second Future seems to be an Old Attic form of the First, 
and has consequently the same sense. 

a The Aorists are called indefinite in time; but in general they 
refer to something past, and may therefore be called Historical 
tenses. They are so similar in signification, that there are few verbs, 
in which both forms are used. 

3 The Paulo-posl-Future expresses that, which is on the point of 
being done. 

4 When the First Person Plural ends in y,sv, the Dual has no First 
Person. 

s In the Present, Perfect, and Future Indicative, and all the 
Subjunctive, the Third Person Plural ends in <ri or tai ; and the 
Second and Third Dual are the same. 



39 



Imperfect. 



s. 


Vh 


h> 


r\ or fy, 


D. 




rjTQVj 


V t 

rjTYiVy 


P. 


fyev, 


Future. 3 


Tjfrav." 


S. 


'icTOfLOLl, 


3f 

e0 > 


eVera/, 


D. 


ko-opsSov, 


sos<tQqv, 


gcrrfrlSov, 


P. 


6<r6y*sQa, 


e<r sards, 
Pluperfect. 


StTQVTUl. 


S. 


WW, 


fro, 


YITO, 


D. 


ypsftov, 


Y)<rQ0V, 


yjgQyiv, 


P. 


YJpsQot, 


i)(r$s, 


Y)VT0. 





IMPERATIVE MOOD. 




Present and Imperfect. 


s. 


7<r0i or ecro, eiTToo, 


D. 


&TT0V, eo-Twv, 


P. 


S(TTS } SG'TCtiO'OtV. 



1 The Imperfect, Pluperfect, and the two Aorists Indicative, and 
all the Optative, form the Dual in ov, yv. 

% In the subsequent Moods, the Imperfect is the same as the 
Present, and the Pluperfect is the same as the Perfect. 

3 This is also called the Future -Middle, and the Pluperfect the 
Imperfect Middle. 



40 



OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Present and Imperfect. 
S. e»jV ; elye, eTrj, 

P. elri[iev, e7>jTs, eirpoiv or shih 



S. 



Future. 

l(ro/jtt>)v, e<roio, s<toito, 

D. ea-olfteQov, so-oktQov, h<T0i<r$-r\v 9 

P. B(roi[xsQoc, e<roio-$s f tferoivTO. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present and Imperfect. 



s. 






fc> 




D. 






?TOV, 


)JTOV, 


P. 


cw/x-sv, 




?T^ 


co<n. 






INFINITIVE MOOD. 






Present and Imperfect. 








ttvGLl. 










Future. 










eareafai. 










PARTICIPLES 


1 








Present. 




N. 


coy, 




oocra, 


k 


G. 


ovtoc;, 




Future. 


QVTO$. 


N. 


Icrofxsyof, 


gcro/utevij, 


IcrojtAsvoy, 


G. 


s<rofj,svov : 


IcjO/JtgV))^ 


icro/xeyov* 



41 



Verbs in fl. 

There are Four Conjugations of Verbs in a>, distin- 
guished by the termination of the First Future ; 

The First Conjugation in ^w, as tutto), rvtyo. 

The Second in £o,, as Xsyco, xl|a>. 

The Third in <ra>, as Tiro, tIg-cd. 

The Fourth in a liquid before di, as -i/aT^kco, -tyoLkao. 1 

ACTIVE VOICE. 

1. The Principal Parts. 
Pres. 7U7TTW. 1st Fut. tu\[/co, Perf. tstu^«. 

2d Aor. ETV7T0V. 



1 For those learners, who may have been accustomed, or wjjo 
may give the preference, to the distinction of Conjugations by the 
characteristic, or the letter preceding cy, the principles of that system 
are here added. 

For the sake of analogy and simplification, it is necessary to 
observe that the Mute consonants are divided, with reference to the 
organs of speech, into 

Labials, pronounced by the lips, it, jS, <p ; 

Palatals, by the palate, k, y, % ; 

Dentals, by the teeth, r, 8, .0. 

The characteristic letters 
Of the First Conjugation are the Labials, with itt\ 
Of the Second, the Palatals, with <r<r ; (rr by the Attics j) 
Of the Third, the Dentals, with £ or a vowel; 
Of the Fourth, the Liquids, a, //,, v, £. 

Some verbs in <r<r-jj make the JFVrsf Future in «r# ; and some in £» 
make it in £w. 

F 



42 



2. The Moods and Tenses. 



Present 
Imperf. 
1st Fut. 
1st Aor. 
Perfect 
Pluperf. 
2d Aor. 
2d Fut. 



Indie. 


Imper. 


Opt. 


Subj. 


Inf. 


TVTTTCO "} 










STV7IT0V y 


TUTTT-S 


-OijUJ 


-w 


-eiv 


TU^-CO 




-Ol(Jt,l 




-ElV 


STw\tCC 


Tvty-OV 


-«i/Xt 


-co 


-Oil 


ST£TU<p6lV $ 


TeVu<p-e 


-0/jfcl 


-w 


-evai 


STV1T0V 


TVTT-S 


-0I/M.I 


-w 


-sTv 


TV7T-CO . 




-oTjiti 




-e7v 



-aw 

-60V 

-a); 
-cov 



3. Numbers and Persons. 





INDICATIVE MOOD. 






Present, I strike. 




s. 


TVITTCO, 


TVTTTSIS, 


TU7ZT£J, 


D. 




TVWTSTOV, 


TU7TTST0V, 


P. 


TVTTTOfXSV, 


TU7TTSTS, 


TVTTTOVO-l.* 




Imperfect 


\ 

, I was striking. 




S. 


STUltTOV) 


errmrm 


STW7TTS, 


D. 




8TV7rreT0V } 


eTU7TTSTriV, 


P. 


STV7TT0y,SVy 


BTUTtTSTSy 


stvittov. 



1 The natural, and probably the original form of the 3d Person 
Plural is ovri, from which the Latin is formed. The penultima of 
this Person is generally long, except in the Imperfect and 2d Aorist 
Indicative Active ; two tenses, which have such an affinity, that 
some grammarians believe that the 2d Aorist, when it differs in form 
from the Imperfect, is the Imperfect of an obsolete verb of a kindred 
form, as hvtov from rvitw, stayov from roLyw, &c. 



43 



\ First Future, I shall strike, 

S. rtyco, t&fy&fl Tvtyet, 

D. , TUvf/STOV, TV^STOV, 

P. Tv^opsv, rwvj/srs, TV^OWU 

First Aorist, J struck, 

P. IrCtyciftzv, stu^uts, eTurJ/av. 

Perfect, 1 have struck, 

S. TSTUQOL, TSTU$0l$, mtifS, 

D. TSTW^aTOV, tstvQoitov, 

P. TSTutpetpsv, rsTutpursy tStvQuci. 

Pluperfect, I had struck, 

S. ' 6TSTU<p£lV, STSTV<p=lC, STSTV^Sl, 

D. hsrv^irov, eTSTWpelTYjV, 

P. STSTUfStfLSV, STSTVfSlTS, eTSTV^a-civS 

Second Aorist, J struck, 

S. tfiwov, eTvireg, ztwws, 

D. eT'JTTSTOV, eTU7r£T)JV, 

P. eTuVo/Aev, sTWffere, sTuiroy. 

Second Future, J s^a// strike. 



s. 


tuttcS, 


TU7Ts7£, 


Tvnsi, 




D. 




TWTTsiTOVy 


TU7rSlT0V 9 




P. 


TyTroOftev, 


TV7rsiT€ 9 


tuttoOVj. 





1 The common form in the ancient Greek writers is ksrv<psa'ay. 



44 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 





Present, strike. 




s. 


TVTTTS, 


TU7TT5TO>, 


D. 


TVTTTSTbV, 


rVTrrsrcov, 


P. 


TV7TT6TS, 

First Aorist, strike. 


TVirTSTCtiCCtV 


S. 


TU\[/0V, 


Tvty&TUJ, 


D. 


TutytXTOV, 


TU^aTCOV, 


P. 


TU\|/aT£, 


TvtyaTootrotv. 



Perfect, have struck. 

S. reruns, TSTV<phai, 

D. TSTVQSTOV, TSTVQSTCOV, 

P. T£TU$ST£, T6T»^fiT««r«V> 



Second Aorist, strike? 



s. 


TU7TS, 


ryTrera;, 


D. 


TyT£T0V, 


TU7tItOJV, 


P. 


TU7T6T5, 


TU7rsrcocrav. 



1 It may appear strange that the Imperative should refer to a past, 
and not to a future time. To solve a part of the difficulty, some 
have called the First and Second Aorists the First and Second 
Futures. By the Present the Future also is signified. And the 
Perfect enjoins a thing to be done prior to a specified time ; as, I 
order you to have done this before I return. 

a This tense appears to be the root of the verb; thus twits of 
rviteou or fuitrw, Aa/Ss of Aa/>i/3avw, ties of r^^at, &c. The first use 
of language is to express a want, hence the Imperative was naturally 
the first object of Speech. 



45 



OPTATIVE MOOD. 
Present, I may be striking, 

S. TUTTTOtai, TV7TT01C) TU7TT0J, 

D. TV7TT01TQV, TUWTOITIJV, 

P. TV7TT0lfJLeV 9 TVTTTOITS, TVTTTOISV, 

First Future, I may hereafter strike. 

D. TV^OITOV, TwI/oItY\V, 

P. tu\(/oi|X6V, tw'4/oit«, Tuv[/oisy. 

First Aorist, J waj/ have struck, 

S. TU\J/a/jXj, Tvtyats, tu^cii, 

P. TurJ/aijUrSV, tuiI/uits, rvtyaisv. 1 

Perfect, J may Aflve 6eew striking. 

S. TSTVQOlfU, TSTVQOig, TSTVfQl, 

D. TSTU^OiTOV, TSTVQOITYIV, 

P. TSTVtpQljASV, TSTVfyorfSj TSTU^O^V. 

Second Aorist, J way ^cwe struck. 

S. TU7T0J/JU, TV7r0l$ } TU7T01, 

D. twchtov, tvttoItyjv, 

P. TU7T0ipZV, TUTTOITS, TVVOM. 



* The iEolic form of this Tense is frequently used, particularly by 
the Attics : 

S. fvtysia, • 7"JvJ/£<a£, rvtysie, 

D. TV<bsiocTov, TV'J/eidryv, 

P. fvysiapey, Tvyciats., fvif/eixv. 



46 

Second Future, I may hereafter strike. 



s. 


ruiroi^, 


TUToTf, 


TU7T07, 


D. 




TVTCOlTOVy 


Tvxohr}V 9 


P. 


Tvmipev, 


TWO ITS, 


TU7To7sV.* 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present, / should strike, 

S. TV7rra>, tvwtjjj, twt^, 

D» TU7TOJT0V, TtWlJTOV, 

P. ruTrrca^Vy TUTrDjre, tutttoxt/. 

First Aorist, J should have struck. 

S. TU\[/0>, TttylJJ, TthJflT, 

D. TU\I/>}T0V, TV^V)T0V, 

P. Tutyoopev, tu^ts, Tvtycti<ri. 

Perfect, J should have been striking. 

S. TSTU^CO, TSTU$>J£, TZJVQlQ, 

D. T£TU$>JT0J/, TgT^yjTOl/, 

P. TSTV^CJOpSV, T£TU<J»)Te, TSTW^OXn. 

Second Aorist, / should have struck. 

S. TU7TW, TU7TJJ?, ™7r»), 

D. TU7PJT01/, TU7DJT01/, 

P. TVTTCOpSV, TV7T>JTS, TtmUiVi. 



1 In the English expression of the Tenses, much precision is not 
to be expected. Their use and signification depend on the Conjunc- 
tions and Particles, to which they are joined. The Optative, for 
instance, is seldom used in the Potential sense without aV. 



47 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Present, tutttsiv, to strike. 
First Future, rufaiv, to be going to strike. 
First Aorist, t<mJwu, to have stra-k. 
Perfect, reruQevau. to have been striking. 
Second Aorist, zwgTv, 'o have struck. 
Second Future, Twreiv, to be going to strike. 



PARTICIPLES. 
Present, striking. 

N. TUWTCJDVy TV7TT0V<ra, TV7FT0V, 

G. TO7JT0VT0f, TU7TT0UCn)£, TU7JT0VT0£, &C. 

First Future, going to strike. 

G. TvtyoVTOg, TV^OVCTYIS, TV<\jOVTQ$. 

First Aorist, having struck. 

N. Tu\f/a£, Tu\t/«cra, rvtyav, 

G. TiityeiVTOs, Tvtyu<rYi$, rttyavroj. 

Perfect, who has been striking. 

N. TSTU$CO£, TSTUtpvlct, TSTV$)$, 

G. TETVQOTQS, TiTVfyvfas, TSTU$070£. 



Second Aorist, having struck. 

N. TV7TM, rvnovcra., rvirbv, 

TV7TQVTQS, TU7ToJ<7)Jf, TV7TQVTQ$. 



G. 



Second Future, going to strike. 

N. TV7TWV, TWCQV<FOl> TV7T0VV, 

G. TVTTQVVTQS, TyTTOVC"^, TV7TQVVTQC. 



48 



Augment.* 
Of the Nine Tenses, 

Three receive an Augment, continued through all 
the Moods: the Perfect, Pluperfect, and Paulo-post- 
Future. 

Three receive an Augment in the Indicative only : 
the Imperfect, and the Two Aorists. 1 

Three receive no Augment: the Present, and the 
Two Futures. 

There are Two Augments; the Syllabic, when the 
verb begins with a Consonant ; the Temporal, when the 
Verb begins with a Vowel. 5 

1 The Augment serves to prevent ambiguity; else the Imperfect 
rinfre would be confounded with the Imperative, and the First 
Aorist rv^ac; with the Participle. 

It is probable that no Augment existed in the origin of the 
language. In the ancient Ionic Dialect none is found. E was first 
prt fixed to all augmented Tenses for tic Temporal as well as for 
the Syllabic Augment: thus: suyov, ssXifityv, soira£ov. Ea was 
contracted in 77, ss into 77, and sometimes si, and so into cy. Hence 
sayov became yjyov, ssXitiZflv yXTtiXflv, and sottol^ov wTtalpv ; honce 
ss^ov became si^ov. The Auics sometimes pn-serve s, forming 
suyoy from dyaj to break, probably on account of the insertion of 
the Digamma. 

a "Eifw continues the Augment of the Aorists, sltfcc and sltfov. 

3 The Syllabic is so called because it adds a syllable to the word ; 
the Temporal, because it increases the time or quantity of the 
syllable. 



49 

The Syllabic Augment is s prefixed to the Imperfect 
and the Aorists, as stiwttov, erwtya, s'twov. 1 When it 
is Continued, it repeats the initial Consonant of the 
Verb, as rerixpa. 4 

If the Verb begins with a Vowel, the Temporal 
Augment is Continued. 

If the initial Consonant is an Aspirate, it must be 
changed into the corresponding Soft, as $uo>, rsQunaJ 

The Temporal Augment changes 

a into rj, as uyw, yyov. 
s into yj, as lA7n?«;, >}A7n£ov. 
* w into f, as i'xocvco, fxcuvov. 



1 It has been conjectured that the Syllabic Augment is formed 
from the Imperfect ty. Perhaps the Ionic form so, is a more pro- 
bable origin. In the Shanscrit language the same Syllabic Augment, 
e, is prefixed in the formation of the Past Tense. Some Celtic Tenses 
are also formed by prefixes. 

a The repetition pf the initial consonant in the 1 continued Augment 
is called Reduplication. It sometimes takes place in Latin : do, 
dedi; pun go, pupugi ; tango, tetigi, &c. 

When the Verb begins with a double letter, with <r joined to a 
Mute, or with yv, no reduplication takes place, but the Syllabic 
Augment is Continued. So a Verb beginning with §, when f is 
doubled in the Augment. So also fixditrw, ygyyogsu), $i<xy?\u<pou t 
Q\dco, xaQctfaw, Ktsiviv, tfgocrtfarratevw. KroLopou makes enry}y.ou 
and KEKrypou. 

3 An Aspirate Consonant beginning two successive syllables, as 
UQvx.a, t would produce a harshness* which the Greeks avoid. 

c 



50 

4 into co 9 as o-xxfa, <z>tx%o</. 
v into u, as vfyifa, u/3g»£ov. 
ui into >;, as aTpw, jf^ov. 
ao into yv f as ocu^uvco, r\v%ctvov. 
su into >ju, as etr^ojxaj, »)iJ;5£0|a)jv. 
o< into w, as olxl^oo, cpxifyv* 1 

e is in some verbs changed into et, as *x®> el^ov.* 
so is changed into set), as kopTa(co y ewfiTotfyv. 

Verbs compounded with Prepositions take the Aug- 
ment between the Preposition and the Verb, as Trptxr- 

1 In some Latin Verbs a Temporal Augment takes place, as 
tf go, egi ; J? wo, erai ; fMio,fodi, &c. 

1 The following change s into £/ : 

idcv, sXlara-cv, ErfOfAM, sfuw, 

*£«;, ?A>ta;, g'fya^a*, foDJxw, 

zQi'(t(J, sKkVU), ZgtfCOf *%">> 

sXco, Birov, igtfvZuj, SCV. 

3 Some Compound Verbs, which retain the same meaning as those, 
from which they are compounded, are considered as Simples, and 
take the Augment in the beginning. 

Some take an Augment both before and after the Preposition, as 
avcgQoLVy yvujgSaov i ivo^Xsw, -^voo^Xsov ; &c. 

Many have no Augment: those beginning with vowels or diph- 
thongs not mentioned in the rule ; many beginning in o<, particularly 
those compounded with olx&s, q1vo$ and qIvwq$ ; also aw, dfoo, drfiitypai) 
&Y)U<rcrw, &c. 

These have no Syllabic Augment in the dialogue of Tragedy; 
ka0s£oAUU, Kodsvfa, kdfityjfa, <nts6$w. 



51 

Verbs compounded with su and Sip, if they are sus- 
ceptible of the Augment, take it in the same manner, as 
euopxsro, suwpxsov. 

A Preposition in composition before a Vowel loses the 
final Vowel, as cmky^m from clko and s%a). 
• If, after this elision, the Preposition comes before an 
Aspirate, it changes its Soft into an Aspirate, as a<poLipea> 
from a.7ro and aipio). 

'Ex in composition becomes 1% before a Vowel, as 
sxQspw, e£{$£pov. 

'Ev and <ruv, which change the v before a Consonant, 
resume it before a Vowel, as e^svo), svspsvov. 

£vv sometimes drops the v, as a-u^Tsa*. 

P is doubled after a Vowel, as Siappiw. 






FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 

Present P. —Present M. 

Imperfect 5 ^perfect P. 
£ Imperfect M. 

Pluperfect. 

, Plup. P. 
S Perf. P. JPaul. p. Fut. 



1 Future 



1 Aor. P.— ] Fut. P. 



2 Aorist 



1 Aor. lAor. M. 

1 Fut.M. 

2 Aor. P.-^2Fut. P. 
2 Aor. M. 

2 Fut— 2 Fut. M. 
Perf. M.— Plup. M. 



52 



The Imperfect 
is formed from the Present, by prefixing the Augment, 

and changing co into ov, as tuttcd, stuttov. 

The First Future 

is formed from the Present, by changing the last sylla-- 
ble ' in the 

First Conjugation into \J/a>, as tuti-toi,- ru-tyco ; 

in the Second into gco, as hi-yco, Xs§a> ; 

in the Third into Va), as rlco, rlo-co ; * 

in the Fourth, by circumflexing the last syllable and 

shortening the penultima, as -tyaXka), ^aKw. 



1 The First Future is really formed by the insertion of <r before 
w t as \sl(3w, Asi/3(rw or kefyu; ; Xs'iTtu), Kslitcrcu or AsAJ/a;; Xeycu, 
X&ycru) or Agfa; ; rio;, r\<rw. To soften the pronunciation, a conso- 
nant is frequently dropt : as a£cu, a<ra/ ; (pgdfy, <p§dorco, &c. For 
the same reason the <r is omitted after a Liquid ; but it was formerly 
retained, and ygixcu made ve^trw. We still find xsAtrat from keK'jj, 
rsXcrov from reAw, og<rw from o§ca, particularly in the Doric dialect. 

This analogy extends, in some measure, to the Latin. The 
Perfect of the Third Conjugation is formed from the Present by 
changing o into si, as scribo, scribsi ; dico, dicsi or dixi ; Jigo y Jigsi 
or Jixi ; demo, demsi; carpo, carp&i, &c. To avoid harshness a 
letter is frequently left out, as parco, parsi ; ludo, lusi, &c. The* 
too is frequently omitted ; and sometimes in that case it is resumed 
in the Supine, as scando, scandi, scansum ; verto, verti, versum, &c. 

a Some Verbs are of the Second and Third Conjugation, making 

Jw and croi : dgrfd^cv, fidfy, P§i&, iyyvaXify, tfal&t/. 

Some Verbs take y before g ; xAa&y, n\cLy%w t from nXayyuj ; 



53 

Verbs in aco, ecu, and oo> change a and s into >j, and 
o into to, as ripato, ri^Tjcrto ; (pfaeco, <pj?v7j<ra> ; &7j?woa), 

Four Verbs change the Soft of the first syllable into 
an Aspirate breathing : 

«%a), £%<#> rps^ci), Qpe^/oo : 

1 The following are excepted : 

1. Verbs in ouv, preceded by £ or i; Verbs in Aaa; and %a,vo pure ; 
with fotpduj, Sgdui, xXdcu, paw, vdoj, rfErdiu), eitdoo, (pxdui. 

2. These in £'jo : dxsuj, df/,quew, dg'/Jov, £uj, Z,sou, xsou, vouicv, vzixsco, 
%ew, oXsoo, G-Togsco, rsKeu), rgsou ; and Verbs, which form others in 
vvuj, vv^A and exec. 

Some make £<rcv and tjccu: edUo^ou, ouv'bqj, dxioy.au, dxko, dxpiw, 
d%Qeov.cu, (3Uw, y.r^ccv, xotfsou, xogsuu, KOfsou, poLyjo^ou, o&w, Tfo^sca, 
irovzw, <t7£%s'jj, <pogsw, cpgovEtu, yaj^uj. Asa; makes &{<ra;, Setiexa. 
KaXeoo makes xolXectc/j, x£xdXrjy.a, by Syncope xexXtjxx. 

The following make the First Future in sva-ou : Qeoo, ftXhou, <itvhu t 
yew, pew, y£w. Kcclou and kXccIoj make ctveuv. 

3. Verbs Primitive in oo*; dgoco, /3oa>, ivoou, opoov, ovotv ; and Verbs, 
"which form others in vuou and a-y.ou. 

1 The Present of these Verbs should begin with an Aspirate, thus 
tyw, Q§£<pw, 0f£%^, 8o(poo ; but as the Greeks seldom suffer two 
aspirated syllables to come together, the first is changed into a Soft. 
That reason ceases to operate in the Future, which ends in fa;, and 
therefore resumes the Aspirate in the first syllable. This is proved 
by the Perfect, which in the Active is rhfstpa, and not r'efye<pa, but 
in the Passive refyappou. For the same reason fyij* makes T^iyps 
in the G. 



CtXiOO, 


1)XUX, 


aAsUto, 


vjXsvct, 


xauoo, 


gx>ja, 



54 

The First Aorist 
is formed from the First Future, by prefixing the Aug- 
merit, and changing co into a, as rtyco, lVu\|/a. 

A doubtful vowel in the penultima of the First Aorist 
of the Fourth Conjugation is made long, a is changed 
into r t , and s into s/, as xpfvoo, 'ixpim ; ^/aXco, %-itfk* ; 

[XSVCU, £[ASWOL. 1 

Elwu and yveyxa. are formed from the Present ; ^xa, 
eQyxa, ebaxxoL from the Perfect. 

The following drop the <r of the Future : 

xs(O f exeiot, 

(reva), zvsvuy 

The Perfect 

is formed from the First Future, by prefixing the Con- 
tinued Augment, and changing, in the 
1st Conjugation, -fya) into <pa, as rvrtyw, tstvQol ; 
in the 2nd, §co into #a, as Xs'go>, AeAe^a ; 
in the 3rd, <ra> into xa, as riant), rsrixa ; 
in the 4th, a> into x<x 3 as \f/a/.a>, styaXxaJ' 

Dissyllables in Xo>, va), pco change the s of the First 
Future into a, as (ttsX«j>, ecrrakxoL. 



1 If the penult, of the Pres. has a;, that of the 1st Aor. in the 
common Dialect has a, in the Attic, r t $ as cr^odvoi, <rv)(/<a,vui s sa-^- 
p,ava, Attic g'cnjpjva. 

* Verbs in pea are formed from \ktw 3 as ve/xo;, vzveprpLa, from 



55 

Dissyllables In ewco, ww, and uua) drop the i/, as xtsvw, 



SKTOLXCt. 



The Pluperfect 

is formed from the Perfect, by prefixing s to the Con- 
tinued Augment, if there is a Reduplication, and chang- 
ing a into eiv 9 as riru(pa 9 stst'jQziu. 1 

The Second Aorist 
is formed from the Present, by prefixing the Augment, 
changing co into ov, and shortening the penuitima, 2, as 

TV7TTO), STV7T0V. 

The Penuitima is shortened : 
1. In Vowels, by the change of 



1 


) I 


" ^3 ,j >, 


&*3ov;\ 


M 


}- into a, as '•* 


) rpuyu, 
J <pcx.lv'jo } 


k-oxyov ; 
sZuvov ; 


au 


) 


L Trauco, 


tircLOV ; 


SI 


into fj as 


Xsfccti, 


sKntov ; 


iv 


intou, as 


$vjyw, 


eQvyov. 



1 The Pluperf. often drops the initial z in all voices, especially in 
the later writers. 

* In Dissyllables, which take the Temporal Augment, the penui- 
tima necessarily remains long, as ayx, rffav\ So also where the 
penuitima is long by position, as 0a/wra;, s^Xirov ; ^zotttoj, vj.o.l-kjqv . 
But in many of these a transposition takes place to preserve the ana- 
logy : thus tts^m makes in poetry JVcaSov, Ss^kuj eocay.ov, &c. A 
resolution and a reduplication produce the same effect : thus rfiw is 
made \a.lw ; yyov, r t ya.yov, &c. 

3 IlAijcrcw, to strike the body, makes Z-rrfyyov ; to strike the mind, 

lltXOLyQY. 



56 

In Dissyllables of the Fourth Conjugation, s and si are 
changed into a, as oepct), shapov ; (nrstpw, s<nrapov. x In 
Polysyllables ei is changed into e, as ayelpco, yyspov. 

2. In Consonants, by the omission of r, and of the 
last of two liquids, as tvtttw. stutov; ^olXXco, e-^uXov. 

Some Mutes are changed into others of the same 
order j thus, 





fi\6t%T(» 9 


ej8x«/3ov ; 


it into /3, as 4 


XOLkUTtTOly 


lx«Ay|3ov ; 




h XpVTTTOD, 


exgupov. 




r <i 

OCTTTOOy 


foov ; 




j3u7TTCU 9 


?j3a$ov ; 




ftoCTtTOi, 


enxQov ; 


v into $, as < 


pUTTTUi, 


eppctfyov ; 




(TXaTTTW, 


etrxotQov ; 




pi7TT00y 


eppiQov ; 




%pV7TTCO f 


edgvQov. 


X into y, as j 


o-fLVXa, 


etrpvyov ; 
styvyov. 



Dissyllables in £o> and cro-fo of the Second Conjugation 
form the Second Aorist in yoi/ ; of the Third, in Sov ; as 
7rpoL<r(ra), 7rpa£a), %wpayov ; <f>pa%w, (ppacrco, eQpotftoir. 



* This takes place in some words beginning with a Mute and a 
Liquid, as 7rXixw, sttXclkov ; xXetfrto, exXoctfov ; but /SAgVw and (pXeyw 
are regular. Tspvw makes irapov and srspQy. 

4 Formed from /SAajSw, xato'/3«/> xf v/3w. 



57 



Verbs in am and em change am and em into <w, as 

[toxam, zfxuxov ; SUpSQ), SUpOV. 

The following have no Second Aorist : Polysyllables 
in %co and co-ay ; Verbs in am and em after a Vowel ; 
Verbs in am ; Polysyllables in aum, evm, ovm, l om, vim, 
and many others. 

The Second Future 
is formed from the Second Aorist, by dropping the 
Augment, and changing ou into m circumflexed, as 

STV7TQV, TV7rm. 2 



PASSIVE VOICE. 



The Moods and Tenses. 



Present 
Imperf. 
Perfect 
Pluperf. 
P. p. Fut 
1st Aor. 
1st Fut. 
2d A or. 
2d Fut. 



Indie. 



V7TT0[J.0ll ) 



TV7TT0(J,<Xl 
STV7TT0[AYIV 

TSTV$/-Q(lCXl 

STU7T>JV 



Imper. 


Opt. 


Subj. 


Infin. 


TV7TT-0U 


-o/jU.l]V 


-wpoti 


-s<rQoii 


TSTV-^0 


-jXjXSVOf 


-[A^ivo; 


-$0«< 




£i*JV 


CO 






-0<jU,*)V 




-serial 


TV^Q-riTl 


-s/)JV 


-co 


-Y\vai 




-olftYfV 


' 


-scQou 


TV7T-r)0J 


-?/>JV 


-«; 


-YjVCtl 




-o/|XlJV 




-earQai 



o[asvo$ 
-fjt,fj,evog 

■6psvo$ 

V 

■opsvog 
■sis 

-6fX,SV0$ 



1 *H.xoov from cbtouco is poetical. 

Tt is originally the same as the 1st Fur. Tuirrcv made ruiticruj or 
fvirrw, i. e. rorj/w. The former in the Ionic dialect became rvifew, 

H 



58 

Numbers and Persons. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present, I am struck. 

S. TU7TT0fXUl, TUTTTYj^ TU7TTST#I, 

D. TV7TTQfJ*sQoV, TUTTTSCtQoV, TVKT£<r$0V , 

P. TV7TT0peQct, TV7CTSa^S f TU7TT0VTCH. 

Imperfect, / was in the situation, or custom, of being struck. 

S. ItU7TTo)x>)V, ItUTTTOU, eTV7rT£T0, 

D. k-VKTopedov, eTUTrrecrdov, huTnivQty, 

P. 6Twrojxs0a, eTU7rTe<rQs y Itutttovto. 



and in the Attic rvifuf. Thus from Xeyov, Xsy&troj for \sy<rtv, i. e. 
Xifw, became Agyia; and Aey5. The fourth Conj. has only one 
form : from ipcc\e<rw, vJ/aXso; was made ipcc\w. Hence in reality a 
2d Fut. does not exist. 

1 The formation of this person was originally in scroti, thus iwr- 
op$4, £<roa f tta.1. The Ionians, who delight in a concourse of vowels, 
dropped the cr, and made it ruittscti. The Attics, who love contrac- 
tions, shortened it into Tvirrsi, which the common language of Greece 
changed into tuitrt]. The Attic contraction had the advantage of 
distinguishing the Indicative from the Subjunctive Mood ; it was 
universally adopted in jSouAe/, o7«, ovf/g/. 

The same observation applies to other tenses ; thus in the Imper- 
fect s7uit7s<ro became irvitrso, and was afterwards contracted into 
sTuirtov. So rvirroKro became ruitroio ; srv^a,<ro, irv^cco and irvtyw. 

Some verbs retain the original form, thus <payo ( aat makes <pdys<rou. 
Thus also is formed the Passive of Verbs in /xi, fcrra-jaaf, f^ra-cai y 
rik-^ai, riQs-vai, &c. 



1 1 



59 



Perfect, I have been struck. 
S. t£TI>/x.jo,«j, TeVurJ/opi, TerviTTcti, 

D. T£TUjW,/iCS0OV, TfiVufOoV, T£TV$QoV, 

P. T£TVfJt,p:Qoi f T£TU<pQe 9 T&TVfLftSVQl sWl 

Pluperfect, / had been struck. 
S. Irervwqv, Itstu^o, ststvitto, 

D. ETSTUfAftsQoV, STSTV$QoV, lT£TU$0*jy, 

P. iTeTyju-jxsta, £T£TU$0e, . TSTvppsvoi rj<rctv. 

Paulo-post-Future, J am o/i £/* e /?ozw£ 0/ 6e?wg struck. 

S. T£TU\|/0jXai, T£TU\[/>], TSTv'J'STaJ, 

D. T£TU\f/O]X£0Oy, TSTu4/=O-0OV, T£Tu'4/£O"0Oy, 

P. TSTV^OfJt.sQcC, T£TU\(/£(r6e, T£TU\|/0VTa*. 

First Aorist, J a?as struck. 



D. iTy$0>)TOV, £TU$0>jT))y, 

P. eTv<$>Qri[j,sv, Itv $0yjrs, It6<pQyi<tuv. 

First Future, J s^a// 6e struck. 

S. TU<$QY}<TOfJLCtl, TO$fljj(Tjk TV$Qf)<TSTCtt s 

D. tu$0ijerojxe0ov, TU$0>ji7£cr0oy, tvQQyjvso-Qov, 

P. TV$QYi<ropsQoi 9 TU$0>j<r6<rds, TU$Qy<rovrou. 



1 The third person plural is formed from the third person singular 
by inserting v before ra<, as xsKgirat, Ksxgivfou, probably from the 
old form xexfJyxayraf. But when a consonant comes before raj, the 
insertion of v would produce an inharmonious sound. Hence a 
periphrasis is formed by the addition of the verb sl(u to the Perfect 
Participle: thus rstv^ivoi eitn for rkrwievtai. 



60 



Second Aorist, J was struck. 



S. It6%V\V, . eT-'iTTYjg, eTU7TYj, 

P. sru7rr,rxsv } STV'~ t 7Z, e7'J7lV)<rClV. 

Second Future, I shall be struck. 

S. TUTTJJO-OjtXa/, TWYXTYl, TV7TY}<reT0tl, 

P. Tun^oc^sQu, TU7r^<rj:(r0£, twryivovtoii. 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 



Present, be struck. 



S. 


TUTTOV, 


TUTFTSO'Qa}, 


D. 


TU7TTe(rQdv, 


Tuicr&irbw, 


P. 


TUTTTeabe. 


TUVTS(T$CO(rOLV, 



Perfect, have been struck. 

S. TSTwbo, m TSTU^OOj 

D. TSTVQQOV, TSTVt&QwV, 

P. TSTUQQs, TeTV$Qw(TOLV . 

First Aorist, be struck. 

S. tu^ti,*" TVfQyTw, 

P. Tv^rjTe, Tv<p(>Y)Too<rav. 



1 For rixpfyQt, two successive syllables of which would begin with 
an aspirate. 



6i 



Second Aorist, be struck. • 

S. TMHJ0*, TWTrviTOO, 

D. TV7TYjT0V 9 TWTY)T00V 9 

P. TU7rvjr5, TV7TV}Tai(7CiV> 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 
Present, I may be struck. 

S. TU^To/jXrjV, rUTTTOlOy TVTTTOITO, 

1). TU7ZTo/|W,c0OV 3 TVirTOKlQoV, TUTTTOIG-QyIV, 

P. TV7TT0l[A=QoC 9 TUTTTOlvfe, TV7TT01VTO. 

Perfect, I may have been struck. 

D. TSTUiaju,sva> snjrov, ei^TVjv, 

P. TcTy/A/Asvoi elYipsv, snjTe, s1yi<tuv. 1 

Paulo-post- Future, Imflj/ 6e ow the point of being struck. 

S. icTw^fol^v, tst'jvJ/ojo, rsTu\|/oiro, 

D. TSTtnpo/jxsfiov, tstv^/gktQov, TSTUvf/o/cr5>jv, 

P. Tery\J/o//x,s0a, t£t6\J/oj<70=, tstv^oivto. 

First Aorist, / wzcj/ /i«i>e 6eew struck. 

S. Ty$0e/>JV, Ty<£$=i>Jf, TU^ds/l}, 

P. Ty$0s»>)|w<sv, Tu^fle'/ijTs, TU^s/ijcrav. 1 

First Future, / m«j/ 6e struck hereafter. 

S. ry<p9>](7o/ju<r)V, TV<pQy)<T0io, rutpQrj&oiTO, 

D. TV<pftYi<rolfAsQov, tv$Qyi<toi<tQov 9 TU^r}<Toia-QY\v 9 

P. TV/p^YjG'Oi^/Xy TV<pQY)(rOl<T$S, TV<pfjY)<7QlVTQ. 



The more common form is the Attic contraction slrov, sltfjy; 

slaev, Jre, £/W. 



62 



Second Aorist, 1 may have been struck. 

S. TVTTSl^V, TVTFSl^S, TU7Ts/>J, 

D. TV7relY)T0V, TWnSlYjTYjV, 

P. TV7reiY\u,sv, TviFeiyre, Twrsnjcray. 

Second Future, 1 may be struck hereafter. 

S. Ty7T»J(ro//X>JV, TU7T^(T0/0, TyTT^OJTO, 

D. TU9njfl-o/jU,e0ov, TU9r^(roi(r6ov, Ty7r>)cro/cr0*)y, 

P. TV7FYl<Toi(ie(}ot f TUTTYICTOKrOs, TU7T>i<7OJVT0. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present, J should be struck. 

S. TVffTCUpiXl, TVTTTYly TU7JT>JTa*, 

D. TV7TT<J!>(J.sQoV, Ty7mj0-$0V, TU7TT>JCrd0V, 

P. TVTTTWfieQot, TV7TTYl<rQ&, TU7FT00VT0U. 

Perfect, I razgAJ A«i?e been struck. 

S. TSTUjU,jX6V0£ CO, J)£, ' J, 

D. TSTVftftSVQO YjTOVj YjTOV, 

P. rsTVfjijJisvoi oopev, yjts, coori. 

First Aorist, J should have been struck. 

S. to$0c5, TVtpQys, TUC^fiJ, 

P. TU$0wjxey, Tu^fl^Tg, Tu$da>(n. 

Second Aorist, J should have been struck. 

S. Ty7r«J, Tunys, Ty7rrj, 

J). TVTTYITOVy TUWrJTOy, 

P. TyTrcojxey, Ty7njTg, Tynwcn. 



63 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Present, tvtttso-Qixi, to be struck. 

Perfect, rkru^ou, to have been struck. 

P. p. Future, T£TmJ/£<r0«i, to be on the point of being struck. 

First Aorist, rvffivou, to have been struck. 

First Future, Tv$Yi<re<rQeu, to be going to be struck. 

Second Aorist/ruTnji/a/, to have been struck. 

Second Future, TvirfoetrQcti, to be going to be struck. 



PARTICIPLES. 
Present, being struck. 

N. TU7TT0)u,£V0£, TV7rT0[livYI, TVTrO[Jl,eVOV, 

G. 7U7TT0[XSV0V, TU7TT0f^eV^g, TWffTOfteVOV, &c. 

Perfect, having been struck. 

N. TSTVU-ftSVOg, TSTUfJLpsVYl, TSTU^SVOV^ 

G. TSTVppSVOV, TSTUppeVW, TSTV^SVOV. 

Paulo-post-Future, being on the point of being struck. 

G. T£TUVpOjU,eVoU, TSTV$/0[J,SVYI$, TSTutyopsvov. 

First Aorist, having been struck. 

G. TUtpQevTog, iv<pQei<ni$ f tv<PQsvto$. 

! 

First Future, going to be struck. 

N. TU$0ijo"Ojptevof, TU$QYi<ropsvYi, TV$Qr}<ropsvov s 

G, Tu^flyjcrojuivoy, TU^^crofifVi}^ Tu^dijo'o/Agyotf. 



64 

Second Aorist, having been struck. 

N. TVTTSis, TUTTsTcra, TV7TSV, 

G. TVTrsvTog, TU7rel<rr)Sy tvitsvto$. 

Second Future, going to be struck. 

N. Tvirytropevog, TU7r*jo-0jU,ev>j, Tu?nj<rojx?vov$ 

G. TV7rY)<rO[Jt.SVQV ) TV7TYI<rO[J.£vYlS } TU7nj0"Ojuil/OUr 



FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 

The Present 
is formed from the Present Active, by changing o> into 

0/JtOt/, aS TU7TTWD, TV7TT-0[Aai. 

The Imperfect 
is formed from the Imperfect Active, by changing v into 
ju,tjv, as £TU7rro-v, £Ti»7rro-|u.73j/. 

The Perfect 
is formed from the Perfect Active, by changing, in the 
1st Conj. <pa into p^ai, as rerv-Qa, rsTv-^ai ;* 
in the 2d, -^a into yjxai, as XsXe-^a, KeXe-yfAou ; 
in the 3d, *a into cr|aa*, as 7rs<ppa.-xa, 7rs<ppa-(T[xai ; 
in the 4th, xa into jua*, as s\|/aX-xa, e\|/aA-jU,a/. 

Verbs of the Third Conjugation in w pure, if the 
penultima of the Perfect is long, change xa into pai, as 

7rs<p/x>j-xa, 7re<pi7*r}-fA0ii. 2 ' I 

* Perfects in ^a impure change it into |aat, as rsts§-<pa, Tereg-pau. 

Except the following, which retain <r, anouw, tyavw, xsasvuj, 
KXsicVf K^oucv, itaiuiy itraltv, aslou. 

Some, whose penultima is short, change xa, into ^on, d^ow, eAaw, 
$iw, Sua;, 0uw} Ityvw, Xvou, ovdiv, Ttrdwy r'w. 



65 



Some Verbs shorten the long syllable of the Perfect 
Active, as Mowxa, hsh^ai. 1 

Dissyllables, whose first syllable has rpe 9 change s 
into a, as rpkiroy^ TETpstya, TSTpa^iMOLi ; but they resume 
it in the First Aorist lrpi<^^v. x 



The Perfect of most Verbs in cctuj, ccivcu, avw, siw, svoo, ow, ovw, 
lev, originally ended in /xa* ; but it was afterwards changed into 
e\Lcu. Hence we find keKev^oh and xsksvcrpcu, yvwro; and yvw<rfo; 9 
&c. 

On the same principle sv is changed into v ; thus xs^£UK«, 
xg^'jcr^a; and y.e^j^a.i ; tfsipEU^a, itE^y^cni ; cg'creuxa, <rk<rvpai * 
rsrsv^a,, rsrvypou. 

Synopsis of the formation of the Per/. Pass, in all its Persons. 



II. 



III. 



IV. 



s. 


rSTV^OLl, 


T£VmJ/a*, 


tervitrou, 




(for ?srv<pu,cu, 


TETv<p<rou, 


Tsrvftai) 


D. 


rsrvppsQov, 


rirvpQov, 


TsrvipQov, 


P. 


rsrvy.psQcc, 


fsrvipSs, 


rsrv^svoi sivL 


S. 


AiAeyaaj, 


XikE^cci, 


XEXEKTOUy 




(for AgAe^aa/, 


y^Ksyjarai, 


XsXsxrou) 


D. 


AeAfyjOteSov, 


AeAe^Qov, 


XeXs^Qov, 


P. 


XeXsytAEQa, 


AsA^flf, 


\E\Ey\LEVQl z\?1* 


S. 


TrstfElCUsCCl, 


iritfsurM, 


tfETrsic-rou, 




(for if£Tf£Kr(rcci) 




D. 


TteTtsWpzbQv, 


tferfEia-Qov, 


TtETTEKTSoy, 


P. 


TtBTteWkLzftcc, 


itEiteHrfte, 


VEItEUrpivQl gift. 


S. 


(for it'z$cLv\La.i) 


tfipavo-ai, 


tfgQavTou, 


D. 


.tf£<pa ( ttjU,£0OV, 


iretpavQov, 


VE<pavQov, 


P. 


-7r£<pa^£-9a, 


TteOOLvfte, 


Ttstpappevot sl<rt. 



The 2d Person Imperative is formed by changing ou of the 2d 
Person Indie, into o, as rsrvty-cu, reru^-o ; the 3d Pers. is formed by 
changing g of the 2d Pers, PI. Indie, into «y as rsrv<p$-s 9 arvfi-w* 



66 

The Pluperfect 
is formed from the Perfect, by changing fxoti into pjj/, 
and prefixing s to the Continued Augment, if there is a 
Reduplication, as rsru^aa/, ersrij/AjaTjv. 

The Paulo-post-Future 
is formed from the Second Person Singular of the Per- 
fect, by changing ai into opiat, as rirvty-at, T£TtA[/*oj«.ai. T 

The First Aorist 
is formed from the Third Person Singular of the Per- 
fect, by dropping the Reduplication, changing toli into 
6riu, and the preceding Soft into an Aspirate Mute, as 

ririJ7rroLi, erv<f>Qriv. 

Three Verbs assume <r, eppwrou, ZppwfrQyv ; ixsfxvrjrat, 
s[xvri(r6YjV ; TriwhrjTOLi, s7r^(rdr}V. But (rea"a)(rrai drops it, 
making IcwQrp. 

In some Verbs the penultima is shortened : thus eSpy* 
roil makes supi$YjV; sTrj^rjrai, sznfjvsfl?jv; tsQsitou, st&QtjvS 

The Infinitive is formed by changing s of the 2d Person Plural 
Indicative into ai, as Terv<pQ-s t retv<p$-cu. 

When the Perfect Indicative ends in p,xi pure, the periphrasis of 
the Participle with sip,) does not take place in the Optative and 
Subjunctive; but <xa< in the Optative is changed into pyv ; and in 
the Subjunctive pzi with the preceding vowel into wp,ou, as Indie. 
rcr/jUr^aa;, Opt. fsny.yj.rjV, Subj. TetifidSpcu. 

* By some this tense is formed from the First Future Middle, by 
prefixing the Continued Augment, as rmfrojxaj, rgruvf/o/^a;. Indeed 
the Middle Future is generally used in a Passive sense. 

a In the Third Person Plural a syncope often takes place ; thus 
yyegQev for yyfyQrjarav, ixoV^Ssj/ for 8*Q<rp.rfir t <raM, 



67 

The First Future 

is formed from the First Aorist, by dropping the 
Augment, and changing v into o-o t ua^ as lr6^r ( v, riKpdri- 

(TOfJLai. 

The Second Aorist 
is formed from the Second Aorist Active, by changing 
ov into yjv, as stvttov, stutt^v. 1 

The Second Future 
is formed from the Second Aorist, by dropping the 
Augment, and changing v into Gropcu, as erwrr^up rtwnj- 



, Tut. 



Present 
Imperf. 
Perfect 
Pluperf. 
1st Aor. 
1st Fut. 
2d Aor. 
2d Fut. 



Middle Voice. 
The Moods and Tenses. 



Indie. 


Imper. 


Opt. 


Subj. 


TU7JT-0jX5a "> 

eTU7JT0/«jy 3 


-ou 


-oi^v 


-copai 


TSTVTT-U ^ 
ST£TUTS»y J 


— g 


-Ol[U 


-co 


lru\|/5<ju.>]y 


TU\{/-«I 


-otlfi.r\v 


-VOfLUt 


TU\|/-0jtt«i 




-o/ja.»jv 




cTU7roju,rji/ 


7W-0U 


-o/pjy 


-(JOfLCH 


Twn-Qvpui 




-ojpjv 





Inf. 

-=cr0a; 


Part. 

ojxsyoj 


-Jyaj 


-COJ 


-«<r0a* 


-otfLsvo; 


-etrfal 


-6{ASVQ$ 


-s<rQcti 


-ojxsvoj 


-sio-Qou 


-0V[J!.cV0$ 



1 The Tragic Poets preferred the forms of the 1st Aorist ; the 
writers of the new Comedy were more attached to the smoother 
forms of the 2d Aorist. 



68 

Numbers and Persons. 1 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
First Aorist, I struck myself. 

S. BTV^/OL^V, STUCCO, BTU^CiTO, 

D. €Twbtzfj.eQov 9 ho^jota-Qov, eTwbxvQriv, 

P. ejutyapsQci, sru^/xaSs, Iro\(/avT0, 

Second Future, I shall strike myself. 

S. ri»7rou/jtaij ryjrj, TweTra/, 

D. TVjrovpeQov, TU7r£i<rQov, ruireia-Qov,' 

P. Tv-nov^x, rvnsia-Qsy rvnovVTai. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD.^ 

First Aorist, strike thyself. 
S. Tvtyai, Tvtyuo-Qoo, 

P. Tv&eco-Qe, Tvtytxo-Qcotretv. 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

First Aorist, J may have struck myself. 

S. TD\|/a/jx^v, Tu^/ajo, Turf/caro, 

D. TvtyalfJLeQov, TutyotKrQov, ; Tu\J/a/cr0>jv, 
P. rutycttpsQct, Ti>\[/a{<70e, TwJ/aivro. 



1 The Perfect and Pluperfect have an Active, the other Tenses a 
Passive, termination. 

The only Tenses differing from the Active and Passive forms of 
verbs in (jo are the 1st Aorist Indicative, Imperative, and Optative^ 
and the 2d Future Indicative. 



69 



Formation of the Tenses, 
The Present and Imperfect 
are the same as those of the Passive. 

The Perfect 
is formed from the Second Aorist Active, by prefixing 
the Reduplication, and changing 01/ into a, as stuttov, 

TSTUTTOL. 1 

In Dissyllables, if the Second Aorist has a in the 
penultima, from a Present in s or si, the Perfect Middle 
changes it into 0, as 7J-asxo>, iVXaxov, 7ri/rA0xa ; <nrsipa), 
%(nrapov, ecTTopoL. But from the Present in r\ or a/, 
into 75, as \rfim, s\aQov, Aetata; Qolivoo, sQolmv, 7fi(pr ; i/a. z 

If the Second Aorist has e in the penultima, the 
Perfect Middle changes it into 0, as sT^syou, ASAoya. 

If the Second Aorist has 1 in the penultima, from a 
Present in s/, the Perfect Middle changes it into 0/, as 
£$a>, i&ov, olfta.* 



1 Hence those Verbs, which want the 2d Aor. Active, have no 
Perfect Middle. 

* ©aAAa>, l^ccXov makes rg'QijAa; and xAa&y, syckayov makes 

3 Some retain also the diphthong of the Present; thus xsJflo; makes 

TtExevQa and kexvQcl ; Osiyu), iri<pevya and 7te<pvya. 

Aeldov makes (Sg&xxa, to avoid the too frequent repetition of £ in 
the regular 8e8oi$cc ; so itsneo^a for itEitou^itcc ; Xay^ccvw makes 
AiAoy^a, pr^crvo sppooyx. 

The Perf. Act, and Mid. of the same Verb are seldom both in use. 



70 

The Pluperfect 
is formed from the Perfect, by prefixing s, and changing 
a into ew, as riru7rot, ststdttsiv. 1 

The First Aorist 
is formed from the First Aorist Active, by adding pjv, 
as ervtyoL, sTtnl/a-jU/qv. 

The First Future 
is formed from the First Future Active, by changing «i 
into o/^a/, as tu^-oj, tu-^-o^olu 2. 

The Second Aorist 
is formed from the Second Aorist Active, by changing v 
into jxijv, as sTtma-v, hru7r6-fjLr}U. 

The Second Future 
is formed from the Second Future Active, by changing <o 
into otraa/, 5 as tv7T~w, TtJ7r-oujU,ai. 4 

1 When the Perfect Middle has the signification of the Present, 
the Pluperfect has that of the Imperfect. , 

* In the 4th Conjugation it is circumflexed as in the Active: 
thus $aXw, yxX-ou^GLi : i. e. ysiAgama;, Ion. ^aAsopcci, Alt. ^ol\w- 
p,au. See p. bj. 

3 The following are formed in oy.cci, sfopat, <pdyoy,cci, tf'iotlai ; 
likewise j3so,cmh and vzotxai. 

4 To the class of Middle Verbs may be referred those called by 
some grammarians Deponents. They have the Middle form, 
except in the Perfect, Pluperfect, and Paulo-post-Future, of which 
the form is Passive. Some of these Verbs have, besides a Middle, a 
Passive*lst Aorist and 1st Future, the signification of which is Pas- 
sive. In the other tenses, a Middle sense may generally be traced. 

Perhaps it would be more analogical to consider them as Defec- 
tive Verbs, whose Active is obsolete, and which want some of the 



71 



Contracted Verbs. 

Verbs in a«>, ew, and o<o are contracted in the Present 
and Imperfect Tenses. 

Verbs in am contract aco, ao, and aoy into m, as ri[j.am, 
Ti[jLa> ; Ti[j.aofJLsv, ri[xdi^,sv; Tifj-aouo-i, ti{jlco(ti: — else into 
a, as rivets, rlfjca : — ; is subscribed, as Ti[*aoifjLi, ti[a<j>[j.i ; 
TifAaeig, TifJLag ; &C. 

Verbs in em contract ss into ?*, and so into ou, as <p/x*=, 
<f>tXsi ; (priJo'Azv, <pihov(j.$v : — else they drop s, as (pi?Jco t 

Verbs in om contract o with a long vowel, into w, as 
Irfkow, (irjT^w : — -with a short vowel or ou, into ou, as 
(irfhoBTS, ZtiKouts ; hrft^ooixri, StjAouV; : — else into oi, as 
&jXor,c, 6^Ao?c. In the Inf. osw is contracted into ow. 



Passive and Middle Tenses. The following is a synopsis of their 
form : 



Present 
Imperf. 
Perfect 
Pluperf. 
P. p. Fut. 
1st Aor. M. 
1st Fut. M. 
1st Aor. P. 
1st Fut. P. 



Indie. 


Imper. 


Opt. 


Subj. 


Infin. 




$£%-0V 


-OipYjV 


-WfJWU 


-etrSai 


Uhypoa 1 


Ufc-fy 


-y[^vo$ 

ElTjV 


-yy.evos 

.7 


-yjloii 


hU%-op,a.i 


' 


-oiu,rjv 




-zarUi 


e§EZdurjV 


Mfcm 


-odprjV 


-w&cct 


-OLG-^Xl 


osg-o^cti 




-olprp 




-ecr&oci 


i^X^v 


^x^- r i ri 


~efa)V 


-UJ 


-TjVOLl 


^sp^flijV-ojxai 




-clurjv 




-ea-Qou 



Part. 

0fJ.EV0£ 

yyJvos 

oy,svo$ 

sis 



A few of these Verbs have a 2d Aorist Middle, as irvy9zvou.au, 

Dissyllables in zw are contracted in the Imperative and Infinitive 
ynly. Thus we say irXsw, irxkoiuzv, and not7rAw, irtevasv. 



<s 



72 



w 








w 




c 


1— 1 


+j 


> 




c 

CO 


> 


1— t 

Q 


t-, 


1—4 

H 






a 






< 







8 ' 3 *» 



/i3r} 



'3'3'D 



AOJ. 



*s '«; »=» 



M* 



*i$ '«i 


'<J 






*i*. k «5 


5 


"J UJ 


-o 




^1 
a 



*8 *S3 l ^> 



A3fi 



~« «S V 



<w 



a 



»8 l 3'S 



'8 "»Ui 



v* v« i* 



y uj 





Q HI * 




3?. 




*« '03 '3 








• 


Amjj 


w 




5> 


i ^ '"^*\ 


t-i 


N 8 uj "*=> 


H 


o 


< 


*w-tff»«f 


rf 


a uu o 


W 




Ph 


40* 


>5 




>—i 


,-~W N 




»8'JS«2 





r/?.i 










** 


Uj 


o 


n 






8 




o 



ifj 



^ V* "^ 

w aT «» 

a iS o 



»3 J 3 J 3 

3 3 3 

*& -uj ^o 






Mi 



73 




10 



*3<3 ! 3 
J 3* 3* 



3,i 



«a «^ J 3 



teri 



\ h v- 









Vrt J-- j^ 


o 


g~ b b 


> 


3 o o 






C 


£ o; v^ 




-g.e\^ 



>3-'S '5 



*3 «3 l 3 







V5 - HI ~o 




5 3 3 










r ^ x 
is *^ * 3 

*3 o o 

e - s 




















> 

•— ( 

< 
*-> 


13 
Q 


K 3-~3 3 
§ v 3 **3 

Q W O 


> 

H 
O 


'a «^ e 3 


> 

h 

i— • 

Z 


4 


Pi 

o 

t-H 






o 




f MJ, 


M 


/10J, 


u* 
% 


< 


Pi 

< 










<3-'3'S 


to 


*8<^ ? 3 


*-\ 




Ph 




*3 o o 






*S 3 3 




,*f J? 5^ 










ST 9? *? 






*8 -U) -o 




«S "tu o 










° o o 


















> 


'a -u) ^o 




? 3- ? 3 J 3 


^^5 


ggg 

,§ «D *=» 

*3 © o 

,8 8 « 






.§ 3* 3* 




*§^: 




* 






















'a 


b b b 






Va Vj» % Va 












o 


2 ^ =» 






'3-'3'3 








Iv. 






O o o 








«"£&« 




UJ 




£; 


^y »uu -o 




WD 


if '**» v£ 








1 










jfl 


« 3 3 

**$ *ui -o 

*3- J 3 '3 

»> •■. * 

3 3 ' o 

!'<•< 




^> <£ v£ 

-ST" R - £- 
*3 J 3 2 3 
51 «< £ 


' 


3* 






>. >. X 

*3'3 J 3 
3 3 3 



K 



74 



CO 

W 

a 

o 
> 

w 



> 

CO 
CO 





3 o o 


2-D «3 »=> 

o © o 




2 o o 
*■*$ -w ^o 


4-g^ 




9f° 


3p) 




' « ' W *g 


*« f 3 'g 




~5S ~m *o 





T0§3'fl 



"3 



AOQA 
'« '3 '5 




a; 

Oh 

s 



aw© 



J 8 l GJ *=> 



AVAW^ 



3 v 3 "3 



QJ, 



*$ 








a ~uj ~© 


1 

'3 *=>'=> 




1 &*(?.* 3 


© o 


to/) 






£5 


Q ^W ~© 


-£ © © 

Q -iu *•© 




rati 


aQ 




i^> jo jo 

° o o 


***§■*§ 






>© v<3"0 




© o o 


8 X © 




"a" ^w -o 


' •■ t X L 




1 1 ' 






I- <^<*a 


'«J *UJ *W3 



'8 



X»g3'// 


y iw o 

30.0 


"3 o o 


'S "© "© 

a iu o 





'0-° 



*s 



aqq£ 



'8'3'2 



W0i> 






3 <=s o 



© o © 



75 







£ 






o 

-o 




3gi 


) 




J 3- ? S 


o 


Oh 


*§ 3 . 

Q V U) 


o 

"O 



V^3fl 



'3<3 '3 
4 3 3~ 

S ^uj ^o 



'a J ?^<3 

v a *w ~o 

WQ3rl 



3-~ 



"3 ~3 "5 

Q UJ © 





i /tkp 




/.op 










*3-~© o 




iS^'3 








> 

< 
H 

Ah 
O 


. Q UJ O 

/top 

13 *3-'o 's 

Z ' Jf . * 


p 
o 


a -uj -o 

/top 

O -UJ *•© 


w 

>• 

1— t 

E* 

t— » 


5 

I* 

UJ 

5 

b 

K u} 


o 

p 

&4 


/lOQ3rl 


{3 


A0Cj3fl 


55 


< 




,«^ A ^^^\ 


CO 


/"^*^^*S 










"3-~© ~o 




v 3~3 v 3 










O UJ o 




Q UJ O 









a 





0^ 




3- o o 




~8 s s 

a -uj •*© 




" 


cJ3 


J 3- 3 '© 

O »uj ~© 



tkrl 



3-S 








3 ~2 ^2 



76 

. Verbs in ML 
Verbs in pi are formed from Verbs of the Third 
Conjugation in am, sm, om, and vw 9 

1. By prefixing the Reduplication with i ; x 

2. By changing m into fxi ; z 

3. By lengthening the penultima. 
Thus from a-rdm is formed forrjfu ; 

from Seco, Ti-,r\iki ; 3 

from horn, 3/3ft)jtx/ ; 

from tizixvva), hslxvufxi. 

Verbs in fxi have only three tenses of that form : the 
Present, Imperfect, and Second Aorist. They take the 
other Tenses from Verbs in m ; thus Stim^i makes §m<rm, 
hi^wxa, from Soo>. 

Verbs in u;xi have neither Reduplication, 5 Second 
Aorist, 6 nor Optative or Subjunctive Moods. 7 

1 If the Verb begins with a Vowel, with iff or err, I aspirate only is 
prefixed, as s u>, lyiA ; irrau), firry [M, &c. This is called the Improper 
Reduplication. 

The Reduplication takes place in the Pres. and Imperf. only. 

x The form in ( ai is Old Attic and Ionic ; hence <ri is added to the 
3d Person Singular of the Present. 

3 For dftjp, see page 4p. note 3. 

4 Verbs in pi have no 2d Future, 2d Aorist Passive, or Perfect 
Middle. 

5 With <pduj, <pyfu ; Wcy, 8v[u, &c. and those, which are formed 
from trisyllables, as Kgsu,vdu), xgsfAvytM: 

6 Or the 2d Aorist is the same as the Imperfect. 

7 The Poets change many Verbs in w into, p; as ysAaw, yeXytu; 
e%cy, EX^l* 1 ' KTe ^ UJ > xrfifri ; oviou, ovy^i ; ogdui, 0§i)fU ; QiXsou, pi/v^a* ; 



/Tt 



77 

ACTIVE VOICE. 

The Moods and Tenses. 



Ind 



Present 



Imper. 



2dAor. 




Imper. 


Opt. 


Subj. 


Inf. 


-aSi 


-a/yjv 


-co 


-avai 


-STl 


-=/rjv 


-co 


-ZVCtl 


-0Q1 


-oAjv 


-w 


-ovai 


-V$l 






-vvai 



Part. 
-*$ 

-vg 



the rest like the Present. 



<7T>]0< 


CrTOtlYjV 


o~tco 


(TT^Vai 


Sej 


flsnjv 


5 60 


QHvai 


c% 


5o/>)V 


%U) 


Sovvai 



(TTOLS 



W. 



dovg 

The other Tenses are regularly formed from Verbs in 
, thus : 



1 Fut. 



1 Aor. 



Perf. 



Plup. 




-OijOU 





-siv 


-0/jOU 





-eiv 


-aifM 





-eiv 


-OlfJU 


.... 


-eiv 



-00 


-Oil 


-co 


-Oil 


-co 


-Ctl 


-00 


-OLl 


-00 


-SVM 


-00 


-even 


-00 


-SVCtl 


-00 


-SVOtl 



-oov 
-oov 
-oov 
-oov 
-a; 
-ag 
-ag 
-a.$ 

-00$ 

-oog 

-OiC 

-cog 



)=iy(siv 



1 The 1st Aorist of htfiffU has an Active, and the 2d a neuter 
signification. So in fialvcv. 

% Some irregularities occur in those tenses of the Verbs in pt, 



78 



Numbers and Persons. 







Present. 








Sing. 




Dual. 




Plur. 




for-Yipi, Ytf, 


nfh 


tXTOV, CLTOV, 


ajxev, 


are, 


UGl* 


T/0-ijfw, m> 


Wh 


STOV, ZTQV, 


epsv, 


STS, 


610"*, 


%i$-cop,i 9 oog, 


w<n } 


0T0V } OTOV, 


opev, 


0T6, 


ovvi, 


faUv-vpi, v$, 


v<ri, 


tJTOV, VTOVy 

Imperfect. 


V[LSV, 


VTSy 


U<Tl. 


Sing. 




Dual. 




Plur. 




*0T-1)V, Vjfy 


V, 


OCTOV, OLTYjVy 


UfJLSV, 


are, 


CHTUV, 


htt-YjV, ys, 


)k 


erov, sVnv, 


spev, 


ere, 


S(TXV, 


edld-oov, cog, 


CO, 


OTOV, OTTJV, 


0[XSV, 


OTc, 


o<roiv, 


efclxv-uv> vc, 


v> 


utgv, uryv, 


U[ASV, 


UTS, 


UVOLV. 3 



which follow the analogy of Verbs in to. In the latter, the Perfect 
preserves the penultima of the 1st Future. But verbs in ju, derived 
from £to, change tj, the penultima of the 1st Future, into si for the 
Perfect, as Uw 3 Qrj<rou, tefa'infy. Those derived from aw keep in the 
Perfect the penultima of the Present, as <rrao>, o"njo*co, eoYaxa. 

In this last a syncope often takes place ; thus Icrrcca : hence the 
Participle e<rracv$, and by contraction scrTuog. 

1 "Ecrr-a^ey, ccts, dtri, &c. are from sW^a*. 



z The Third Person Plural in the Present is the same as the Dative 
Plural Participle of the same tense. 

3 Verbs in p.; arc seldom used in the Imperfect. They generally 
in this, and sometimes in other Tenses, adopt their original contracted 
form; thus far-Uov, ow ; ifiQ-sov, ouv ; ehlo-oov, ovv ; &c. 



79 









Second Aorist. 




Sing. 






Dual, 


g<TT-">]V, 


K, 


v 


YjTOV, 


rjTYjV, 


»-lJV, 


ns, 


n> 


STOV, 


STYIV, 


s$-oov } 


<*h 


w, 


0T0V 9 


QTTiV, 



Plur. 



spsv, sts, e<ruv, 

QfiiV, OTSj OtTUV. 



Sins. 



tf V A Z 

KTTO.-VI, 
Tlfe-Tl, 

MM*, 

falxvv-Qi 9 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
Present. 
Dual. Plur. 



TOV, TOJV, 



Te, Touarotv. 







Second Aorist. 








Sing. 




Dual. 




Plur. 


CT>j0l/ 


a-TYjTCOf 


(TT^TOV, 


(TnjTCOV, 


crrrji e, 


GT^raHrav, 


% 


flsTCO, 


0eVoV, 


0ero>i/, 


Uts, 


0s'r«;o-s*Vj 


8o& 


Soto;, 


S0V0V3 


8otcov, 


loTS) 


$<>Ta>fl"av. 4 



1 The Second Aorist retains the long vowel in the pen ultima of 
the Dual and Plur. except in riflijjxt, Si&o/xi and fyp. 

The 3d Person Plur. is often syncopated; thus gjSav for EfZrjtrav. 

* The Poets retain the long vowel, as Ict^i* rifyfi. The syllable 
Si is frequently rejected, as terra, or ktt^, riOij, &c. 

3 The Second Aorist Imperative ends in Qi 9 except Qs$ and So$; 
with If, Evitrrfs;, &%€$, <p^s* 

* Dissyllables in u/ju have a 2d Aor. Imper. as xXvQi. 



80 



Sing, 



«rrai->jv, 



>W> *l> 



Sing. 






>Ki y> 



OPTATIVE MOOD 
Present. 
Dual. 

>)TOV, ^T*JV, 

Second Aorist. 
Dual. 

YjTOV, rjTW, 



Plur. 



ypev, >jte, >jcrav & ev. 1 



Plur. 



ypev, YiTSy ricocv & ev. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 









Present. 








Sing. 




Dual. 




Plur. 


iCTT-W, 


a?, 


?> 


arov, arov, 


U)fASV s 


UTS, COCTI, 


TI0-6U, 


ifi 


fa 


>}TOV, >}TOV, 


copsv, 


ITS, OOCTl, 


$!§-«;,* 


<?*> 


ft 


WTOV, COTOV. 

Second Aorist. 


tOftEV, 


cots, overt. 




Sing. 




Dual. 




Plur. 


*TW, 


<nfj, 


<"> 


(TTYjTOV, (FTTJTOV, 


TTcopsv, <tty]ts, o-Taxri, 


$00, 


Hu 


^ 


Oyitov, $Y}TOV, 


QwfASV, 


0rJTs, flwcri, 


Zco, 


lc»s, 


&<», 


dwTOV, loOTOV y 


Scopev, 


Boots, Scucri. 



* The latter form is the more frequent. See p. 6l. 

* The Ionic Dialect inserts s , as tM w, and the Poets add /, as 



UTTUVOU. 



81 

INFINITIVE MOOD, 
Present. 

TtQiVCtl. StioVOtt. 

Second Aorist. 



«T>]V«I. 



fautvvvou. 



Souvai. 1 







PARTICIPLES. 






Present. 






Second Aorist. 


»<JT-af, 


acrot, 


/ 
av. 


ora£, 


ciwa, (tt«v 


TI0-Si£, 


e7<ra, 


r 
£V. 


Self, 


0e7<ra, flev. 


&<S-ouj, 


ov<rct t 


OV. 


Sou?, 


Souca, 5w. 


Seixv-uc, 


ucra, 


/ 







FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 
The Imperfect 

is formed from the Present by prefixing the Augment, 
and changing jx* into v, as rttrjtu, er/0>jv. 

The Second Aorist 

is formed from the Imperfect by dropping the Redupli- 
cation; as ST107JV, %$7\v ; or by changing the Improper 
Reduplication into the Augment, as ta-Tr t v } e<rr7j^ 

If the Verb has no Reduplication, the Second Aorist 
is the same as the Imperfect. 

* 2?he regular form is fjrjvou and $wyai, 



S2 



Present 



PASSIVE VOICE. 

The Moods and Tenses. 



Ihd. 



Imp. 






Imp. 


Opt. 


Subj. 


Inf. 


-ot<ro 


-OtlfAYlV 


-wflai 


-curQxi 


-2<ro 


-SIMV 


-U}[J,0tl 


-eaQoti 


-o<ro 


-o/jotrjv 


-wju-aj 


-ovQai 


-v<ro 






-vo~Qcu 






the rest like ibe Present. 



Part. 

■a{A£V0$ 
■S[ASV0$ 
■6(ASVQ$ 

•v[ievo.s 



Tenses formed from Verbs in 



Perfect W" 

J oso- open 
r so~toc^v 

pi-?, hfjr 

CkvxcMr-oiLau 
P. p. F.< T£0e/<r-OjU.«i 
\Se§ocr-o/x.aj 

I gTeS>jv 



-OKT0 

-euro 

-070 



-UlfX.YjV 



-cbficci 



1 Aor. 



1 Fut. 






T£0-)JTJ 
8o9-1JT* 



-OlfAY\V 

-o/pjv 



-w 



0). 

-fio-Qon 
-ocrOat 



-ofxevog 
-etypevos 



• • « • 


-0*pjV 


♦ • • • 


• • • • 


-Ol[J,YjV 


• • • • 


• • * * 


-o/jttqv 




• • • • 







-so-Qcu 


-opevo: 


-so-Qou 


-OffcSVOC 


-so-Qoti 


-ojxevo^ 


-yjvai 


-*k 


->jvai 




->}Vfla 




Ssj^fl-rjvaj 


-.if 


-so-flou 


-OjK-SVOJ 


-evQoti 


-6fJLSV0$ 


-so-Qoti 


-6[ASV0$ 


-etrtai 


-opevos 



83 



lumbers and Persons. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



rlk- 

8fo- 
Islxw- 



Sing. 



.pct^croti, Tottf 



Sing. 






Present. 




Dual. 


Plur. 


ju,s0ov, a-Qov, o-Qov, 


/X-sStf, <rQs, VTCtl. 


Imperfect. 


\ 


Dual. 


Plur. 


peQov, <rfyov } o-fyv, 


/jteta, o-0s, j/to. 



IMPERATIVE MOOD, 







Present. 






Sing. 


Dual. 


Plur. 


T(TT«- 


*} 






r/fo- 


V<ro 5 <r0«>, 


(r3ov, crQuv, 


(r5e, cr0a>cr«v 


fatxvv- 


) 







* In this Person in the Passive and Middle Voiced the Ionic 
dialect drops the <r, and the Attic contracts that resolution j thus 
wracaj, Ion. Torcuu, Att. fcrrr; Uero, Ion. Ueo, Att. 20w. 



84 



Sins 



KTTOH- 



bfol- 



>PJV, 0, TO, 



OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 

Dual. 

ju.e0ov, <tQov } ct0>jv, 



Plur. 
ju,e0a, <t0e, vto, 



Sing. 

t<TT-«?|xa*, a, arui, 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD 
Present. 
Dual. 

w[j.eQov, a<rdov, 5.<rbov i 
wj&eflov, >5<r0ov, vjo-floi/, 
coju-eOov, w<r0oi/, axrQov, 



Plur. 



INFINITIVE. 
Present. 

Ti0e«r$aj. 
8c/xvu<rdai. 



PARTICIPLE. 
Present. 

»TT«jW.SV-0J, "} 

tiUllsv-oc, f 

6l£0f/,cV-0$ t I 

deixvuasv-oc. -/ 



6e*>tvu|X£V-05, 



FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 

The Present 

is formed from the Present Active, by shortening 

the penultima, and changing [xi into px*, as Itrrvipu, 

1<rrd[xoLi. x 

The Imperfect 

is formed from the Present, by prefixing the Augment, 

and changing /*ou into ju,7jv, as ridsjxat, sTidi[xr}U. 



* The Poets retain the long syllable, as fli^o*, ovypou, &c. 



85 



MIDDLE VOICE. 

The Moods and Tenses. 
The Present and Imperfect are the same a(s in th^ 



Passive. 



Indie. 



The Second Aorist. 



Imper. 


Opt. 


Subj. 


Inf. 


<TT«0"O 


OTa/fAlJV 


<TTU)[ACtl 


(TTOKrQoLt 


• Qs<ro 


QsiLLYlV 


flwjxai 


0e<r0«i 


§6<T0 


loi^y 


toj^LUl 


$6<r$oti 



Part. 

TTOLfAZVOg 
bO(J,SVO( 



Tenses formed from Verbs in o>. 



iBO'TY,G'lX[Xr i V 
f (TTrj<T-0(XCit 

1 luxr-ofxcu 




a<jU,t)V 



OOfXOil 



oipjv 



ourfai 



a\Lin% 



ecrfo 



opevof 



Sing 

VTTOL- ^ 



Numbers and Persons 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Second Aorist. 
Dual. 



MV, <ro, to, 



psQov, a-Qov, <t0>jv, 



Plur. 



/xsta, <r&s, no. 



86 





- ] 


IMPERATIVE MOOD 








Second Aorist. 




Sing. 


Dual. 


Plur. 


ffTCL- 


) 






u* 


/•ero, <rfl«;, 


trbov, (tQqqV) 


(T$S f <rQoo<ruv. 


§<>- 


3 










OPTATIVE MOOD. 






Second Aorist. 




Sing. 


Dual. 


Plur. 


rra/- 


J 






Mr 


> ftlJV, 0, TO, 


petiov, <r$ov, efyv, 


ju,e5a, a-Qs, vt». 


Sot- 


) 








SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 






Second Aorist. 




Si«g. 


Dual. 


Plur. 


rr-wju-a 


I, jf, YjTCtl, 


U)fJ.e$0V, yffQoV, TJ(T0OVj 


COfJisQXy >}<T0£, MTCtt* 


6-co^xai, 


Y„ r)TUl, 


cvfjisQov, YJ<rQov, YJ<rQov> 


wpsQct, yjtrQe, wvtoli. 


S-aJjtta<, 


W 9 UJTOil, 


w[j,s6ovy axrQov, w<r$ov, 


wpeQct, uxrfte, mtxi. 


•INFINITIVE _N 


IOOD. PARTICIPLE. 




Second Ao 


rist. Second Aorist. 




GTx<jftoa. 


1 **** } 




6s<r0a*. 




Ur \pevo;, /xsvij, psvov. 




SoVdai. 




So'- ) 





The Second Aorist Middle 

is formed from the Imperfect, by dropping the Redupli- 
cation, as eTiQifA7}V, eQsfJLyv ; IcrafATjU, lora^i/. 

' This and the following Mood in the 2d Aorist of "ory^i arc 
seldom used : they are here introduced to show the analogy. 



87 

Irregular or Defective Verbs in y.i 

may be divided into Three Classes, each containing 
Three Verbs. 

I. From sco are derived sip), to be ; slpi, and nj^, tQ 

g°- 

II. From sco are derived fyai, to send ; ^uaj, to sit ; 
slfxai, to clothe oneself. 

HI. Xsjju,ai, to lie down ; fcnj/xi, to know ; <p7j;x/, to 
say. 

Class I. 

1. E'lp, to be, 

has been before conjugated, as it is used in some of its 
tenses as an auxiliary to the Passive Voice of Verbs 
in w. 

2. El^i, to go. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 1 

Sing. Dual. Plur. 

s*jcu, zi£ or £j, £j<n, novy iroVf j i^sy, its, £*m or ia-j. 

Imperfect. 

9 V T I V y J v VV 

£»y, 6K> £<., | ITOV, ITTJV, ] JjU-SV, <Te, Wttfi 

Pluperfect. 

eT>C-£iV, £J£ ; £*_, UTOV, sItYjV, | £JjU,£V, eJT£, £i(7«V. 



1 In the Attic writers slpt has a Future signification, as slpi r.a,\ 
dyysXwy Eurip. Tasy xcti gtft^aorjcroixgy, Dem. 



88 

Second Aorist. 
Sing. Dual. PJur. 

rcv, iec, >e, istov, istyjv, j *0jttsv, <exc, *ov. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
Present. 

70i or sly 'boo, | jtov, 7ra>v ; Its, Troxrav. 

Second Aorist. 

7s, Je'rco, TffTOy, Jstcov, 7sre, IsTOHToctf: 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 
Second Aorist. 
7oj//./, m$, hi, | ;Wov, lornjv, Toiju-ev, Toits, 7o*eV. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Second Aorist. 

loo, 1r,g, "y, ojtov, "y}tqv, | 'iojfievy «)ts, 7«xn. 

INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE* 

Present. Second Aorist. 

slvat or «/«i. Icov, lovvct, lav, 

MIDDLE VOICE. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Perfect. 

slot, slug, shy | elserov, stotrw, etotpev, stars, s'otcri. 

Pluperfect. 

jfgjy, fag, fjsi, ysirov, yshw, I p^tv, fans, faiffat, 

I j or faev, jjre, r,<rxv. 

First Aorist. First Future. 



/ 



89 
3. "IVjjcw, to go. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 

Sing. Dual. Plur. 

i>jj«,», Ivis, h^h 'istov, Utov, I 1o[x.sv, 'ists, ieTcr* 

Imperfect. 

— — | • Te<rav. 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 
Present. 

— . 14. 1 — l — 

INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 

Present. Present. 

Uvcu. I U)$, Uvto$. 

MIDDLE VOICE. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present. 

le-|X»J, <TCtl, TUt, I [XsQoVy vQqV, (T0OV, J fieQa, fffls, VTflCI. 

Imperfect. 

U-[/,r\v, <ro, to, I ju-s0w, cr0ov, crflrjv, ju,e0a, *de, m« 

IMPERATIVE. PARTICIPLE. 

Present. Present. 

M 



90 
Class II. 
1. e, Ir)tu 9 to send. 1 

indicative. — Present. 

Sing. Dual. Plur. 

hph h$> h*h I "stov, 'Utov, 'Ispsv, 7srs, lsi<n. 

Imperfect. 

ivy, *>j£, *>j, j it$&», isrvjv, <6^?yj ieTS, ieiruv. 

Perfect. Pluperfect. First Aorist. 

slxct. eUew. yjxcc. 

Second Aorist. 

^j *?>> >k ST0V > £Tr ) v > ^sv, ere, e<ruv. 

First Future. 
y<r-to, eig, ei, | stov, stov, | Oju,sy, sts, qvo~i. 

imperative. — Present. 

tih 9 IsTODy j hrw 9 Utwv, | hre 9 Utuhtuv. 

Perfect. First Aorist. 

styes. ' J yxov. 

Second Aorist. 

g£, erw, stov, eTWj/, J erf, stwo-oiv. 

optative. — Present. 

Perfect. First Future. 

Second Aorist. 



1 This Verb has scarcely any irregularities, but is formed like 



91 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD, 

Present. 

Sing. Dual. Plur. 

feu, ljj$, Ifi, Iyjtov, Iyitov, iwfj,ev y lyre, iw<n. 

Perfect. 

efo-co, ■$$) Yj f yrov, >jtov, | ui^sv, yjts, cu<n. 

Second Aorist. 

*>, jfo I, | ?rov, riTOV, I J>pev, ?TS a «<7I. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Present. ' Perfect. 

Isvctt. J elxsvou. 

First Future. Second Aorist. 

PARTICIPLES. 

Present. Perfect. 

U)c, isi<rct, lev. e!xa)c, elxvict, elnog. 
First Future. Second Aorist. 

yrcov, yvoucroL, rj<rov. ele, eicra, ev. 

PASSIVE VOICE. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 
Ts-^aj, con, tui, | ju,eflov*, o-0ov, <r0ov, psQct, crl?, vr«». 

Imperfect. 

U-fOJV, (TO, TO, //,600V, (rfloj/ 5 (rdlJV, jU.S0#, O"0£, VT9. 



m 



Sing. 



Perfect. 

Dual. 

fov, <r8ov, <rQov, 

Pluperfect. 



st'fl^Vy (TO, TO, | jU,£0OV, <T$OV, <T0>jV, 



First Aorist. 



First Future. 



ec/^oro/jtai. 



Plur. 

|&s0«, o-0£, vrai. 



P. p. Future. 



MIDDLE VOICE. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present and Imperfect like the Passive. 1 
First Aorist. 
>|X-ap)V, a), olto, I apekv, avQov, ao-0ijv, I aju,s0a ? acrfe, «j/to. 

First Future. 

y((T-o^ai 9 yj 9 zTUi } | opsQoVj e<rQov, so-Qov, | o/tsdotj s<r0e, ovtju. 

Second Aorist. 

sJJjmjv, ecro, ere, | epsQov, scrQov, Itrdijy, | epsQct, evQe, gyro. 



1 r 'lspai and lepjv, the Present and Imperfect Middle, signify 
J scwd myself, &c. or J a?w impelled. Hence they are generally 
used in the sense of wishing; thus fstou .ahws, Hom. Odyss. II. 
327. he earnestly wishes. In this sense they are the root of Jjxef o^, 
a desire, and of falgw, to desire* 



03 





IMPERATIVE MOOD, 






Second Aorist. 




Sing. 


Dual. 


Plur. 


, eVflco, 


| svQov, eo-Qoov, 


e<rde, erQotxrav 



OPTATIVE MOOD, 
First Future. 
yiarol-{iy\v, o, to, | jtx-sflov, <r0oi/, o-Qyv, \ psQct, <r0c, vto. 

Second Aorist. 
el-p^v, o, to, jusflov, <r$ov, crflijv, | psQa, o~Qe, vtq. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Second Aorist. 

uipxi, J, rjTai, | wpsQov, yitQov, ycrQov, | w^a, faQs, wvtxi* 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

First Future. Second Aorist. 

rjoscrQai. Mai, 

PARTICIPLES. 
First Future. Second Aorist. 

rio-opev-os, >j, ov. spzv-Q$, >}, ov. 



2. 'H[xai y to sit. 

INDICATIVE MOOD, 
Present. 



ypai, ycai, YjTai, | if(jiskv, r^hv, \vbov 3 \ ypeQa, fafe; r^nai. 



94 

Imperfect. 



Sing. 



Dual. Plur. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
Present. 

jjcto, ye-fay \ ^(rflov, vj<r&M; Yj<rQe, rjo-Qaxrotv. 

INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 

Present. Present. 

ijo-0aj. | yjpsv-oS} >), ov. 

3. Elfxai, to put on. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present and Perfect. 



StflCU, i'KTCii) StTM, 



eTro, sia-TOy seoro & etrro, 



Pluperfect. 



— ' eivr#fc. 



s»vro. 



First Aorist. 



«w- V 

©rc- Sapjy, cc, «T0j | updov, a<jfov, k<sh^ y | apeQot, a<rQs } avra* 
few- J 

PARTICIPLES. 

• Present and Perfect. First Aorist. 

1 This Verb ma}' be considered as Middle. The Active is e« or 
Jj'n-tu, forming ecro; 1st Fut. and sltra, 1st Aor. Inf. gwaj, with or gene- 
rally doubled \ thusiWw /xw, Horn. Odj/ss. XVI. 79, J «m7J cfo//*e him. 



95 

Class III. 

1. Ks7fxai, to lie down. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present. 
Sing. Dual. Plur. 

nil-lieu, <rou, toli, | peQov, vQov, <rQov, \ psQx, <r$s, ytoli. 

Imperfect. 

hzi-firy, c-o, to, pekv, <rQov, (r^v, j pebci, <r0e, vto. 

First Future. 

xsi<r-opui, Yj f ETCH, j o'peQov, e<rQov, so-Qov, ) ©)x£0«, e<r$s, ovrui, 

i 
IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 

Heliro, xe/o-0co, | xeio-Qov, xelvQ&v, \ y.£i<rh, xcivQwirciv, 



Xili-flYlV, 0, TO, 



OPTATIVE MOOD. 
Present. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present. First Aorist 

xe^juuxi. j xsl<rwfji.at. 



INFINITIVE. 
Present. 



PARTICIPLE, 



Present. 

HglfX2V-0$, fi 9 OV. 



96 

2. "Irvjfu, to know. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 
Sing. Dual. PJur. 



, UTS, 7 

' > uvi> 
ev, or Tg, 3 



kt-^i, ys, yes, utov, utov, upsv 

I or//,sv 

Imperfect. 

ftr-Wi ijfr *}, | utov, a-njv, | u\lsv, uts, u<ruv & av, 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
Present. 



»V-a0i & 5/, area 

& TOO, 



otTOV Sc 'TOV, arwv I uts & ts, utcoo~uv> 
& raw, tcovuv & rcvv. 



INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 

Present. Present. 

«<rai/ai. 7<r«-£, era, v. 

MIDDLE VOICE. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present. 
Ttra-ftai, <r«i, Ten, (xsSov, aQov, crQov, \ (Asfa, <rh, vtcu. 

Imperfect. 

Uu-pYiv, cro, to, psQov, <r0ov, <r0>jv, jxs0a, <r9e, vto. 1 

INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 

Present. Present. 

Tcrao-flat. | »<rajxev-o?, >?, ov. 

* The Passive 7<raacw is seldom used. 'EffiVraaou often occurs. 



97 

3. 4>riiu, to say. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present; 

Sing. Dual. Plur. 

$W'> $V$> $W*9 I Vutov, Qctrw, | tpotph, <pctTe, fct<ri 

Imperfect. 
fy-W> W> n> [ aT0V t oLTtp, I ctfiev, are, eurm* 

First Future. 
$v}<r~ooy ei;, H, stov, stov, | opsv, ere, our*. 

First Aorist. 
sfviar-u, a$^ s y utov, urqv, apsv, are, uv* 

Second Aorist. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD, 
present. 

$«0», $«Ta>, fUTOVy $0(.T<t>Vy fUTS, QotTWCTOiV. 

OPTATIVE MOOD,. 
Present. 



♦«»-*} V, *3f, >}, 1JT0V, ^T»J^ 



(lev, ts, ev. 



First Aorist. 

$Y)<T-Ctl[My 0(1$, CLly MTOV, «IT>JV, OtlfiSVy GUTS, OUSV. 

■ In these two tenses the <p is frequently dropped by Homer and 
the Attic writers ; thus fy), f$, y<r) ; fy, ijf, ?J. 

N 



m 

subjunctive mood. — Present. 

Sing. Dual. Plur. 

4%, ipfe, $$, - | $frov, $Z t T0v, | QZpsv, fas, $firr. 

INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLES. 

Present. Present. 

4*v«*. [ $a$, <pa<rct, ^av* 

First Aorist. First Future. 

p>j<ra*. <£ij<ra>v. 

Second Aorist. First Aorist. 

PASSIVE VOICE. 

INDICATIVE. - IMPERATIVE. 

Perfect. Tre^oiTon. ttsQuo-Qoo. 

INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 

MIDDLE VOICE. 

indicative mood. — Present. 

ipot-fLoUf <rct), rou, | peftov, <rQov, <rQov, | jxefla, <rta, vtoli. 
Imperfect and Second Aorist. 

I^a-^yjy, <ro, to, jlsQov, vQov, vfyv, psQa, <rQs, vt#. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
Present. 

f<x<r-o 9 Q<$ } $ov y dooVj | Qe, 0<w<rav. 

INFINITIVE, PARTICIPLI. 

Present. Perfect. 



99 



GENERAL LIST 



OP 



IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 



1 here are few Verbs in the Greek language, which 
can be regularly conjugated in all their Moods and 
Tenses. Some of these deficiencies may be traced to 
the principle of harmony : of others, it is difficult to 
assign the causes. Defective tenses are supplied 
either from obsolete forms of the same Verbs, from 
kindred forms in other Dialects, or from some other 
Verbs in use. 1 To assist the learner in tracing these 
tenses to their respective Themes or Roots, the follow- 
ing list has been compiled. It consists of analogies, as 
far as they can be applied to any species of Verbs ; but 
in general it contains the particular formation of each 
tense in common use. 

Of the following Verbs, those, which are used only in 
,the Present and Imperfect, will be found in the first 
column ; the next will contain the obsolete Roots, fol- 
lowed by the Tenses, which are formed from them. 

1 Such is the case in some Latin Verbs. Thus ferio is used only 
in the Tenses formed from the Present, and borrows the Perfect and 
Supine, and the Tenses formed from them, from pcrcutio. 



100 



'Ayvvco, "> ayco, 

*Ayvv(M t J foiyui, 

"Ayco, ^ 

*£ °°9 c *y*y°°> 



A. 

uyoxroitoti, Y)ycc<ru(iY,v, rjycKrfieti, Yiyuvfyv. 

*?«> ?£** w*> qyo"- 
ea£«, e«X«j nctyov, eoiyu. 1 

yyoiyov, lyayo/x»jv. 



evco. J 



Avoava), J 

Verbs in a&o, frequent a lives, as Tpo^aKco, to run often. 
Verbs in a0w, derivatives, as 8»a>xa0«:, from S*a>xeo. 
Verbs in aiw, derivatives, as xegxlco, from xepaw. 
Alpeao, ^ 

'yiA&ij<rxa>, 3 

, , v C uXexoo, Ct\EpCtU.YlV. 

'AXeopou, uksvw, %\sv<rx, >jAsuapjv and ^Asa/x>jv by Syncope. 
'ylAivSeaJj aX/co 5 u\(<rco, >jAjxa. 

tz\dco, ukuxrx, clkaxroput, YJ\co<rct, vjXcaxa, jjAoj/xcu, 

f/Xcov & ediXoov. 
'AX<$>ci!va>, a\<peoo, u\$y]vcti. 

* ApctpTavoO) dpotpTea), u(J,upTrj<7w, dtfj,apTr)<ro[j[,cci, y[/,dpTYi<ja, yfXjoip- 
Trjxx, YifAcigTYifAcii, rjpotpTOV, Poet. ypfipoTOV. 



Wxw, -J 



'AXfoxCD 



1 *Aytv, to break, conjugated with the Digamma, /a'/w, forms 
l/aja, e/a^/a, *fayov. But as the Digamma is seldom expressed in 
writing, the words will be saga, ZoiyoL, sayov. 

* This seems to be put for UfaSa. That oiSw had the Digamma 
appears from sva,$s } Odyss. XVI. 28. 



101 




avwyeco, Imp. rjvcuyovv, ocvooy^crw. 
avcoyr,[Ai, Imper. civcjoy^i, ayoo^i. 



au^eoo, au^a-My civZrpou.cn, rivfao-u, riv^u-on. 

Verbs in aw, frequentatives, as \xraw, to come frequently, 
"Verbs in iaw, signifying desire, as ju.a0rjT<aco, to desire to learn. 
Verbs in aw, signifying imitation, as x 1 "®* *° ^ e white as snow. 



Balvw, 



BocXXw, 

fiaXw, 

f/3aAov, 

fierce, 

Btwo~xw, 



B 



jS^jbtar, /SejSaa, 2d Fut. fieojxai. 

pi(5aw, Part. Pres. |3*j3o5v. 

jS/jS^i, 2 A. I'fov, Snbj. /3e/c», Part. Pr. jSijS*;. 

/3A£<a, {$Xr)<rw, fisfiXrjxu, ^(3X^X1, t^Xrfi^v, 

fictXXiw, (3otA.\Yi<roo. 

fflfct, £/3a>5v, 2d A. Opt. M. 2d Pers. /3Xs7o. 

/3/ow, fiiwo~w, fiefilwxu, j6«j3/»ju,ai, £/3<ov. 

fttcofu, hfilwv. 



BXao-ravw, .fiXao-jew, fiXao-TrjO-w, fispXao-jrixa, efiXurrov. 
/vuuxsw, fioo~xr)G~w f /3ot7x^<70jU.«a<_, /3c/3oV;ojx#. 



} /3o<rxeco, 
3 /3o'», 



fiwo~w, fisfScoxa. 

BovXou.cn, (SovXico, ^ovXr^ou-ai , fic^ovXr t ixai, efiovXrfav. 

fipow, fipwo~w. 

Bpwvxw, 



Bifipwi 



PpwfM, efipwv. 

(ZsfipwQw, fiefipwQotpi. 
Verbs in 0», preceded by a consonant, as $!f /3». 




yOL^SQiy 



r yfM, 

rfywpMf j 



I 



yvwpi 



102 
r. 

yvLp.i\iW) yajxIcro/Aaj, sya^,r\<T0t t ysya^Kse, 
ysya.p.YllJ.a.1, sytxpydriv. 

yypccGM, eyYjgcKTtx, ysy^oLy.a.. 
Pr. Inf. yvigavou, Part. y^a^. 
y=vri<7o^ai, sysvYicrapriv, yeyiwuftou, tys- 

vrfiyv, syzvofxriv, ylyovct. 

ly-ivupy\v. 

ysyaa. 

yv<j}<ra>, yvuxrop.au, syvwxu, syMoarpou, 

lyvaiorfyjy yvwjbrpXi\LaLt. 

eyvmy. 



to learn, j 
divide, j 



to 

AuKVCtiy 



^rptvjy 



Js ® M > 1 ft ft 

8sftr«), V 

Aiofiou, £sjo>, 

AkhaLa'aco, ~) 



Sa(7a; ? S&G-ofiiuiy s&acra, llxo~oL^Vy lidctactj. 

0?fa)j h^otxciiy ilrfecij Sc'Svjp^a, Ss8>jyjxa», 

eS^5>j v ; eoax'ov. 

hocg^Yio-o^on, SsSagSvjna, I8ag0>jv, s&agflov. 

lmper. 8sS»0i and 8c/8i0i. 

e8iov, St'Sia. 



BiSaFX^O*. 



eSgijv and e$£av,. 



1 The ancient form was yiyvopou and yryvoSffKw ; which was 
softened into y/voasu and yiviti'&Xio. 



103 

l\*t. fcr.r.crx, /• ^^ Zo^opou, Hmtwv, Syn. I§^iljy. 

C I'Jvolco, ^rsrftopou, E$JVT J T&fJ.r i v, Sfiuvr ; ;u,5£», kl'Jvr r 

~) Syco, ViT'A, Ijcrajx-xi- o'iljy.x, SsSutrftai. 

Verbs in £a preceded by a consonant, as xuAn&». 

j^ } isic, id***, &hHv, P^. 

r t xa, ) 

Verbs in stx, derivatives, as $kiytjoo, from pJyx, 

E^M f ~\ 

fTctw, f £$;&;, e'oJia-cti, stir,TX,-i%rixx, PIup. »}^I*i 

iTSov, tiov, C e*&fl*i, Pi\ Opt. e!s=sV.> Inf. sfivscu. 

Verbs ki eiwo, poetical, as Igsslvx. 

e £ w > / l^ecs, eofrojAxi, slgqxa, swr^xi, s<£>s3rjjr. 

Verbs in eico, signifying design, formed from Futures, as o<Ul»> 

to design to see, from S-nroo, F. ofy». 
'Ekxtvoo, 1 khxio, l\ot.<Tu), r r^Kxix, T)\a(rxws, fy^axx & 

^X^Xoxa, r t Xxfxxt &, r{kx<ju,x\, yAxfyv & 

*EpvQxIvoq, eoufiew, SQuftycu). 

1 The origin of this Verb is lAo;. Hence three forms are derived : 
the Boeotic, i\<xcv ; the jEolic, sXclvm ; and the Doric, iXoLvvw. 

4 Tn this Tense cr is frequently dropped, and the Contract form is 
adopted : thus saw, sXdf, ikx. ¥ E.A7ou comes from g/.Aw. 



104 



*EgxofX,oct f IkevQat, sXevacpcu, rj\£V<rx, yXvQov, Syn. tjA0oy, 
Perf. M. »)Ay0a & tA>«Ay0a. 

EuSo;, evdioo, sy&qceo. 

Evg f KTKW, gygscoy sugrpca, £ygrjO"«/X)jv, evgyxtx, ev^r^ou, ivge- 

0rjy, £t>£=0ijcroju,af, su^oy, su^opjv. 

** ai> \ (TXW*) 2d. A. Imper. c%s?. 



Z. 



Zaa>, ^ 


Sfrfr 


Zcoyyyco, "j 


J #», 


Zcti/WfjLi, J 




BeXco, 


QeXi-jo, 


6riytxva) 9 


Qfjyu), 


Biyyavca, 


blyci), 




\ Qvuca, 


$vr£ct), | 


1 Qyjvcd, 



l/U 



e. 

8e\rj<rcti, etyiXrpa., tsU\yixu. 
QtZofjictt, eStyov. 

TzQvYjXCC, TsOvUU, TsfosiXCi & TS&VSIOI, 

eQotvov, 2 F. M. Qumvpoti, 

TeQvYj^VQ, TsftvYfeopCtl. 

Pr. Imper. TeQvaQt, Opt. reflyanjv, Inf. 
TtQvavoti, Part. TS0ya$, 2 A. g0v»jy. 



6agyyjx», 3 



c J§gyy«, IS^ucc, 



JSgyfirjy. 



' 105 

Verbs in »£«, derivatives from Verbs, as vokeplfa from TroXi^sao. 

'iQvvw, IQuoDj \Qv<roo, 70ucra. 

c Ixvsou.cti S " XM > '(£op*h IZ&fMiv, lyjMti, Jxopjv. 

C iXcLOl, WoLVOfiOUt iKoLQ-Oi^V, iA)JX«, »A»<T0>JVj 

' iKoKTXOtlOU, 1 a, 

Ix^a,, £ ^ .^ p r M ?Xfi ^ 

"Iimifu, ~) , 

v > 7TTuw, Trnjcree, TreTrojxa, 7rs7rTupoit, 

STTTt)V, J 

Kctlai, "} 

xjjw, s'joja & exs/a, gxrjapjv & Ixgjapjv, exaov, 



xatxreo 



sxarjv. 
xgxauxa, 

Keouvvuco, C X6 £" w> X6 ?a°"^ exegacra, lxsgao-«pjv, xgga<r0>r 

tr / 1 (roaaj. 

Kegotvvvfu, J , , 

rrt J x^aw, xgouroo, xixgotxx, xsxgupui, Ix^aflijv, x^a- 

'KegSalm, "J 

xifiavw, \ xegfteM, xsffi<roo, xsg^Yjcro^at, Ixlgifya-a, xsxs^xa. 

xsxsgtiaxa, \ 

Ki%<xvoo 9 ") / v 

xA«y£«>, V. xXyyw, Perf. M. xexAijya. 

xixKoLyyciy \ 

KXcdoo, \ 

xAau<ra>, \ xkuizoOy xXuiri<rw. 

xsxXuvxct, \ 

A'Ayeo, xAOjXi, Imper. xAO0* & xgxAuflj. 

Koqevvuoo, ") xogeae, xogerco, hxogsa-u, skogstra^YiVf xsxo^xu, x?xo* 

Kogwvfj.i, 3 fJj"^'? IxogsVfyv. 

o 



106 



Kpspa. 



, C xp=u,!xa). x.PEixa.o'U), 

SflUVVUM, \ 5 * 

tTOLXU, J 



exgefiourety sx^tfJM(rafJi.riv f exgs- 



KuXlvdu), 



%KTt\V, % A. M. hxTOMflYf Inf. XT«CT0ai, 

Part. KTupsvos. 



xvXico, xvX'ktcio. 
xuAjvSJco, xuA»v&5<ra>. 



/lay^avw, 



ActpfictVOQ, 



Auvtiuvco, 



A. 

Xrjx&, Xy)%co, XYjZopou, A?A>^a, Att. etA^a, 
eiX^yfxoLi, sXct^ov, Perf. M. XzXoyyjx. 

Xyftcv, A>j\|/o/x,aj, AsAi}<pa, Att. s'iAi^a, XsX^i^oli 

Sv ziXYijApou, eXrftQyv Sc tJA^fiyjv, A>j<£- 

$v}(TOtACiu eXaflov, sXafio^v. 
Xafiioo, X;X*xfir l x.a. 

XccfAfioo, Xci^oficti, iAa/Mj/ajtx,>5v, eAa/x^O^y. 
A^flco, Imp. eAijfioy, A^toj, Aijcrojaaj, XeXYjO-pai 

& XzXoLG-pai, eArjcrflrjv, eXciQov, hXo^o^v^ 

XsXrfix. 



Mu^OfLUiy 

MeXXoo, 

MsXce/ 



jji##3#, pafy&opai, efj*a()Yi<rufAy)Y 9 psfxufyxci, eixa- 

Sov. 

jxsAAsw^ fjLsXXrjG-o}, IjOteAAr/cra. 

-fxsXeJi), psXyjcrw, IjU-sATjo-apjv, jtfcs^lArjxa, jx=|xl- 

Aijjuat & ^s^Xyi^ui, hfjisXrfi^Vy spsXoV; 

/.c^oojAa. 

_ __ , " • "- ;v . [J -»— ■ — ' ' — - ' "•" 

1 This Verb is chiefly used as an Impersonal. 






Miyvvoo, j 

Mlyvjpi, f 

MtfLVYiCXCQ, fJt,VCiW, 



Mooyvfica, 

Mogyvvfu, \- fxogyu), [jLog^co, l^oq^ot^v 

'Opogyvvpi, 

Mvxco, "^ 

fAiSfAVXet, > 

epuxov, J 



107 

Ijx/y*jv, fAiyr)<ropoLi. 
lAVYi<rco, fjLvyjtrofion, ejxyijcra, 1^v^(tu\m^ 9 
[i.=[/,i,"ri(jLot,i, l|U.y^<r0rjy, jxyy)<r&rj<ropxj. 



y,vxciCJ0, y,vxYi<rw. 



N. 



vacoftoLi, eveurot, pva&apym hzcrfyy. 



Nen», vccoo, 

Verbs in v#», "> . 

> derivatives, as irjovacc from Tsoaco. 



vfeo, 






oftxtsw, 



> o$sa>, 



0<T00, 

Perf.M.«8a,} 

Oio/c 



Java, V 

>ktxo>, j 






o!8^<7co, a>§r)<ra, t^tr t xsc. 



nr t (ro[Acii f wyjixoii, $x*jy, coijfojy, 



'Ohio-Q 






co^diixdL. 

7 C oAjt0=«, wX/<r0»)5-a ; cb\l<rQriXGt f wfaadov, w\urfav 
xirw, 3 



108 



v 0jxvu/ju, 



6\su)y . iXs<T(jo, ctiXttZ, wh*KX 9 «A=VG»jv, wAov, 
cuAo/^y, 6\ov[j,y.i } wXcc & cAcyAa. 

Qfx,oco 9 o^oirco, oopoo-a, a>y,o<rxfJwiv, w(Ao>tot & 
QjW-aijU-oxa, 2 F. M. o^ou^ou. 

ovsoo, &VYj<rai, 6vy}<to[j.cci, oov^(Tol, wyqarafLyv & 

Mtxpyv, covYipai, wvaflvjv. 

6<$siX£co, o$ziky]<TOi y copelfyxoc, w$sikw & «;£eAoy. 
6$ksoo, o^kqtToo, w£A>pca. 



Ilsgvccuiy 

Jls<Tcrcfj, 

IISTUVVVOO, 

IlST<XVVV[JLlj 

nYiyvvoo, 
Ilyyvviu, 

Iliyco, 







ffip, 



7rel<roficti, Boeot. for 7r>j<rojaai, tVaflov. 
%aQr l (Tai J hrc&rpcL) 7rs7raQrixu. 
Perf. M. 7reW0# & w«ro<r0a. » 

Syn. Trqauiy 7rga<roo f veTCQeucoi, veirgetfiaty 

7re7rga.o-0(JLCti > sV^aSyji/, 7rgot()Y)crofAou. 

TtSTuaoo, S7rsTCi<ra., TtSTtsruy.cL Sc TrgWaxa, 

7rc7TT0i0r[J,iXt f S7T5T0C(T^V. 

5>jv, STrayvjv, nccy reopen, 7rs7njya. 

PrtS. M. KlofJLCCiy irlvopoLiy smov, 2 F. M. 
TTiOUjW-at. 

Imper. 7n0*. 



1 ris^aa?j /(> pa.ss ?//ifo another country ; irecvdw, to pass for the 
purpose of selling ; it^lcc^cci, in the Middle Voice, to buy a person, 
or thing, brought from another country. 



109 



Trjrcy, ~~H7U. 



I7*7r/(TXW, 7r\<Uy 



7TTQM. 



TTSTTTCOXOr. 



ZLVtgo, 



IlTtxgYVfxxi, tttglIq'jOj e7TTugQV. 

IlvvQavo'AsUj TrrjQio, 7T€v(ro(i,<x.i, 7re7rv(TfAUi, Iflrudo'jxijy, xy5oDjx«j, 



pvew, 



I /w 

cs%ca, 

'Pfyvvpt, 5 
'Pdovvvpt, j 



?py.^, Att. £g§a>, %?«>> Perf". M. Isgya. 



p'jycM, pvr}G-Qfj,citi, sppurixx, sppwp. 

\iluyrpy puyricrofxcu. 

goacrso, slbxvci, spcooxa, efloopm, epf*»bp. 



XfizvvCoo, 



<rjS=&, <rfii<ro), E<rj5m~ot ) l<rpsxx 8c saS^xa, so-fisir- 



ZxsOtxvvvfAt, j 



XxiWoo, 



' C <jx\olw, 1 A. s<rxr)Xa 9 scrxXijxa, 



£ rxAtjj&i, Pr. Inf. aiO^vsa. 

Verbs in trxa), 1 derivatives, form their tenses from their primi- 
tives, as pjgia-xcD, svgscti, suprj<Tai } &c. 



Verbs in o-xw, which have a great affinity to Verbs in $u t are 



z±bv$*, 






110 

<7TOg£co, rrrocjicrcjo, (rrogcv, scrrogsorci, lcrTO^eor«-j!x.>^v. 



b > ctqow, (TTgwvco, ecrrgccvtx, ecrrgcocrot^viVy ea-rgcofLott, 

-Sj^sfee, 0"X««>. See page 104, 



rjUVO), i TSfA'OO, T£ffr>/0"a>. 

J 0>]v, zrpxyov, hfxxyriv, 






ThXTUJ, 



TfWfcco, sTfflza, TET/xjjxa, TEr/xijpaj, st/x/j- 

TSTCXCX.. 
] i\ . £Ti7 



3 TiT 

rpocv 



rococo), rgoocrofAsCii, argctiea., TSTgcofjix^ 
krgwQviv, T§'j)Qyi<rojjt,ui, 



derived from Primitives in aw, so;, got, and yar, and are formed by 
the insertion of x after the <r of the 1st Future: thus from yyoctcu, 
yr^atna is formed yij'gacxw ; from acscw, d^scrx y d^crxcu ; from (Blow* 
fikajcrco, fiioucxto ; and from /xeSJw, ps$u<rw, ^aducrxev. 

Some of these, like Verbs in /xf, prefix the Reduplication, as y/y- 
vmctxco from yvevo'ca, riT'f'jucxaj from fpujoruo. Some change the vowel 
of the pcnultima, as tjjSot, yfiyjGuj, yfjacrxev. 



1 Tzilvoj and tztxvov are both found ; the former derived from 
?eaav the latter from rapj. Hence the 2d Aorist is eitherTrtytov or 
t?&u.op. See page 56. 



Ill 






sTpotyoVy 
Tuy%oivco, 



\ $<zyu)y Quyopxi, 2 F. M. Quyovpui, s$xyw. 

C rv^eoo, TuyjiG-ca, Irv^r^ot, Tzjuyr^y.. 

< TBv^Wf rsu^ofxou, T=T£vj£u y TZTvyjjisci, Tsry^ofiaj, 



1 ' TTTi(Tyryi^a.i , V7ro>r^soo f V7:oa-^r,~Oj^ai, v-zg-^u.ui, %w£<ryj)JL'rp. 
Verbs in vQw, derivatives, as $hv69co, from <£&». 
Verbs in v<v, polysyllables, as a-ficvvvai. 



i£«<r?ca;, 



<PiPMy 



( PSuvco, 



5 $^, 






o*rco, o'ltropou, oTcr&jv, o«cr8^!70^a*. 

1 A. yveyxoi, .^veyxa&|V, w^j)v, vjvsyxr/, 

rjVEyxop.yv. 

1 A. rjvetXOt, YlVBiKtX^YjVy IvyveypMi, tyky- 

Per. M. Iv^vo^a. 

q>0PY)<Tco, l^oprpUj wepoprip.ctt; Syn. 0£sa?„ 
$gYi<rou, &c. 
Imper. A. <2. pplji 

fdiVfc, efrVojXflrt, sffarot, &p0*x». tpdiiioa. 



$6(TCSQ y 
7TS$VKC£ f 



<pvut, 



112 



e$vv. 



X. 



X^9 i %**£&> X ui §y™> %a/gij<ra, x =X«^**j *=x«- 

Xa.<7xu)y "> xaivckj X uv ^y %ayo5jtt«^ *X<mov 9 ksyava. &. 

Xx(rxa'£a>, j x sX^ va * 

XoCtiVVVCO, "} , , . or 

' , > X§ c:a > X§ M * M > MXqnP'** cv xsxpcorinu. 

XgwvvvfAi, 3 

Xmvvvu), ~) x ow > X^<r«; 5 f^cocra. xe^coo-fwu, Ip^axjfyv, ;ra;<r- 

Xumvu.1, 5 6yi(to[jlou. 



n. 






1 



fA V V ■? V A J 



1 $tiw signifies fo product ; $vy,t, in the middle sense, £o suffer 
oneself to be produced, or to be born. 

a To the list of Defective maybe added Impersonal Verbs, 
which differ little from those in the Latin language, and will be easily 
learnt by use. 

Verbal Nouns 

are formed from Tenses of the Indicative, by dropping the Augment, 
and changing the termination. 



115 

Some arc formed from the Present, as $vv&[u$ from Mvapou, 
xXfrfrrrf from KXsitroj. 

Some few from the Aorists, as #o£a from s$o%z, 0^ from f fyna ; 
f yyij from Ipyyov, #a$!j£ from sit&fav. 

The larger proportion are formed from the 
Perfect Active, distinguished by x, ^, or p in the last syllable, as 
fglxy from vsipg txa, £j£a%T? from Js&'Ja^a, y§a<prj from yiy^a<pa. 

Perfect Passive. 

First Person, distinguished by M, and ending in 
|&a, 7Toi>?jU.a from Ttsirolyjy.oa, 
ft,?), fiv^y from (j,£^vr)^a,i, 
/xo^, vJ/aAao; from styatyou, 
y,wv, u,vyu,ujv from ju^av^acu ; » 

Second Person, distinguished by 2, and ending in 
cm, fly cna from ii%v<rou t 
fiS> *>&$ from XsKsfai, 
trio;, Qa,vpd<rio$ from rsQavfLafcu, 

Third Person, distinguished by T, and ending in 
*»*>?£» rryj, Sor^, irotrjrris, 

Tost twos, aWfyro;, xkovcttmos, 

T^ct, 7*^0 v, jW/CXHr^a, >taro7rr^oy, 

rewf, xQ<r[j*y}Titig t 

rsos, tea, T£0v, y^a7rrso;, y^anttket, ygxtfTeoY* 

Perfect Middle, terminating in a, a?, euj, >}, yc t i$ t o$ 9 as f 9oga from 
stpQoga,, yoy,d$ from vsvopai, tfjtmevg from reroxa, rgotprj from rstgofa, 
rvirys from rsTvita,, |8oAV from jSgpoAa, ro/xof from riro/^a, &c. 



114 

Adverbs". 1 

Those, which require particular notice, as distin- 
guished from the Latin, are the following; signifying 

In a place, ending in Qa, $/, yy, you, and o* ; as 
hroLoQa, here ; oupava^t, in Heave?i ; 7ravTaxfj and wav- 
Ta^oS, in every place ; irslcii, on the ground. 

Motion from a place, in fls and Qsv 9 as oupavaSs and 
oupavoQzv, from Heaven. 

Motion to a place, in &*, £g, as, as ovpavoitfe and 
Mpavoa-e, to Heaven ; %a[x6i%s, to the ground. 

Adverbial Particles, used only in Composition: 

Privation, from aveu, without? as uvudpo$, 
without water. 

. Increase, from uyoiv, much, as Gt£v\o$, 
a or olv, signifying \ , _ ' 

much wooded. 

Union, from upct, together, as ako^os, a 
consort. 

The following signify increase : 



apt, from apw, to furnish. 
pov, from /3oD$, aw ox. 
Ppi, from jfy i0u$, strong. 
8a, from Saary£, thick. 



epi, from egw, to connect. 
Ka, JEolic for hoc. 
Xa, from Xlav, much. 
\i, the same. 



The Undeclinable Parts of Speech are comprised under the 
general name of Particles. 

Av before a Consonant drops the v, as dddvtxfos, immortal. 
Thus the English Article an, derived from the German ein, drops the 
n before a Consonant, as an arm, a man. 



115 

Jog signifies difficulty, as hmtoitfltb', t0 be unhappy. x 
Ne and vtj signify privation, like the Latin ne, as vrfisrjfr 
without pity. 

Metrical Synopsis of Inseparable Particles. 

'Jp\ spi, fiov, U, &, A«, At, (Bgi, composita augent. 
Jv$, diff. ve, et »j ; priv. « privat, coltigit, auget. 



Prepositions. 



Six are Monosyllables : s\$, lx or £§, h, Tpo, 7rpb$, a-6v. 

Twelve Dissyllables : dc/jUp}, ava^ avr), <x7ro, &a, S7n, 
xaTa, /xsTa, 7ra^a, 7rsf*, U7rsp, 6x0. 

In composition, five of these increase the significa- 
tion : sl$, ex or s£, cuv, 7T£f *, uwep. 

Six sometimes increase, and sometimes change : avr/, 
a7ro, o^a, xaTa, vapa, irpi$. 

One diminishes : bni. 

One changes : [astol. / 



1 So in Ovid ; Dy.spari, Unhappy Paris! 

a Of the Prepositions the three first are Atonies, without an 
accent, the rest are O*ytons. 



116 

Metrical Synopsis of the Government of Prepositions : 

'Avr , am, Ix, %pb t Genit. slc 9 av*, Ace. <ruv, h que Dative*. 
Ai, virsg, Ace. Genitiv. xara xcti perot. insuper addunt. 
y A^\ W, uirb 9 TTotpoi, 7rgb$ 9 mp), tres sumunt sibi casus. 
Poetas juuguM ayoi, xcti kcitm, not) psToi. Dandi. 



Conjunctions 

are exhibited with the Moods, to which they are joined, 
in the SYNTAX. 



117 



SYNTAX." 



The Nominative and the Verb. 

A Neuter Plural is generally joined with a Verb 
Singular; as, 

"Opsoc rpspe, Homer, Mountains trembled* 



1 The rules of construction, which are common to the Greek and 
Latin languages, are here omitted ; but some of the anomalies are 
noticed, which the latter has imitated from the former. 

* As a Noun of multitude Singular may be followed by a Verb 
Plural, a Neuter Plural is often taken in a collective sense, and fol- 
lowed by a Verb Singular. Thus when Homer says fouga vkvrptz, 
he means the collection of planks and timber, with which the ships 
were constructed. " ' 

The Plural Noun is sometimes Masculine or Feminine, but it is 
used in a collective sense ; as d^slrai optpal pz\£wv, Pindar; Ssfioxrfy 
r\v}[j,ov£s Qvyoci, Euripides. 

In the Doric and Ionic Dialects the Singular or Plural Verb 
followed the Neuter Plural Nominative; the Attic restricted the 
Verb to the Singular, except in some instances, of which animals are 
the subject. 

This construction is not confined to the Greek language. It is 
frequent in the Hebrew: see Exodus xxi. 4. Job xii. 7. Isaiah iu 
11. Psalm Ixxiii. 7. &c. In French this mode is common in every 



118 

A Dual Nominative is sometimes joined with a Verb 
Plural ; as, 

"ApQoo Xsyovo-i, Herodotus, Both say. 1 

The Substantive and the Adjective. ■ 

An Adjective of the Masculine Gender is sometimes 
found with a Feminine Substantive ; as, 

Too yvvuixe, Xenophon^ The two women. 7. 



Gender in an Impersonal form : II est des homm.es, il est des femmes. 
But the Verb in that ease precedes the Nominative, il vient de 
sonner dix Jkeures ; if the Nominative precedes, it has a Verb Plural, 
dix keures viennent de sonner. 

1 In the same manner a Dual Substantive, as it signifies more than 
one, may have an Adjective Plural; but the Verb or Adjective can 
seldom be of the Dual number, when the Noun implies more than 
two. 

3 This Attic construction is used in order to generalise the sense, 
as ®so$ and Deus are applied to both sexes for a divine, oivQgwiros 
and homo for a human person. Thus ducente Deo in Virgil refers 
to Venus, and caVijv rrjy ©sov in Herodotus to Minerva. Perhaps 
also this form is adopted to dignify the female sex. On this princi- 
ple, when a woman speaks of herself in the Plural Number, a mode 
of speech adopted by the great, she uses the Masculine Gender; as 
ol TrcoQvr f <TKOv7E$, Eufip. spoken by Alcestis of herself; xrsvovpev, 
owre'f s'£s<pvcroiu.£v 3 by Medea ; itoc^ovtec, yjtjux.grr}x6TE'$ 9 Sophocles, by 
Antigone. This mode is confined to the Dual and Plural. The 
Masculine Article is joined with a Feminine Noun in the Dual only. 

Compound and Derivative Adjectives in o$ are considered by the 



119 

A Substantive is sometimes used as an Adjective ; 
as, 

r\w(r<Tctv 'EXXctla. £>'&*%=, Her. He taught the Greek lan- 
guage. 1 

The Substantive is often changed into a Genitive 
Plura^ preceded by an Article ; as, 

01 ayuk) tcov uvlpxv, Isocratts, Honorable men. 11 

The Genitive of Personal is used instead of the Pos- 
sessive Pronouns ; as, 

Tyv wtbqu pov ti^us, Xen. Yvu honor my mother.^ 



Attic writers as of two terminations, consequently used as Feminine 
as well as Masculine. See page 19. 

When the Adjective is put in the Neuter after a different Gender, 
yjfi\^OL is understood, as oo^ov y dxtfsia., Soph. Thus triste lupus 
stabulis, Virg. The ellipsis is sometimes supplied, as ri ympa. 
fyd,<rei£; Soph. 

1 So Jicus anus, Pliny, An old Jig-tree. This combination is 
common in English ; thus sea water, gold watch, house dog. 'EAAa^ 
may be considered as an Adjective used as a Substantive, as itarfc 
and patria. 

So nigra lanarum nullum colorem bibunt, Plin. By this con- 
struction Eminence is expressed in Hebrew, as Prov. xxi. 20. Isaiah 
xxviii. 8. 

v, 3 The Greek orators generally use the Pronouns Possessive with 
the Article, as Tr\v opwow tyv vpsrsgay ol tfoAAo* y,i<rov<ri, Isoc. 



120 

The Relative and the Article.' 

The Relative often agrees with its Antecedent in case, 
by attraction ; as, 

'Ev roti$ eopToiis, ul$ rjyopev, Aristophanes, In the festivals, 
which we celebrated. 1. 

The Article is poetically used for the Relative; as, 

Haryp, o <r erpsQs, Horn. Your father, who educated you? 

The Article, when it differs from the English, is 

found in a general, or indefinite sense, and even before 

proper names ; as, 

fyv slprjvvjv noifurbui, Demosthenes, To make peace.* 



* As the Relative and the Article have the same origin, as they are 
frequently used the one for the other, and the Feminine in both is dis- 
tinguished only by the Accent, they are joined under one head. 

* This is called attraction, as the antecedent attracts the Relative 
into its case. This Attic form has been imitated in Latin : Si quid 
agas eorum, quorum consuesti f Cicero. 

The Relative, in this construction, sometimes precedes the Sub- 
stantive; as <ruv r, e^sis Suvdpsi, Xen. 

3 The Article is often put for ovro$ and ixstvos, as o ya§ /SaciA^i' 
^oXw9eif, Horn. In this sense o or o may be considered as the No- 
minative of the Pronoun Personal ov. The Relative also sometimes 
bears the same signification, as y S" 6V> Plato, And he said. 

4 Similar to this is the French idiom la paix. Even in these 
instances a particular emphasis is often implied : thus rj e»j$4 may 
signify the peace desired ; o ^tan^njs, the great philosopher. In 
Italian 77 Tasso, and in French le Tasse, express the Poet Tasso. 
Thus in Hollinshed and Shakespeare, The Douglas. 



121 

*E$vi o SooxguTvis, Xen. Socrates said.' 

It is frequently joined to a Participle } as, 

*0 QuXtzTToov, Her. The guarding, i. e. he, who guards. 7. 

The Article in the Neuter Gender, before a Genitive, 
signifies elliptically possession or relation ; as, 

'O 6so; Ta TM uvfyairctiv howsl, lsoc. Godf directs the affairs 
of men. 3 

1 Xenophon frequently omits the Article, gLMkei Scyxfari^, Memor. 
but never when £<^ or gltfs follows. 

a The Article is sometimes dropped by the Poets, and the Parti- 
ciple is used alone, aseygwv, Pind. the inventor; dp'JJvtE;, Theocritus, 
the reapers. Thus in Horace spectans, the spectator; mugientes ? 
the oxen. 

*" Sometimes the ellipsis is supplied, as td tcuv Ot^olIojv it^dyi^oLra, 

In some cases the relation between the Article and the Noun 
following is so close, that the distinction of the property and 
the thing itself is scarcely perceptible, as rci tys tv%7}s o^eIolsb'/ei 
td$ p£ta(3o>,d$ Dem. Fortune has sudden revolutions. Thus to eilov, 
rdspd, are sometimes equivalent to syov, &c. 

The Plural Article, followed by diAip) and its^i with a proper name, 
signifies attendants, or the party, as of dtxo\ Ilf /ajxov, Horn, meaning 
the attendants of Priam ; eiretlQevto tup IcoKgdtEi o\ «Vp* tov"Kvvtov 9 
iElian, meaning the party of Anytus. Here is evidently a distinction 
of persons, and Priam and Anytus alone cannot be implied. This is 
found in Latin : Qui circa ilium erant, Ter. Qui sunt a Platone, Cic. 

The Article has a peculiar construction in this elliptical form before 
an Accusative and an Infinitive Mood ; as to x a h £lv ro ^ ju^^acr* 
itdvtag, o-vptpvtov to7s dvfywifoig sort), Arist. This circumstance, that 
all should delight in imitations, is natural to men. This form is 
common in the Scriptures ; as sv rp slvou avrov, St. Luke; i. e. sv t<p 
%?ov&», or itody^xti, in the time, or circumstance, that he was.; or 
simply, while he was. 

Q 



The Genitive.' 

The matter, of which a thing is made, is put in the 
Genitive ; as, 

Tov 8/ppov IjroiVfiv Icr%uf wv £u*»v, Xen. jfe built the chariot 
of strong wood. 7. 

Cost or value, crime or punishment, difference or 
eminence, are put in the Genitive ; as, 

A05 auTov fan §§*XMh Anacreon, Give him to us for nine 
pence. 3 

rgx<p6(xxt as (X6txzloi$ 9 Lysias, / accuse you of adultery? 
Jiot<pipoov rwv aXXoov, Plato, Different from the others, 
Xu$px navTCDV snagm, Pindar, A joy surpassing all. 

Part of time is put in the Genitive; as, 
6spov$ re xu) ^eijowovoj, Xen. In summer and winter. 5 

1 The primary signification of the Genitive is the origin, or cause, 
from which a thing proceeds, or possession. To these may be traced 
most of the uses, to which that case is applied. But in construction, 
it must depend either on a Substantive, or a Preposition, expressed or 
understood. 

a This Genitive is governed by in and dirb, sometimes expressed, as 

tstvypsvoc gj d8dy,a.vTo$, Theocr. ditb %u\ujv itaiTOir^va., Hesiod. 

3 This is governed by dvr), as dxxdrteartiou fin rgo<pa$ dvr) vopiar- 
(iotro$, Arist. Sometimes the Dative is used; irfavfai flour), 
l.ucian. 

: + This is governed by itsfi, as Wko; <rs itsfi Qavdtw, Xen. These 
words are sometimes put in the Dative, fypwVavrof irevtyxovrx 
TocXdvrois, Her. - 

5 This is governed by sir), sometimes expressed, as hit ypsgys, Her. 
When the Dative is used, it is governed by iv understood, and some- 
times expressed : sv r£ avrtu Qegsi, Thucydides, 



123 

Exclamations of grief and surprise are put in the 
Genitive ; as, 

Tyc p-joplas, Aristoph. What folly l l 

Comparatives are followed by a Genitive ; as, 

'Jmpxlas psifyv ovx eon x«xov, Sophocles, There is no greater 
evil than anarchy.' 1 

Verbs signifying the senses, or the passions, are fol- 
lowed by a Genitive ; as, 

Ta>v paqTvptov oixv}x6otTe, Isoc. You have heard the witnesses. 3 



1 Olpot is often prefixed, as olpoi row n&xwv, Aristoph. i. e. mxa. 

* This Genitive is governed by dvr) or if ^6. Than after a Com- 
parative is often expressed by rj, as ri yevotr dv skx.o$ psitpv, vj <piXo; 
7tzK0$, Soph. 

The Comparative pdWov is sometimes understood, as xaXov ro 
pr} Zyv io-Tiv, y Z,f,v ottxhof, Menander. 

Perhaps the Genitive after the Comparative may be considered as 
the Case Absolute : thus dvoL^yiag (oyVij; und.) anarchy existing, 
there is no greater evil. 

Perhaps too* yj after a Comparative may be considered as the 
Subjunctive of iuu. On that principle, the resolution of the two 
last examples will be: let there be, or if there be a bad friend 9 what 
can be a greater sore ? If it be necessary to live miserably, not to 
live is desirable. 

3 Many of these are frequently found with an Accusative. Those 
of seeing always, as og>w rlv xougov, Isoc. 

'Axou'o;, signifying to hear oneself called, or simply to be called, 
has the construction of Verbs of existence, as our ccKOvo-oujoa kxxo$, 
Soph. It is often used with the Adverbs eu, xaxw;, and xa,Xcu$, and 
followed by uVo or tta^oL with a Genitive, as xaxcwV dxoveiv vtfo rwv 
KOAirujy, Isoc. Thus Cicero, Est hominis ingenui velle bene audire ab 
omnibus. So Milton, Or hearst thou rather 'pure ethcrial stream. 



124 

Tl$ ovk oiv iiyourenTO t% up erfe ; Bern. Who would not admire 
virtue T 

To spav tmv <ro)$po'vctiv, JEschines, To love the modest* 



A Noun and Participle are put absolute in the Geni- 
tive 5 as, 



HXiov reXkwros, Soph. The sun rising. 5 



Thus Virgil, Justitixnc priihs mirer, belline tabor urn? 

To these may be added Verbs signifying to abstain, to ask, to 
attain, to begin, to care, to cease, to command, to conquer, to despise, 
to differ, to endeavour, to Jill, to neglect, to remember, to restrain, to 
separate, to share, to spare ; and in general those, which imply of or 
from, and may be followed by he and dvrl. But many of these are 
found with other cases. 

The Latin language has imitated this construction : thus Daunus 
agrestium regnavit popular um, Horace; Tempus desistere pugna?, 
Virg. &c. 

3 This construction may in general be considered as expressing 
thccaK.se of the event, which is the subject of the sentence. Thus 
in the sentence, Libcrtate oppressd, nihil est quod speremus, Cic. 
What is the cause of that state of desperation ? The destruction of 
liberty. In nil desperandum Teucro duce, Hor. What is the cause 
of that confidence ? The direction of Teucer. This is by some 
grammarians, but improperly, called the case of consequence. It is 
governed by ix, hit or oVo understood, and sometimes expressed, 
wiffoLvrwv uV 'A^aicuv, Horn. Thus Ovid, Nulfo sub indice. 

From this solution it will follow that the case absolute will vary 
according to the nature of the Prepositions, which govern it. Hence 
we find the Dative and Accusative in that sense ; as Ait cog fegiiixe- 
gctvvcv ^(/jo[j,sviv, Horn, evidently governed by Cito. The Attics 
often use the Accusative governed by a Preposition understood, as 



125 

The Genitive is often governed by a Substantive or a 
Preposition understood ; as, 

Iliiiv vIoltoc, Her. (pspos und.) To drink some water. 1 

Muxacjios 7% rvx r >$> -Aristoph. (svexx und.) Happy by his 

fortune. 7 ' 



rem el (pctvsvr aetotra,, Soph. ivrctvOx or} ?$d ovta, (ficovgia, Xen. 
Thus the three cases, with which prepositions are joined, may be 
used absolutely ; in some writers they are used promiscuously, evert 
in the same sentence. 

To the Accusative must be referred most of those instances, which 
are said to be in the Nominative, as Ssov, £%ov, rfagoy, &c. Those, 
which are really in the Nominative, may be construed upon common 
principles; such as that in Horn. II. I. 171, where i&v refers to the 
Nominative of the Verb o/a\ In other instances, a Verb must be 
understood ; but that anomaly is very infrequent in good writers, 
though in use- among the modern Greeks, as [u&svovrcts sycu oLitl ryv 
£xx\r t (rlav , siTetfsv y crsyy) rov o-rfiTiov cov, As I was coming out of 
the church, the roof of your house fell. And yet some instances 
are found in Latin : Ccterce philosophorum discipline — eas nihil 
adjuvare arbitror, Cic. 

Nam nos omnes, quibus est alicundc aliquis objectus labos, 
Omne quad est interca tempus priusquam id rescitum est, lucro 
est, Ter. 

1 Thus in French, boire de Veau, du vin, &c. 

* Thus in. Latin, Fortunatus laborwn, Virg. Lassus maris tt 
liarum, Ilor. Sunt lacrymce rerum, Virg. 

The Genitive of Substantives is often used for an Adjective, in the 
New Testament and in the Septuagint, in imitation of the Hebrew 
idiom; thus avQgwieos rfs auct^ioLc, the man of sin, for the sinful 
man. This mode has been lately adopted in the English language. 



126 



Dative.' 

The instrument and manner of an action are put in 
the Dative ; a as, 

'Apyvgsa^ Xoyxouri fxx^oo, xca ttocvtu xpatT^trets, Oracle to 
Philip, Fight with silver weapons, and you will conquer the 
world. 

"HXqlos %l$$i xou exs^vs lohcp, Horn. He struck him with a 
sword, and killed him by stratagem. 3 

Verbs signifying to accompany ox follow, to blame, to 
converse, to pray, to use, are followed by a Dative ; as, 
T& vfjs$ ejTQvro, Horn. Him ships followed. 

IIi<rTobs yyov Tolg rot$ dpxpruvopzvots hcn^vniac, Plutarch, 
Think those faithful, who reprove your faults. 

XoQois ofiftuov, xotuTos hxpya-si <ro(pog, Menander, Associating 
with the wise, you yourself will become wise. 

* — i « ■- 1 

* Tliis case is generally used as the Dative in Latin. It expresses 
the object, to which the action is directed, or for which it is intended. 
It implies acquisition and loss. It is placed after sip, &c. in the 
sense of habeo, and after words signifying likeness, agreement, trust, 
resistance, relation, &c. It follows verbs compounded with dvr), &v, 
iis\ Ttatgab, rfgos, <rvv, oVo. 'It is frequently governed by eV, iir), <rvv, 
or some other Preposition, understood. 

a This case in these instances may be called the Ablative ; and the 
analogy with the Latin will be preserved. 

3 Instead of the Dative, the Prepositions Sid, iv, sir), xocrd are 
sometimes used with their proper cases, as sira,lcE<rQau sV< tfAoyrx, 
Xen. kv /3s Ab irkrp/sts, Eurip. 

To this rule may be referred the excess or deficiency of measure* 
as dvQguntwv txaxgcv a§i<rro$ x Her» 



127 

Evxeo-Qoti Ait, Hesiod, To pray to God. x 

Neuter Adjectives in rov and tsov govern the Person 
in the Dative, and the Thing in the Case of the Verb ? 
from which they are derived ; as, 

Tt uv uvtco womjtIov s »>) ; Xen. What must he do? 

*T[uv tuvtcl irqdKTBoVj Dem. You must do these things, 2 

f O auras, the same, is followed by a Dative ; as, 

T% uvtyiS ela) ^[xlotg £%ioi ol <Tvyxg67TT0VTeg rolg sj;ct[ACtf>Tocvov<n, 
Jsoc. Those who conceal, are deserving of the same punishment 
as those who commit, a fault.* 



1 Asoy.oct requires a Genitive of the Person, as Ssr^o^xi V[i,wv 9 
lEsch. 

a Many Verbs have a Dative of the person, and a Genitive of tho 

thing, as d^icr^ruj, xoiywvsw, ^sra^i^wjai, /xsTsp^a/, cvyyivoia-y. f ju p 
(pQovui ; and the Impersonate hi, u.kXet, psrcctjJtei, psrstrn, Trgovrjxsi ; 
as wv iyto croi ou <pfovijcto t Xen. <ro) tfaiSoov ri &7, Eurip. But this 
Gen. will easily be referred to the government of a Preposition or a 
Noun. 

3 These Adjectives imply necessity, and have the force of the 
Latin Gerund. The whole construction has been imitated in Latin: 
Quam viam nobis quoque ingrediendum sit, Cic. Mternas quoniam 
panas in morte timendum, Lucretius. 

They sometimes agree with the Substantives, as svfrjsos voi$, Soph. 
TTEfiovrirj £<tt\v tj 'EM«;» Her. 

4 ^uv is here understood. Thus in Latin, Idem facit occidenti, 
Hor. Et nunc ille eadem nobis juratus in arma, Ovid. 



128 

Accusative/ 

The Accusative is of universal use, with kolto\ under- 
stood; 4 as, 

Jsivb; potx Y i v > -'Eschylus, Terrible in fight. 

TlcipHo to (is* (Toilet eiv&i <&iXQTrovo$, rrjv &e $/v%y)V <$i>J<ro$og, Tsoc. 
Endeavour to be in body fond of labor, and in mind a lover of 
wisdom? 

Verbs signifying to do or speak "well or ill, to give or 
take away, to admonish, to clothe, govern an Accusa- 
tive of the Person^ and another of the Thing ; 4 as, 

UoXXoL kyo&oL tyjv -xokiv stqI^os, Isoo. He conferred many ser- 
vices on the city? 

1 The Accusative expresses the object of the action. It is, there- 
fore, as in Latin, governed either by a Verb Active, or by a Prepo- 
sition expressed or understood. 

As in Latin, Verbs of entreating, concealing and teaching govern 
two Ace. Verbs Neuter also often assume an Active signification ; 
and both are followed by an Ace. of their own signification. 

The Accusative seems to be the favorite Case of the Attics, who 
frequently use it for the Genitive and the Dative. 

* Or ha,, £<£, 7rs£i, if§o$. Kara is the most general, as it embraces 
the parts, qualities and relations; <3ia is applied to the cause ; *i$, 
#£f j, and tfo; to motion. They are sometimes expressed, as $$ y,cltqL 
ewu.a, kc&ao;, y.ard vovv S" au |crr)y au,og<po$ t Epigr. 

3 This construction is frequent in Latin poetry : Crinem soluta, 
Virg. Humeros amictus, Hor. 

4 One of these Accusatives is governed by Kara understood. 

s To the Accusative of the thing are frequently substituted the 
Adverbs ev, Y.aXwg, y.axu>$ ; as ita^ovras ph tqvs <pl\o'j$ $s! sv rto&r- 
tsiv, dtfovra; os evhoy&tr, Epict. Mrj fyx tovg rE&ngxstttf xtxxws. Soph* 



129 

EUpyourpou xuxoi tov olxov, Thucydides, I have done evil to 
the house. 

*Airo<rrepei fts t« xpypciTu, Isoc. He deprives me of my pro* 
perty. 

Tuvtu as i>7ropifji.vY)<rxu), Thuc. I remind you of these things. 

FaPmtu ( as kgSfoTotv, Horn. They stripped me of my clothes. 1 

Distance and space are put in the Accusative ; as, 

*E$eo , o$ uTtkyja with Scugbevov rgiwv ypspcov 6$bv, Xen. Ephesus 
is distant from Sardis three days 9 journey. 

VERBS PASSIVE. 

Verbs of a Passive signification are followed by a 
Genitive governed by wo, dwro, ex, Trapa, or 7rpo$ ;* as, 

l O vovg vito o'lvou Siot<p$e!psTcti, Isoc. The understanding is im- 
paired by wine. • 

TeQvYixev u$' vtxwv, Xen. He was killed by you. 3 



The Verb alone, implying treatment, may have the same construction, 
as Zsv$ /xs tol'jt eSgaffsv, Aristoph. 

1 Verbs of adjuring and swearing are also found with two Accu- 
satives, as of>ci£u; as ovgavov, Orpheus. Thus in Latin, Hacc eadem 
Terram, Mare, Siderajuro, Virg. 

A change of Voice implies a change in the Case of the Person ; 
but the Case of the Thing is preserved ; as m£?£ tfXeivra. svegysrov- 
j/,£0a, Xen. (joipanov sy.$vo[iEvos, Dem. Thus in Latin, Induitur 
faciem cultumque Diana?, Ovid. Inscripti nomina regum, Virg. 

a The Preposition is often understood ; as ^Vracrflaj rwv wfflpjfffr, 
Isoc. 

3 Thus in Latin, Torqueor infesto ne vir ah hoste cadat, Ovid. 
Nihil valentius d quo inter eat, Cic. 

Some Verbs, which in the Active are followed by the Genitive 

R 



130 



INFINITIVE. 



The Infinitive Mood is used to express the cause or 
end of an action ; as, 

Tig (Tfpws %vv£Yi*e ^u^sa-Qoti ; Horn. Who induced them to 
fights 

The Pronoun Accusative, before the Infinitive, is 
frequently omitted ; as, 

"EQy) Ojtsiv (koivTov und.) Plato, He said that he was 
inquiring? 

The Infinitive is often preceded or followed by a 
Nominative; as, 

Arist. Sophocles said that he made men such as they ought to 
be ; Euripides, such as they are. 



or Dative of the person, and the Accusative of the thing, are pre- 
ceded in the Passive by the Nominative of the person ; as ol twv 
'AQyvalwv iirt-rsrooc^iyoi <pv\oc>tyjv, Thuc. They who were intrusted 
with the defence of the Athenians, or they to whom the defence of the 
Athenians was intrusted. 

1 Similar to this is the English idiom. The Latin uses ut or quo 
with a Subjunctive. Sometimes in Poetry it admits the Greek con- 
struction, as, Dederatque comas diffundere ventis, Virg. 

a Thus in Latin, Sed redder e posse negabat (se und.) Virg. The 
Infinitive Mood and the preceding Verb, generally, but not always, 
relate to the same person ; sitis crov Xccfiopevog s\$ ro- 8e<ry,wTrjgiov 
srfayoi, <p&<ntwv dSw&iv (<re und.) Plato. Ros abiisse rati, (eos vm$.} 
Virg. 



131 

v E$Yi<rs <pt\o$ slvai, Plutarch, He said that he was a friend.* 

Instead of the Infinitive preceded by the Accusative, 
the Indicative preceded by or* or cog 2 is commonly 
used; as, 

i~Vw0< on syco aArjSrj \syoo, Xen. Know that I speak truth. 

' Thus in Latin, Rettulit Ajax esse Jovis pronepos, Ovid. 

2 'Or* and u;; are really Pronouns : the former the Neuter of 
ftrris, yjrig ; the latter the same as 05, in an adverbial form. This 
will clearly explain the construction : yvwQi on, know that ; iyw 
aXrfiyj Xeyoj, I speak truth. Aiyui voc, I say that or thus : ixslvos ov 
Tfo\£<j,s7, he does not make war. So, And they told him that Jesus 
jpasseth by, Luke 18. It is not necessary that n$ should be always 
joined with o$. We find in Homer, riyyo5<nt'jov o ol avrog uTftlgeys 
y/iocLS 'AtfoAAwv ; that is, TtyvJorxuv o, Knowing this ; Apollo 
stretched his handover him. 

"On is sometimes used at the end of a sentence in a manner, which 
strongly elucidates this explanation : aAA' ooVc ditoSuxrets, oW on, 
Aristoph. But you will not restore it, I know that. 

Sometimes 8n is added to strengthen the force of another Pronoun, 
a practice common to the best Greek and Latin writers : aAA' oh 
syujy ov tfavGQfi&t, four 7cr9' on, Aristoph. Hoc ipsum scias. 

The Greeks in narrations frequently use the Present tense, when 
on introduces the words of the person, who is the subject of the 
narrative. But the Latins, in the idiom of the Accusative and Infi- 
nitive, place the Verb in the Perfect tense. 

v On sometimes signifies that, or to the end that. In this sense 
the Latin ut), generally shortened into ut t is the same word. Here 
it is still the Pronoun, and the full expression is Six on, for that, 
for this. The two words often coalesce, and become hon. Thus 



132 

Aeyco a>$ exsivo; ou noXspii, Dem. I s'ay that he does not make 
war.* 

The Infinitive is used with or without a Preposition, 
in the sense of the Latin Gerunds and Supines; as, 
'jE7n<7Ta/xsvo£ woXejx/?siv, Horn. Skilled in the art of war* 
'Jpv to jw,a5s7i/, Soph. In learning.* 

'Ikxvos sIttsIv ku\ irpoL%eu, Lysias, Qualified to speak and t& 
act.* 



Shakespeare, For that I am some twelve or fourteen moonshines log 
of a brother. 

Sometimes on signifies elliptically what is the reason why — ; as, 
bItioi on rd<r<rov iyjJovoLtb $o7/3o£ 'AiroWtuv, Horn. Here the full 
expression is eiitoi n evnv alnov on — let him say what is the reason 
for this, Phoebus is so enraged ; or fax on. 

It is likewise frequently used for because, and is there too governed 
by ota, for this reason. 

These observations will easily suggest an analogical solution of the 
origin and use of the word in other languages. 

1 This construction has seldom been imitated in Latin, But on 
has been rendered by quod, quia, and even quoniam in the Vulgate, 
a translation, which disgusted the classical reader, and which was 
succeeded by the more elegant versions of Beza and of Castalio. 
Yet we find some instances of that use of qiwd. Equidem scio jam 
Jilius quod amet meus, Tcr. Irocmoneo, nunquam scripta quod 
ilia legat, Ovid. 

* So in Latin, Et jam tempus equum fumantia solvere colla, Virg. 
for sohendi. 

3 Cantarc pares, Virg. for cantando. 

4 At rubus et sentes, tantummodo lasdcre natce, Ovid, for ad 
Ictdendum. 



133 

TIittoo; 7rljxrei hitnionfiv, Xen. He sends trusty men to exa- 
mine. 1 

KuXkHrra. losiv, Xen. Most beautiful to behold? 

The Infinitive of the Present, Future, and Aorists, 
preceded by the Verb pix^co, expresses the Future ; as, 

Mehkcjo rsdyavxi, Plato, i" am to die. 3 

The Infinitive of some Verbs is preceded by e%a), in 
the sense of Svvctrxau ; as, 

Mifih sx 0V(7iV 6»9rs*y, Dem. They have nothing to say? 

The Infinitive is often governed by another Verb in 
an Imperative sense, understood ; as, 

My} t; <iuy StQuvuTOKTi iiocyjctiou, Horn, (o^o, beware, und.) 
Nor contend thou with the immortals. 5 

The Infinitive is sometimes put absolutely, without 
another Verb expressed ; as, 

\G$ awX&g slnfiVy Dem. To speak plainly. 
JoxsTv spa), Soph. As it appears to me. 6 
Mixpou h~tv 9 Isoc. Nearly. 7 

1 Semper in Oceanum mittit me qucerere gemmas, Prop, for ' qucesitum. 

2 Niveus videri, Hot. for visit. 

3 More congenial is the French idiom, je dois mourir. It exactly 
expresses a sense of /xeAAo;, which refers to probability, and is applied 
to any time, as 7a peAte?* aMvi^sv, Horn. Vous devez V avoir entendu. 

4 Thus, De Diis neque ut sint, ncque ut non shit, habeo dicere, Cic. 

5 Thus in Italian, non dir nicnte f take care to -say nothing. 

6 That is, xccrcc to 8oxe~v e'ao), secundum meam sentcntiam. 

7 The Infinitive is sometimes understood, as far/ov tfUftSibfc 
Lysias, {hh und.) vvyshovTh Dem. (fgdrat und.) 



134 



Participle. 

The Participle is often elegantly preceded by the 
Verbs sip), yivofjLOii, U7rap%a), e^(p, xupaj;* as, 

Xugtg x<xpiv lo-nv f) tIktov<t aei, Soph. A kindness always 
produces a kindness. 7, 

Oux exfyos VTTYipxsv wv, Dem. He was not an enemy. 
Tov Xoyov <rov Qtzuy.a<ra$ e^, Plato, J have admired your 
speech? 

• With a Participle ruy^aua) signifies by chance ; Xav- 
6(ivco, privately or ignorantly ; (pSava), previously ; as, 
*E$y} Tvxeiv \'2v, Her. He said that he chanced to be. 

'£Aa0o 4 aev fouQepovrss, Plato, We were not aware that we 
differed? 



1 The Participle is sometimes used alone, siuu being understood, 
as pApuw 7id%v) fidiXsv, yr ev) r.vjitoj fipQopsvy), {&&t\ und.) Horn. A 
poppy bends the head, which in a garden is weighed down. This ellip- 
sis is found in Latin, not only in the Poets, but in the Historians, 
particularly in Tacitus. To this construction' may be generally 
referred what is called the Nominative absolute. Thus <pv\ct% ixiy- 
yjav (pvt&Tta, Soph. (r t v und.) Guard was blaming guard. <rwQe)s §s, 
tfcci8oc$ e% sprj$ opoffitogov Ktqot&psns, (si und.) Eurip. 

a Thus in Latin, Quos videas esse bibentes, Plaut. Est laquens. 
Socrates, Cic. • 

3 This is imitated in the Latin Participle Passive, Neque ea res 
folsum me habuit, Curtius. Similar to this are the French and 
English idioms. 

* Thus in Latin, Nee vixit matt, qui natus moriensque fifellit, 
Hor. 



133 

«£5avw tovc $l\ov$ evspyeriav, Xen. I anticipate my friends in 
conferring benefits. 

The Participle is used after orfAoc, Qavspog, a^avrjg, 
&c. as, 

^uro? roi/ro koimv Qavsgoc yjv, Arist. J7e manifestly did this. 

The Participle is used instead of the Infinitive, after 
Verbs signifying to persevere, to desist, to perceive, or 
an affection of the mind; as, 

Ttjv eigijvijv ayovTEs footre\ouTiv 9 Isoc. They continue preserving 
peace. 1 

6 sou ou \rfeo) irpoo-TotTrp e%a>v, Soph. I shall not cease having 
God for my defender. 

*J<rh atyyfjLsvvi, Aristoph. Know that thou art come. 

Mefivtp *vfy(oiro$ »v, Simonides, Remember that you are a 
man. 

'O Ssoc noMxxig ystlpii robg /xev [uxgowg peyuhovg ttqimv, rovg ds 
jj.sya.kovc [xixpovc, Xen. God is often delighted in making the 
little great j and the great little? 



1 The English idiom is perfectly similar. Some instances occur 
in Latin, Scit peritura rat is, Statius. Sensit medios delapsus in 
hostes, Virg. 

S&wAs is found with various cases : giWfla ev,a.'j?£ <ro<po$ ccv, 
Plato. spawnS ^vvjhiv ovosv iitio-ray.evaj, Plato. 

This last expression must be referred to the force of attraction, 
which is particularly exerted on Participles. Attraction is indeed 
of universal influence in Greek construction. It seems as if, on many 
occasions, of two words relating to each other, but in different con- 
structions, the Greeks wished one only to be in a particular case, 
and the other to be attracted by it in the same case. 

A few additional instances will be here given. Ovfev) tutor ovT 



136 



Adverbs 

are followed by the Genitive, Dative, or Accusative ; ' 
either because they are originally Nouns, or because 
those cases are governed by a Preposition understood. 

Examples of the former : 

ITArJv, rejection, ttAvjv epov, JEschyl. Excepting me? 

Xupw, for the sake, %ag<v e, EKTopoc y Horn. For the sake of 
Hector, 



aur^couc ovo a>t\e'£$ <xTt'c$i\, rov$ iKsfag zXtrpoLvn, Isoc. It has never 
been disgraceful or inglorious in any one to pity the suppliant. 
sXsYjtravn is here attracted into the case of ovhvL ~£xoirovu,£vo$ 
sv^ktkqv oJ^aawV dv ccXXocg t'ovt'o faccirga^dyssvoc, Isoc. Having con- 
sidered, J found that I could by no means otherwise execute the busi- 
ness. Sia.tfgafcdjjiavos is attracted into the case of VKOrftvutSvos. OuVe 
■vvv ao( ^eroL^s/.si ovtpjg dz'o\oyy)(ra,yJ\?uj, Plato, I" do not now repent 
having thus defended myself; for dirokoyr^OL^bcct. Thus in Latin, 
Scd non sustineo esse conscius mihi dissimulanti, Fabius. 

A Noun between two Verbs is frequently attracted m\o the case of 
that Verb, to which it has less relation. Thus syvuuv GrjtACixoarlav, 
In ddvvard; eVriv irsguuy ci^siv, Thuc. for lyvwv on &jafl»parj#, 
<pgri(ra?E poi xov h(n:orr j v i oxou 'err;, Aristoph. for otfou 6 h(r7t6ry)$. 
Thus in Latin, Servum meum miror, vbi sit, Plaut. Hcec me, ut con- 
Jidam, faciunt, Cic. Istudfac me ut sciam, Ter. 

1 "l$s and ISpu behold, which are sometimes, like the Latin en and 
ecce, found with a Nominative, are really Verbs, and govern the 
Accusative ; as, iW pe, Eurip. 

a IIAijv sometimes assumes the nature of a Disjunctive, and is 
followed by every case, according to the government of the Verb, 
with which it is connected; as, ovbsv strnv aAAo ^a^aaxov, tfXrtV 
V/°£> Isoc. 9$ Upi$ ithrp rols \}<ct.hyficti<nv kiyziv, Aristoph. 



137 

Xcoo)c, separation, x M ?^ ™ v * v %gwv, Her. Without the men. 
Tov J40; evat7riov, Plut. I)i the sight of God. 

Examples of the latter : 

"Av=v ovofuzTcav, Plato, (xno und.) Without names. 

"A fia Xccm, Horn. (<ruv und.) With the people. 

Nui //,«' tqoz o-xr^Tpov, Horn. (I~» und.) I swear by this 

sceptre.' 2 ' 

Adverbs of time are sometimes changed into Adjec- 
tives ; as, 

Ov xprj 7rayvup£<ov su§=jv fiov\Yi<t>ogoy avlpci, Horn. A mail of 
counsel ought not to sleep the whole night? 

Adverbs of quality are elegantly joined with the Verbs 
£%(*)> 7roL<r%co, 7rotsco } <£>£pvo, <pfyu, %p<xop.ot,i } &c. as, 

'HUcoge^e 7r£c$ uttuvtois, Isoc. Be pleasant to all. 

El Trcca-^tv, eu 7roiiiv, Dem. To receive, to confer, benefits. 

Two or more Negatives strengthen the Negation ; as, 

Ovx scttiv ovZh, Eurip. There is nothing. 

QvUttqts ovUv 06 fxrj ysvrjroa t&v %=gvtoqv, Dem. Nothing that 
is necessary will ever be done. 4, > 



1 Ma generally denies, unless it is joined with vou ; vr t affirms, 
unless joined with a Negative. 

The Preposition is sometimes expressed : sk<z$ aV swufoSv, Her. 
P-XPf ^ epov, Horn. rfXs dito v/zllr t $, Horn, olpz <ruv olvtois, Plul. 

3 Thus in Latin, Nee minus JEneas se matutinus agebat, Virg. 
Nee vespertinus circumgemit ursus ovile, Hor. 

4 In Latin, two Negatives make an Affirmative ; yet the Greek 
idiom has been imitated : Neque tu hand dicas tibi non prcedictum, 
Ter. In Plautus this licence is frequent. 

s 



138 

Prepositions 
govern the Genitive, Dative, or Accusative. 1 



1 The principal relations of things to one another are expressed 
in Greek by three cases; origin and possession by the Genitive. 
acquisition and communication by the Dative, and action by the 
Accusative. The. other relations, of time and place, cause and effect, 
motion and "rest,, connexion and opposition, are expressed by Prepo- 
sitions. 

In the origin of language and of civilization Prepositions were 
few-; but when the progress of arts increased the relations of things, 
they became more numerous. In succeeding ages, when the extension 
of Mathematical, and the improvements in Philosophical, Science 
produced new combinations of language, and required a greater 
"precision of expression, the number of Prepositions was necessarily 
increased. 

But that great variety, which became expedient in modern times, 
has been applied to the Greek language, and produced some confu- 
sion and difficulty to the learner. Twenty different meanings have 
been assigned to a Greek Preposition: nor were those meanings 
marked with slight shades of difference : the same Preposition has 
been made to bear the most opposite senses : to and from, for and 
against, above and below. 

Some successful efforts have lately been made to clear these per- 
plexities. One primary, natural sense has been assigned to each 
Preposition : to that sense may be referred all the other significations, 
arising from analogical or figurative relations, easily flowing from it, 
and regulated by the case, to which the Preposition is prefixed. 
From the combinations of the Prepositions with the different cases 
arises that variety, which forms one of the beauties of the Greek 
language. But that variety is consistent. 

The meaning then of the Preposition adapts itself to the use of 
the Case. The primary and natural meaning of viro is under. The 
Accusative is used afterwords signifying motion; hence uVo "lAov 



139 

Genitive. 

"Avri, For. 

For : x«£<5 otvri %otptTo$, Eurip. Favor for favor. 

Instead of : sIcyjvyi «vt» noXzpov, Dem. Peace instead oj war. 

'Awq, From. 

From : mHjjxs soovtov utto tqv nvgyov, Her. He threw himself 

from the tower. 
i\fter: aitl too vkvov, Thuc. After sleep. 

/jXSe, Horn. He came under the waits of Troy. The Genitiv* 
implies influence or origin ; thus viro xavy,oLTo$, Hcs. Under the 
influence of heat. The Dative expresses the instrument or manner ; 
hence yjgvn v<£ yiA,e?e{)y)<riv avowee, Horn. Taken under, or by our 
hands. Before the Genitive and the Dative it confines itself to a 
state of rest. Thus simple and uniform are the uses, to which it is 
applied; yet Grammarians have not scrupled to give it the most 
discordant significations of under and upon, to and from, for and 
against, before and behind. 

Msrd signifies with. Prefixed to the Genitive and Dative it is 
confined to that meaning. When with an* Accusative it implies 
motion, it is succession of place or time, in close affinity or conjunc- 
tion with its object; thus per *% y<a fiouvs, Horn. He went close with 
her steps, i. e. after her steps. 

'Em, upon, with a Genitive, signifies situation upon; with a 
Dative, close upon ; with an Accusative, motion tending upon ; &c. 

In the Table and Synopsis of the Prepositions, the learner will 
easily and profitably trace the analogy of the different significations 
to the primitive meaning of each. The significations here given are 
few : but it is Jioped that they will solve the greatest number of the 
instances of that important part of Greek construction. 



140 

'Eg or sx, x Out of. 
Out of: Amy ex 2ct\ctfuvo$ ocysv vyuc, Horn. Jjax brought 

ships out of Sal aims. 
From : ex Quhourcys h Qakouro-ctv, Her. From sea to sea. 
After : ex rfc vav^ax^, Her. After the naval fight. 

1 llpo, Before. 
Before: irpo Qvgwv <pulver rjpv, Aristoph. He appeared to us 

^before ihe door. 
For : Trpo votrpifos omoQvv}<rxeiv, Her. To die for our country. 

Dative. 
y Ev, In. 
In : h ra> 0sw to reXo; l<rr», Dem. The end is in God. 

Xl>v, With. 
With : crvv 6e$, Her. With God. 

Accusative. 

Elg, or eg, Into. 
Into : el $ ciq-tv xciTcifiulveiv, Isoc. To descend into a city. 

Genitive and Accusative. 
Aik, Thro 9 . 
Thro': G . 8.«a ^6ijxo5vo.f, Xen. Thro 1 the winter. 

A. hot 7T0VTQV, Find. Thro' the sea. 
After : G. $*a puxgov xP^ ov j iEschyl. After a long time. 
On account of : A. hoi <re, Soph. On account of you. 



1 As a Greek word cannot properly end in a Mute, it is probable 
that f £ was the original word, which lost $ before a Consonant, and 
was softened into kx. So ex and e in Latin. 



141 

Kara, According to. 
Under : G. hvvcti xa.ru t% yrj$, FkrtD, To go under the earth. 
Thro' : G. xaxa (tt^xto'O, Her. Thro' the army. 
Against : G. xmri', To\yo$, iEseh. Against the city. 
According to : A. xc/jtu Xoyov 1%v 9 Arist. To live according to 

reason. 
In : A. i?B<70>jv xura. xAwj*o^^ Horn. They sat in seats. 

'Tvrlp, Over. 
Above: G. uvep yqs sen ; Eurip. Is he above ground? 
For: G. Qvrjfrxao uirep <reQev, Eurip. I die for you. 
Over: A. v-lo rev lotxov, Her. Over the house. 
Beyond : A. cuvatus vnsp avdpcoirov, Her. A power beyond that 
of man. 

Dative and Accusative. 

'Avk, Thro 9 . 

Upon : D. evfai otvoi o-xuirrw Aiog aleroc, Pind. The eagle sleep? 

upon the sceptre of Jove. 1 
Thro': A. uvee opy, Xen. Thro' mountains.* 

Genitive, Dative, and Accusative. 

% Apt,<p) 9 About. 
On account of : G. xtBpqtps «,"f ' ^oc^a-kv, Horn. They fought 

on account of a spring. 
About: G. a^» noXiog olxov<ri, Her. They dwell about the 

city. 

A Dative after d;d is used by the Poets, and is commonly 
expressed by upon. 

'Ava signifies motion upward, xcerd motion downward. So 
their corresponding Ad verbs avw and xarw signify upwards and 
downwards. ' 

'Ava is sometimes used adverbially in a distributke sense. Thus 
USatos dvoi elxop \LZ7^a f Horn. Twenty measures of water to one 
(of wine). In this sense dvoi. is used in medical prescriptions. 



142 

Concerning : G. <j5aju,ev Stp$) Soupovoov xotkoi, Pind. To speak 

well concerning the gods. 
About : D. u^\ o-copz-n, iEschyl. About the body. 
On account of: D. a[x,$) yvvctirSi ttolvxuv, Horn. To suffer on 

account of a woman. 
About : A. ap<p\ Tgolccv, Soph. About Troy. 

*Ew\ Upon. 

Upon : G. ew) Qpovou sxuSs&to, Xen. He was sitting upon a 

throne. 
On account of: D. oux s<rri cotpov hex toi$ vrgoyovoig [xsyoi $>povv}<rou f 

Isoc. It is not the part of a wise man to think highly of 

himself on account of his ancestors. 
Upon : D. s$' iWw, Xen. Upon a horse. 
Near : D. S7n a-ro^un too noTa^ou, Thuc. Near the mouth of 

the river. 
To : A. epxeotf em Bsmtvov, Horn. Go to dinner. 
On : A. s7tj yalav, Hesiod, On earth. 

Merit., With. 
With : G. psTu re^vy:, Isoc. With art. 
Among : D. uurog y.sToi nrp&miirt vovelro, Horn. He labored 

among the foremost. 1 
To: A. Zsvs e/3>3 ^zra. Ioutol, Horn. Jupiter went to a feast. 
After : A. ol vo/xoj jxs-ra rbv Ssov <rwZov<ri tyjv nokiv, Dem. The 

laws, after God, preserve the state. 

napa 9 Near. 

From : G. ov nctgoi QiXctpyupov x&pw hi siriKr}Tslv, Plut. We 

must not seek a favor from a miser. 
At : D. Trap' oybaag, Anacr. At the banks. 
Near : A. /3»j 7r«pa 0<va Qct\a<r<rris, Horn. He went near the sea 

shore. 

1 It is found with a Dative in poetry only. 



143 

To : A. napa. crs sg^ou-ou, Xen; I come to you. 

Above : A. %xpa. ra aWa &cZj Xen. Above the other animals. 

Against: A. not§a $6<riv 9 Eurip. Against nature. - 

lisp). About. 

About: G. ti 7r~p» ^v^Yjg eXeyofisv ; Plato, What did we say 

about the soiil ? 
For : G. cty,6v=cr8xi nsp) narpw, Horn. To fight for our country. 
About : D. Q&gaxa nsp) ro7g trregvots, Xen. A breast-plate. 
About : A. <pv\axr) wep\ to (roopa, Xen. A guard about the body. 

Upog, Towards. 

By : G . irpb$ twv Oswv, Xen. By the gods. 

For : G. npos crou, ou§' epou fypkvw, Soph. / will speak for you, 

not for myself. 
From : G. xpyarrov itpbg avdgb$ pjSsv vnovosi xoixbv, Epict. From 

a good man expect nothing bad. 
Towards : D. 7rgb$ tw tsXsj tou /3/ou, JEsch. Towards the end 

oflife. 
To: A. a 8' av pcHQr, nod;, tuutix (rai<rci<?bui $i\ei 7rpb$ yrjpai, Eurip. 

What we learn in youth, zee commonly preserve to old 

age. 
Against : A. 'irgo$ xsvTpac py XuxT^i, Eurip. Dq not kick against 

the pricks. 

'Tito, Under. 

Under : G. virb vocroy uiroGotvfw, Her. To die under a disease. 
By: G. vwo xpW TctiV oiypaii, Aristoph. I am harassed by my 

creditors. 
Under : D. u<$' ^'V> Eurip. Under the sun. 
Under : A. aVayaywv vVo Qohuiots, Xen. Leading him under 

palm-trees. 



144 



Metrical Synopsis of Prepositions. 

'AM<P J 'EhtvYjc, Helenarn propter ; rr t c dp$) 716)^0$, 
Circa urbeni ; up$\ <rskv 9 de te ; ttjS* apfi Qvyarg), 
Ob natam ; aptf cofxoic, humeros ciicum ; upQ) pisQgbt, 
Juxta imdam. MiV* erxijTrrgso, sceptro super ; y}\§ dv opiXov, 
Per turbam. 'ANT? tUvoov, pro natis. By V \4[I(? Tgolr t c, 
A Troja ; yKw<r<y^ aVo, lingua ; famvov «<p' vkvov, 
Post somnum : wovtov octto, a ponto procul. " Eyyoc 
x H)Jtls AIA y xqa&lvfiy per cur: fad deaf**, per aedes; 
Ov lid tovtov, ob hunc. 'Ergd^v 'EK dzi7rvov ZttvovIs, 
Post coenam ; lx ve<p£\uov } ex nubibus ; If I/aoO, a. me. 
EfZ yyv, in terrain. 'EN pj*, in navi. 'EII? pdffiou, 
In baculo ; xeght hri 9 propter ; xe7/// sir) yotir l9 
In terra ; %otol^SJ ihri 3 juxta ; fidcx en) vyotg, 
Ad naves ; hn\ vara, super dorsum. KATAl yalac 9 
Sub terra; x«t kpov, contra me; pil xstrd nerptfi 
"Tlcog, per saxum ; xa0' "Q^v\pov esizre, secundum ; 
Ja5j«.a xaT , in tecto. METAl" <tov, tecum ; jxsm twiv, 
Inter eos ; jasra SaV , ad coenam ; <rov /&sra notpov, 
Post fatura. HAP A wuTpoc s/Sjjv, a patre ; 7rctg' «utcw 
KtJSof, apud ; 7rapa vau£, ad naves ; ^v Tra^a So'fav, 
Contra ; n-ag ftuvajcuv, supra vires ; nraga xOfta, 
Juxta undam. UEPt aov, de te ; vepl KciTplfa$ aiY)g, 
Pro patria ; ve'p) x s, P*> manum circum ; ?re^i c&rrtf, 
Circa urbem. 77PO N tUvcov, pro natis ; ijv Trpo Sopoio, 
Ante aedes. II PC? 2 yys, a terra ; wpo£ J/oj a>ju,vu, 
Per Jovem ; eyv ttpbs <rov, pro te ; wgb$ xupcuri, juxta ; 
Ilpos ^x°$y a ^ tectum ; 7rgb$ tivo-peveus fji.a^ecrourQou 9 
Contra hostes. 2T*N Toig, cum illis. "EQwirtf '277\EP ^jotwv, 
Pro nobis ; xz^aKr^ vvep 1%sv 9 supra ; Mp wpov 
x H\Qs 9 super ; Qevyerxsv 'wrsip etKot, trans mare fugit. 
*Hv 'TIK? yrjs, uto yjj, sub terra ; <rcov xtirb tsxvwv 
'QAXu/xefl', a, natis ; ijxflov 8* foro xDju,ce, sub undas. 



145 



Conjunctions and Adverbial Conjunctions, 
which govern the 



indicative. 



AlQe, e%, 1 I wish, before the 

Past Tenses. 
AutUoc, as soon as. 
*Axf>' & MX$ l >asfar as. 

'Eirslnsp, > after. 

'Ens'trot, J 



"ha, where. 

"ha, that, Imp. Fut. Aor. 

Kalnep, altho\ 

Me<r$a, until. 

My, lest, Past. 

"Onov, when. 

"0$pa, whilst, Past. 



OPTATIVE. 



AHh, e1$s, J wish, Pr. and 

Fut. 
Interrogative Par tides, with av. 



lm ^ I that, Past. 



0<pgx : 

Tim »v 9 hozv. 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 



*Av, lav, f,, if. 
Elvep, altho\ 
'EnoLv, hnsfiav, since. 
"Emc oiv, until. 

* h ' J > I that, Pr. and Fut, 

)<ppx, 3 



f O(ppt 



Oti, that. 



Kav, altho'. 
"Ottooc oiv, that. 
"Orav, when. 
"OQga, whilst, Pr. 
Ilph av, before. 
*S1$ av, that. 



indicative and OPTATIVE. 

I "Onco;, how, that. 



A$£, Me, and other Particles, are sometimes joined with the 
Imperfect and 2d Aorist of fyslhw, as a'fi' 9<psteg oiyoyo$ r ipeyou, Horn. 



146 



INDICATIVE, OPTATIVE, and SUBJUNCTIVE, 

Ovqts, 



*Axpi, V-*x?h u *til. 

m; if 

My, forbidding? 
Mrpws, lest. 



Ottots, \ 

'OroTotv, >when. 
Ote, ) 



INDICATIVE, OPTATIVE, SUBJUNCTIVE, and 
INFINITIVE. 



*Av, xe, 5 Potential. 
*Eco$, as long as. 
MrjTTQTs, lest. 



nph, before. 
'11$, that. 



f E< is used by the Dramatic Poets with the Indicative and Opta- 
tive only. By Homer it is used with the Subjunctive also, joined to 
av or xs. 

When ei is used with an Imp. or an Aor. Indicative, the Verb in 
the corresponding clause, preceding or following, is put in the Indie, 
with aV, as s) pj tor eirfiyovv, vvv otv ovk tvipgouvopyv, Aristoph. 

* Mrj, forbidding, with the P resent, governs the Imperative, with 
the Future the Indicative, with the Aorist, when it refers to the 
Past, the Optative, when it refers to the Future, the Subjunctive. 

3 These Particles, dtv used in prose, and xs and xev in verse, give 
a Potential sense to the Verb. Thus in the Imp. el%ov signifies I 
had, el^oy &v, I would have. In the 2d Aor. ahov means I said, 
slifov div, I would have said. 

The Present Optative with dv is often used by tragic Writers in 
the sense of a Future Indie, thus psvoip oV, Soph. I will stay. 

*Av frequently signifies soever, as atfavfl' oV aV Xsyou, Aristoph. 
Whatsoever things I may say : I Ti xzv xaravsucrw, Horn. Whatever 
I may nod. 

*Av in this case follows the Noun or Particle, and precede* the 
Verb. 



147 

INDICATIVE, OPTATIVE, and INFINITIVE. 
)f "I sh 



'Evsir}, ~) • "Hers, so that* 

f since, ' 



optative and subjunctive. 

*EirsoLv, after. My, lest. 

Conjunctions Postpositive are yap, [xh, $h, re, 



TOfVUJ/. 



These are Prepositive and Postpositive, d\ apa, ^ 



;w. 



The rest are Prepositive. 

These are called Expletive, which are not easily 
translated into other languages, but have a peculiar 
expression, the loss of which would be discovered by a 
critical judge of the niceties of Greek composition : ap, 
apa, au, ys, Stj, o^Ta, Qtjv, xs, xsu, /jltjV, vu 9 wsp, Trow, 
to), pa, and some others used by the Poets. 

CORRESPONDING PARTICLES. 



'Eneildiv, when, — r>jvixauT«, then. 
*Hi, as far, — tuvtyi, so far. 
*Hpos, when, — t^oj, then. 
'Hvlxct, when, — Tijvixa, then. 
KaAkitsg, as, — ovtoo, so. 
Miv, indeed, — Be, but. 
Msv, both, — Zs, and. 
'Ofioiooe, like, — w<nrsg, as. 
"Oitov, where, — Ixsl, there. 



Ilpiv, before, — %, that, 
nfiv, before— irfiv, that. 
Tots, then, — ore, when. 
Tors, then, — otuv, when. 
Tots, then, — sirs&uv, when, 
Tots, then, — yvUcK, when, 
'fig, as, — ovtco, so. 
l fl§, as, — coTccvToosy thus. 
'flos), as, — ovrio, so. 



1 These have av, expressed or understood, with the Opl 
ufffi is also found with the Imperative. 



148 



"O?rou, where,— ivrauta, there. 
"Onou, where, — ev$a 9 there. 
Ovtcq$, so, — oo$, as. 



r, £l<rirep, as,- — outco, so. 
"flomep, as,-—xou, so. 
"flo-TTSg, as, — axj-auTcos, thu$. % 



1 Some of these may be inverted thus : 
cVs — rort ; w$ — ovrws ; &c. 

One of the Corresponding Particles is frequently omitted, as oy&f 
■bv t(fj @i<p ta^iora yygdurKsi w$ y %ty$ t Socrates. 



149 



PROSODY 



Position. 

A Syllable, in which a short or doubtful Vowel pre- 
cedes two consonants or a double letter, is long in every 
situation, as ftsivrj §s %Aayy^, aurotp eps Zehg y koltoL 

<PpeVCt, 7r6LTpQ£, T6XVQV, HoiTl.* 

1 The word Prosody is here used in its common application to 
the quantity,- although tffocw&'a signifies the accent, of syllables. 

Those parts of Prosody, which are common to both languages, are 
here in general omitted. 

a The exceptions to this rule take place when the latter consonant 
is a liquid. In Epic poetry they occur only in proper names, which 
cannot be strictly subjected to the rules of any metre, and in those 
words, which could noi be used in any other position, as^s figQrol<ri t 
p,o7£>a xgarourj, Ttrzfai/ra. irgnayvSa,, &c. 

In Pastoral, Elegiac, and Epigrammatic verse the syllable is more 
frequently short. 

In Dramatic poetry the following rules may be observed : 

A short vowel before a soft or aspirate Mute followed by a liquid, 
and before a middle Mute followed by g>, remains short. In Tragedy 
the syllable, if not final, is often long. 

A short vowel before a middle Mute followed by A, a, or v, 
lengthens the syllable in all Dramatic poetry. 

That reason of that difference between Heroic and Dramatic poetry 



150 

A short Vowel is sometimes made long before a 



may be this. In the grave, majestic cadence of Heroic verse Spon- 
dees are frequent ; but the Iambs and Tribrachs of the language 
of the Stage require short syllables. Hence the doubtful vowel in 
$$dv&, (pQlvujf riyw, &c. is long in Homer, and short in Iambic metre. 
It is remarkable that the short syllable prevails, in proportion as the 
atyle approaches to that of conversation. This difference will bt 
traced in the progress from Homer to Aristophanes. 

When the syllable is lengthened before two consonants, the vowel 
in pronunciation assumes one of them, as $ex-\<zyyyj, spi(r~Asv$ r 
icatoitp-^voLi tocr-gts, rsx-vov ; or, according to some, both, a* 
fc*arf-o£, rsxv-ov. When the syllable remains short, the vowel con- 
cludes it, as TtK-rfos, rt-xvv. So in Latin the first syllable in Atlas 
and eycnus is sometimes short, because it is pronounced A-tlas % 
ey-cnm. 

When the vowel is followed by two consonants, the latter of which 
is not a liquid, or by two liquids, the syllable is long in every species 
of poetry. Hence if we find is Ixdpavifov, itoL^a. cra^aay, we must 
observe that KapavSfw was the ancient form,, and that some MSS. 
have na,^ craSpay. 

In Latin the short final syllable is scarcely ever lengthened before 
a mute and a liquid. Virgil has indeed terrasque tractusque maris, 
but this is a Grecism. On the same principle we sometimes find a 
short vowel lengthened at the end of a word, if the next word begins 
with sc, sp, sq, st ; but it most frequently remains short, particularly 
if the foot ends with the word. Virgil has lengthened the short 
syllable in one instance, date telm ; scandite muros ; and that at the 
end of a hemistich, where a pause takes place. He has left the 
syllable short in Pontic : spes. Lucretius, though an imitator of 
the Greek cadences, never lengthens the syllable, but has it short in 
se\eral instances : mollid strata : cedere squamigeris, libera 1 sponte, 
ptndentibif structus. Horace uses the same practice: fornix stan- 
tem, praemid scribx, quid: scilicet, maid stultitia, mihi Stertinnts* 
He has it short even where the foot does not end with the word ; 



151 

single consonant, particularly before a liquid, as ToXXa 
?c/<r(ro/X£Vft), Hom. wapd prjy^juvi, Horn, 1 

A short Syllable is often made long when the next 
word begins with a digammated vowel, as og of, for M t 
Hom. jasAat/oc ofooio for /o/vo/o, Hom. ouSi ouc, for /op^, 
Horn/ 

When three short Syllables come together, it is neces- 



velatumquc stold, soepZ stylum, fastidirt Strabonem. It is the samft 
in Ovid : carmind scripta, curvamine spina, ohntia" stagna, and in 
many other instances, which, however, are susceptible of different 
readings. But no editor of Ovid has found in any MS. an instance 
of a short vowel lengthened. Propertius preserves the short syllable! 
brachid spectavi, nunc ubt Scipiadce, venundattt Scylla, jam bail 
spondehant, tu cape spinosi ; and even consuluitqut striges. Catullus 
has a few examples of a lengthened syllable : nulla spes, modo scurra, 
nefaria scripta. Tibullus has pro segete spicas. It must be observed, 
that the practice of placing a short vowel in that position is not 
common in Latin poets. 

* It is generally long before £, which with its aspirate appears to 
have been doubled in pronunciation, as rfocgccpp-rjypwi* This licence 
is not confined to a liquid ; ivsrfrj, opw, &c. Horn. Thus in Ennius, 
Omnis cura viris, uter essct induperator. In Lucilius, Inlereunt, 
labuntur, euntur omnia vcrsum-. 

* A short vowel is said sometimes to be made long by the force 
of the accent : thus Homer has made the penultima in 'iAtou long. 
In other instances, the same cause has. shortened a long syllable, as 
sw;' syui irs<j\ Hom. where the last syllable in eoog seems to be short 
on account of the elevation of the voice on the first,, although that 
elevation does not naturally lengthen the syllable. 



152 

sary, for the sake of the measure in Heroic verse, that 
one should be made long, as aSs'aroc, U/jIgc/a/o^c. 1 

One Vowel before another. 

A Vowel before another does not suffer elision, as in 
Latin, at the end of a word, unless an Apostrophe is sub- 
stituted. 2 

A long Vowel, or a Diphthong, is generally short- 
ened at the end, and sometimes at the beginning, of a 
word, before a vowel, as oIkm iv, Horn.* 71-0*5?, Soph. 
i) %tooi el[xsg, Theocr. 4 

Contraction. 

A contracted Syllable is always long, as ofieg, o<pig t 
Upas, ipog. 

Two successive Vowels, forming two syllables, even 
in different words, frequently coalesce in poetry ; thus 

1 This takes place even where the three syllables are in different 

words, as Sloi y.sv, Horn. ogUo$ l-Au.aa, Hes. 

a The elision of Diphthongs takes place in verbs only: real 
instances of this are to be found only in the Fragments of the new 
Comedy. 

3 A long vowel, or a diphthong, may be considered as consisting 
of two short vowels. If the latter is supposed to suffer elision, the 
former will of course remain short, as olxo sv. 

4 Thus in Latin, Nam si abest, Lucr. Vale inquit, an qui amant, 
Hylti omne, Insvlae Ionia, Pellu Ossam, I lib alto, aut Atho aiit 
lihodopen, servant te amice, Virg. Si me amas, Hor. 

The Greek Dramatic writers never admit in Iambic and Trochaic 
metres the hiatus, occasioned by a vowel or diphthong at the end of 
one word, and at the beginning of the next. 



153 

feog becomes a monosyllable, %pwr£(p a dissyllable, and 
in $ XolSbt , ^ N o*jx tvor t (re,', Horn. Vj oux are pronounced 
as one syllable. 

Composition and Derivation. 

Words compounded and derived follow the quantity 
of their primitives, as arl^og from rJ[xr h <puy^ from 
e<pvyw. 

A, privative, is short, as uTifxog ; but long in dSdvarog. 

'Apt, spi, Bpi, Sue, ? a a *" e short, as %a.(j~og. 
Penultima of Nouns and Adjectives increasing in the 

Genitive. 
A is short, as era^uaToc. Except in 

Nouns in a$/, avog, as titolv, rir&vog. 

The Doric Genitive, as 'Arps&do, [xoucrdwu for «,oy- 

Kspotg, xapdrog ; x xpug, xpdrog; iap 9 -tydpog ; Qwpaf*, 

dcopaxog; l£pot.$*, Ispdxog; xopda^, xopodxog; via^j vidxog; 

pa.^9 pctyog; oruptyal;, (ruptydxog; <&aia£, <PoLi<xxog; <p£va£, 

(peudxog, are long. 

J is short, as spig, epilog. Except in 
Words of two terminations, as SsTupli/, $;K<p)g, $eh<p7vpg* 
Monosyllables, as Q)g 9 bivog; but J)g, Jlog; 6p){;, rpi- 

%og; (tt){~ } (rri-/lg; r\g 9 rwog, are short. 

Thus in Orpheus, Euripides, Anacreon and Oppian. Plomer 
makes it short. This difference exists in many other words. The 
penult, of Comparatives in iwv is long in the Attic, short in the Ionic 
and Doric dialects. Homer makes a in ko,'ao$ long ; the Attic and 
Doric poets short ; Callimachus and Theocritus have made it long 
and short in the same line. Thus Homer has' v Apsc ? w A^, 

U 



154 

Nouns making tiog or dog, as xvyftug, xvr)[xi?}og ; opvig, 



opvlQog. 



Nouns in i{~, lyog or ixog, as ixacrri^, [Aaarriyog ; 

$oivi%, tyoivlxog. > 

Monosyllables in *>(/, i7roc 3 as Qpty, dp'nrog. 

T is short, as nop, nupog. Except in 

Words of two terminations, as tyopxwj and (popxug, 
With xr\pu^ xvjpvxog. 

rpty, ypv7rog ; yuty, yvwog ; fiifipvt;, fisfipvxog ; are 
common. 1 

Penultima of the Tenses of Verbs. 

The quantity of all Tenses generally remains the same 
as in the Tense, from which they are formed ; as from 
xpivco are formed sxplvov, xpwofjt.au, \xp~ivoyjr\v ; from 
xpivw are formed xkxpixa, xsxp^ifAou, sxpldyv. 2. 

The Perfect follows the quantity of the First Future, 
as <p6co, (puro), 7r£<pilxa, 

1 The doubtful Vowels before art are long in the Dative Plural, 
when the Dative Singular is long by position, as sX^ltri, rv\f/d<ri. 

No rules aje given for the quantity of the penultima and antepe- 
nultima of general words, as that can be learnt by use alone. 

Verbs of the Fourth Conjugation, particularly those in vvu and 
£W, have the doubtful vowel before the liquid generally long in the 
Presents and Imperfects, and in the First Aorists Active and Middle; 
and short in the Futures and Second Aorists. Thus often in the 
same verb in Latin the tenses formed from the Present are short, 
while those formed from the Perfect are long, as moveo, movebam, 
motebo ; movi, vwveram, mbvero. 



Verbs in 7tt(o, except 7rlwrm, plnTa), and those in 
'J7rrw, shorten the Penultima of the Perfect. 

In the Attic reduplication the Penultima is short, as 
epi%w, v\pixa, eprjfHKOL. 

The Perfect Middle follows the quantity of the 
Second Aorist, as stuttw, tstw«; except jBgjS^rta, 
hpplya, xixpaya, xsxplya, {ASfjivxa, 7re7rpdya } T?k$p~ixa, 
rsrp'iya, &C. 

The doubtful Vowels before cri are long, as Tsrifdo-i, 
§sixvu<ri. 

In the First Aorist Participle, acra is long. 

In the Imperative of Verbs in /ju, u is short in polysyl- 
lables, as xixXvOi, but long in dissyllables, as xXud*. 

In the First Future a, *, and v, followed by <rw, are 
short, as $au/Aa£a>, Saupdorcu ; uo^l^a), vo^Ta-a) ; x'kv^co, 

X"h\J(T(t}. 

But acrw is long from Verbs in aco preceded by a 
Vowel, or in paw, as 6 saw, Qsavw ; $paw, §pd(rw. law 
and u<rio are long from Verbs in w pure, as ida), t'otw ; 

Quantity of the last Syllable. 
A Vowel at the end of a Word. 
A, I, T final are short. Except 

A long. 
Nouns in da, 6a,. pa, ea, ta, 1 and polysyllables in a/a, 
as xspala; with suAaxa. 

1 A7x, 'la, [xla, itorvia are short. 
"aV/xuzu, axuvfa, yepvga, Ksfw^a, ohv^a, a-y-oXoTTcyoca, vtpvga. 



156 

Duals of the First Declension, as {j.ou<ra. 

Adjectives in a pure and pa from masculines in og, as 
fiixaia, yfJLSTepa.'. 

Nouns in eia from sow, as SouXs/a from 3ot>Xsua>. 

Oxytons of the First Declension, as %apa. 

Accusatives in a from Nouns in sug, in the Attic 
D alect. 

VocatiVes from Proper Names in ag, as Afoeta, 

17a A At/. 1 

The Doric a, 2 as a nay a for tJ 7rr}yrj, fiopia for fiopiov. 

I long. 
The names of letters, as f?; with xp7. 
The Paragoge in Pronouns and Adverbs, as ouroo-), 
vovi : except the Dative Plural, as <roi<ri . 

The Attic i for a, g, or o, as rauTt for raOra, 63* for 

0<$£, TOUT/ for TOVTO, 

T long. 

The Imperfect and Second Aorist of Verbs in uj«, 
as f'$u. 

The names of letters, as /xt> ; with yp6 : 5 is common. 

ra.va.ycz; compounds of psrg'Jj, as ysoo^sTca; go. preceded by a 
diphthong, as -rreT^a, except au^a, Aau'^a, ^Asu^a, <ra,vga; are short. 

1 So in Latin, Care nepos, Palla, Ovid. 

a The, iEolic a is short, as vup<pa <pl\r )f Horn. Hence the Latin 
Nora, in a is short. 



157 

AN, IN, TN final are short. Except 

Av long : Words circumflexed, as ir&v. 

Oxytons Masculine, as Ttrav. 

These Adverbs, ayav, suau, KioLv,7ripav. 

The Accusative of the First Declension, whose 
Nominative is long, as Alvslout, QtXiav. 
Iu long : Words of two terminations, as fax$fo and 

'Hph and fyuk when circumflexed ; t)v, Dor. 

for troi II ph is sometimes long in Homer. 
Nouns in /v, ivog, as pv\y\£iv. 
Tu long : Words of two terminations, as Qopxw and 
<f>opxvg. 

Accusatives from og long, as o<ppvv; with vuv. 1 
The Imperfect and Second Aorist of Verbs in 
uju,/, as sftsixvuv, s<pw. 

AP, TP final are short. Except 

Ap long : Tap and auTap are sometimes long in Homer. 
Tp long : IIup. 

AX, IX, TX final are short. Except 

Ag long : Nominatives of Participles, as ru-tyag. 

All Cases of the First Declension, as roL^'iag, 
Qfciag, fJLOucrag. z 
Plural Accusatives in ag from the long a in the Accu- 
sative Singular of Nouns in sue. 

1 When vvv is an Enclitic, as rol vvv, it is short. 
* The Doric Ace. is short, as ym^;. 



158 

Nouns in tig, avrog, as Alag; with rcO^ag. 
Ig long : Words of two terminations, as h7^\g and 

Nouns in ig increasing long, as xuyfxig, opvig ; 
nig, xdg. 

Tg long : Words of two terminations, as <p6pxw and 
(fidpxug. 

Monosyllables, as pug ; with xwfxug. 
Oxytons making the Genitive in og pure, as 
ttXtj^: 1 lx®v£ is common. 

In Verbs in opi, as efclxvug, &c. 

Feet. 

Each of the following Divisions consists of feet equal 
in time, as one long is equivalent to two short syllables. 
The two first contain the simple, the three last the 
compounded feet. 

I. II. 

Iamb, Spondee, 

Trochee, ~ " Dactyl, 

Tribrach, Anapest, 

III. 

Choriamb, 
Antispastus, 
Ionic §. majore, 
Ionic a minore, 



1 They are sometimes short : nXrfivs iits^o^eyu!'/, Apoll. Rhod. I. 
239- 



Paeon I, 
Pson IT, 
Paeon III, 
Paeon IV, 

Epitrite I, 
Epitrite II, 
Epitrite HI, 
Epitrite IV, 



159 
IV. 



v. 



Metres. 

A Metre, or Syzygy, consists properly of two feet, 
because in beating time the foot was raised once in two 
feet. But by Metre is generally understood a Verse, 
or, except in Dactylic Metre, a system of Verses. 



1. Dactylic, 

2. Iambic, 

3. Trochaic, 

4. Anapestic, 

5. Choriambic, 



Of Metres there are nine species : 

6. Antispastic, 
7- Ionic a niajore, 
8. Ionic a minore, 
9- Phonic. 



These Metres take their names from the feet, of 
which they are principally composed. Besides the 



1 To these may be added the following, seldom used : 



Pyrrhic, 
Amphibrachys, 
Amphimaccr, 
or C re tic, 



Proceleusmatic, 
Bacchius, 
Anlibacchius, 
Molossus. 



. 160 

Dactylic measure, consisting of Dactyls and Spondees, 
with which the learner is supposed to be acquainted, it 
will be sufficient here to inform him of the structure of 
Iambic, Trochaic, and Anapestic measures, as used by 
the Tragic Poets. 

Iambics. 

Of Iambics there are three kinds : Dimeters, consist- 
ing of two measures, or four feet ; Trimeters, of three 
measures, or six feet ; and Tetrameters, of four mea- 
sures, or eight feet. 

The following is a synopsis of the feet strictly allowed 
<in every place of a Trimeter : 

1st Metre 2d Metre 3d Metre 



Every foot, except the last, acjmits an Anapest of 
Proper Names. 

Trochaics. 
Of Trochaics there are two kinds, Dimeters and 
Tetrameters. 

Synopsis of a Tetrameter Catalectic : 

1st Metre 2d Metre 3d Metre 4th Metre 



2 3 4 5 6 7 



161 

Every foot, .except the fourth and seventh, admits a 
Dactyl of Proper Names. 

In Tragic Trochaic Tetrameters, an Anapest is ad- 
mitted only in Proper Names. 

A Pause takes place at the end of the fourth foot, or 
second metre, which properly ends with a word. 

The Trochaic Tetrameter is easily reducible to the 
Iambic measure, if to an Iambic Trimeter a Cretic, or its 
equivalent, is prefixed. 1 

Anapestics 

.... 

admit Anapests, Dactyls and Spondees, and are com- 
monly Dimeters of four, and sometimes Monometers of 
two, feet. Of the former the most strict is the Dimeter 
Catalectic, 2, called a Parcemiae, which closes the system. 
Anapestics may contain an indefinite series of Metres. 
Any number of these constitutes a system, which may 
be considered as extended without any distinction of 
verses, or, in other words, may be scanned as one verse. 
It has, generally, for the sake of convenience, been di- 

1 Thus the English Trochaic is more harmoniously resolved into 
the common measure. The two following lines, 

These delights if thou canst ghe, 

Mirth> with thee I mean to live, 
are generally scanned thus, 

" i -" I ■" l - 

But their harmony will be improved by the following division of the 
feet : 

- r - ! ^ jVL 

a If a syllable is wanting, the verse is called Catalectic ; a com- 
plete verse is called Acatalcctic. 

X 



162 

vided into regular Dimeters, which of course can admit 
no licence in the final syllable, arid which must always 
be followed by a Parcemiac. But as in this mode of 
division it must often happen that a single Metre remains 
before the final Parcemiac, that Metre is placed in a se- 
parate verse, and is termed a base, although it "would be 
perhaps more properly called a supplement 

The only restraint in Anapestics is, that an Anapest 
must not follow a Dactyl, to prevent the concurrence of 
too many short syllables ; that each Metre must end with 
a word ; and that the third foot of the Parcemiac must 
be an Anapest. 

Anapestic Dimeter Acatalectic. 

1st Metre 2d Metre 



I 

A Parcemiac, or Dimeter Catalectlc. 

1st Metre 2d Metre 

1 I 2 3 4 



Anapestic Base, or Monometer Acatalectic. 

One Metre 



165 



ACCENTS. 1 



The Acute is used on the last syllable, the penultima, 
or the antepenultima. 



1 Accents wore first marked by Aristophanes, a Grammarian of 
Byzantium, who lived about 200 years before the Christian aera. 
He probably first reduced them to a practical system, because some 
marks must have been necessary in teaching the language to foreigners, 
as they arc used in teaching English. 

For the proper modulation of speech, it is necessary that one 
syllabic in every word should be distinguished by an elevation of 
the voice. On this syllable the accent is marked in the Greek lan- 
guage. This elevation does not lengthen the time of that syllable, 
so that Accent and Quantity are considered by the best critics as 
perfectly distinct, but by no means inconsistent with each other. 
That it is possible to observe both Accent and Quantity is proved by 
the practice of the modern Greeks, who may be supposed to have 
retained in some degree the pronunciation of their ancestors. Thus 
in rvTrroyAvrjV they lengthen the first and the last syllable, and elevats 
the tone of the penultima. 

In our language the distinction between Accent and Quantity is 
obvious. The Accent falls on the antepenultima equally in the 
words liberty and library, yet in the former the tone only is elevated, 
ill the latter the syllable is also lengthened. The same difference will 
appear in bdron and blicun, in level, and lexer, in Redding, the name 
of the place, in which these observations are written, and the parti- 
ciple redding. 

The Welsh language affords many strong examples of the difference 
between Accent and Quantity, as diolch, thanks. 

It has been thought by many that the French have no Accent; 



164 

The Grave is used on the last syllable only; but 
when that syllable is the last of a sentence, or followed 
by an enclitic, 1 the Acute is used. 



but in the natural articulation of words this is impossible. Their 
syllabic emphasis is indeed in general not strongly expressed ; but 
a person conversant in their language will discover a distinctive ele- 
vation, particularly in .public speaking... ThiiasJfl.nvany ..cases arbi-. 
trary: thus the word cruel, in expressing sorrow and affection, will 
on the French stage be pronounced cruel : in expressing indignation, 
and Horror, cruel. 

On one of the three last syllables of a word the Accent naturally 
falls. Hence no ancient language, except the Etruscan, carried 
it farther back than the antepenultima. The modern Greeks 
sometimes remove it to the fourth syllable; and the Italians stilt 
farther. In English it is likewise carried to the prai-antepen ultima, 
but in that case a second Accent appears to be laid on the alternate 
syllabic, as determination, unprofitable. In poetry the metre wilt 
confirm this remark. 

That variation existed in the different States of Greece, which is 
now observed in the different parts of Britain. The JEolians adopted 
a baryton pronunciation, throwing the accent back, saying" syev for 
iyaj, Uo$ for ho$. In this they were consistently followed by the 
Latin dialect. But some words in the latter language changed their 
accent: thus in the Voc. Valeri, the Accent was anciently on the 
antepenultima, and was afterwards advanced to the peiiultima. hi 
English a contrary effect has been produced : thus acceptable is now 
acceptable ; corruptible, corruptible ; advertisement, advertisement ; 
&c. In Welsh the Accent is never thrown farther back than the. 
penultima, and is rarely placed on the last syllable.' In Scotland the 
Accent is oxyton in imitation of that of France, probably on account 
of the close connexion, which formerly subsisted between the two 
countries. 

1 The Grave is said to be the privation of the Acute, and to be 
understood on all syllables, on which that is not placed. The 



165' 

The Circumflex is used on the' last or the penultima/ 

The Acute and the Grave are put on long and short 
syllables ; the Circumflex on syllables long by nature/ 
and never on the penultima, unless 'the last syllable is 
Short.' 



Acute with the rising inflexion has been, by a musical term, called 
the Arsis, the Grave with the falling inflexion, the Thesis. 

But where.it is expressed on the last syllable, the Grave has the 
force of the Acute, marking an oxyton. Indeed no substantial 
reason is given for the use -of both Accents. -Perhaps it may be -said 
that the Grave is used to show that the voice, after the elevation, 
must fall to meet the common, or what Aristotle calls the middle, 
tone of the next word ; but that the Acute is preserved at the end 
of the sentence, where this change is unnecessary; that the interro- 
gative r<V always requires an elevation of voice; and that an Enclitic, 
becoming a part of the word, generally reduces the Accent to the 
rules of the Acute. 

In French the Grave Accent, — when it is not used for distinction, 
as a to, from a, has, and ou, where, from ou, or, — makes the syllabic 
long and broad, and has the force of the Circumflex: the sound is 
the same in pres and pret, in exces and foret. 

1 The Circumflex is said to raise and depress the tone on the same 
syllable, which must be long, and therefore consist of two short, thus 
crcJao. is equivalent to ccoaa. But this double office of the same 
lettt-r it is not easy to discriminate in speaking. 

a A syllabic long by nature is that, which contains a long vowel 
or a diphthong, as craJjxa, tntQ$ouQ$. Some few syllables with a 
doubtful vowel are circumflex ed, as fiaWov, Trgoiyy,a, irgdyof, 57oc a 
Mpa, &c. but they are contractions. 

3 In Diphthongs, the Accents and Breathings are put on the last 
vowel, as qlCtqis. . 



166 

No word has more than one Accent, unless an En- 
clitic follows. 

Enclitics ' throw their Accent on the preceding word, 
as avSpf07rog s(TTi 9 trw^a s<rrt. z 

Ten words are without Accents, called Atonies: 6, r ti 
©/, a\ y sly £}$, sv, e|f, (or ex), ou 9 (ovx or oj^), wgJ 

Rules of Accents. 
Monosyllables, if not contracted, are acuted, as o$, 

7Z"0yC, X**P** 

1 An Enclitic inclines on the preceding word, with which it is 
joined and blended. 

2 So in Latin, que, vc, re. But the Accent, which in virum is 
placed on the first syllable, is brought forward to the second in 
viriunquc. 

We may carry the analogy of Enclitics to English. When we say, 
Give me that book, we pronounce me as a part of the word give. 
Tor the boy is tall, we say the boy's tall ; thus is becomes a perfect 
Enclitic. This is frequent in French, donncz le mot, je me the, 
cst-ce lid ; and particularly in parlc-je, where the last syllable of 
park must be accented before the Enclitic. In Italian and Spanish 
the Enclitic is joined, as dammi, deme> give me. 

3 These may be called Proclitics, as they incline the Accent on 
the following word. Thus in English the Article the is pronounced 
quickly, as if it made part of the following word. In poetry it coa- 
lesces with it, as Above th' Aonian mount. When these Atonies arc 
at the end of the sentence, or following the word, to which they are 
naturally prefixed, they recover their Accent, as eyyvrs; crirsoiji 
dy'sfioLv <pXoyos ov, Find, kolkccv aj, Theocr. foo; 3$, Horn. When 
they precede an Enclitic, they are accented, as t" y.s. 

4 The following appear to be excepted, eu, vvv, or/, v$ 4 $sv>, wvc, 
ypawV, rave, ov$, ira;, 'TtWft tf'Jf ; but many of them are probably 



167 

Monosyllables of the Third Declension accent the last 
syllable of the Genitives and Datives, but the penultima 
of other cases, as S. %eh, X SI P^ X Si fi yj*? a% ^* X-^?-> 
XsipoTv. P. x£?*S> X £l P"> v > X S P^ xf 1 ?*^ 

Dissyllables, if the first is long and the last short, 
circumflex the former, as ;xoU<ra ;* in other cases, they 
acute the former, as ju,ou<rr ; c, 7±oyac, Aoyou. 

Polysyllables, if the last syllable is short, acute the 
antepenultima, as Mponrog; if long, the penultima, as 
avBpfJurrou* 



contractions ; thus v.yv from vsw, ovv from eov, Tree; from -raa^, ntav; 
©r ttuvt;. Indeed the circumflex always leads to the suspicion of 
some contraction. 

* Except Participles, and iris interrogative; with eaowv, j&cy«y, 

* E*7r£f, 70»vuv, wcrs, &c. are considered as two words, the latter 
of which is an Enclitic : they cannot therefore be circumflcxed. 

Nouns in £, increasing; long, acute the penult, as (hafes^, xffiv%, 
poWf; if they increase short, they circumflex it, as ~ayA#£, o/ftjftj£» 
Th$a^. ■ 

3 Erom these rules are to be excepted Oxytons, such as generally 
words in suf, rfa ou, and tv$, whose Gen. ends in oc pure, as ^a.triKsvg p 
aXrfirtf, &c. Adjectives in otor, 0o;, Ao;, gofc cro;, asayaSoj, xaA9f, 
&c. Participles Perf. 2 Aor.and 2 Fut. Active, and Aorists Passive; 
Prepositions; and others, which will be learnt by use. 

In Latin polysyllables, the Accent depends on the penultima. If 
that is long, the Accent is placed upon it, as amicus ; if short, upon 
the antepenultima, as dnimus. In Dissyllables the Accent is on the 



$§8 

. • ■ Exceptions with the last syllable short : 

1 . Participles Perfect Passive, as 7-er^aju.evoc, 

2. Verbals in sog and soy, as ypaTrriog, ypaTrrzav. 

3. The increasing Cases of Oxytons, as Aa/jin-ac, 

• \u[xv&3cg ; TuiTsig^ Twrivrog. 

' 4. Many derivatives, as iraillovy hoLvrlog. 

5. Compounds of /3etAAo>, Toy^a), %£to 9 if not with a 
; Preposition, as IxrfioKof. 

6. Compounds of tIhtco, xtbivw, rpi$ay with a Noun, 
if they have an Active signification, as 7rpojroToxog, she 
who produces her first child ; ^ifyoxTovog, he who kills 
with a sword ; pyrpoxrovog, a matricide ; KaorpoQog, he 
who feeds the people* If they have a Passive significa- 
tion, they follow the general rule, as TrpeororoKog, the 

first-born child ; t;i$oxrovog 3 he who is killed with a 



first syllable. Hence may be deduced another proof of the difference 
between Accent and Quantity. In Latin, the Accent falls on the 
first syllable of animus, and of tibi, but that syllabic is not lengthened 
in pronunciation. The Accent fails on the iirst syllable in carmina ; 
but if an Enclitic follows, as carmin&que, the Accent, which is inad- 
missible on the prat-antepenultima, must be laid on a syllable, which 
cannot be pronounced long. 

In reading Greek the general practice of this country follows the 
Latin rules of Accent. In words of two, and of three short syllables, 
the difference of the French and English pronunciation is striking. 
The former makes Iambs and Anapests, the latter Trochees and 
Dactyls: the French say fug's, fugimus ; the English fugis, fugi- 
mus. In many instances both are equally faulty: thus we shorten 
the long is'iw fcivls, the plural offavus; they lengthen the short is iu 
oris, the Genitive of os. 



169 

sword; ^rpoxrovosy he who is killed by his mother ; 
T^aoTpoQog, he who is fed by the people. 1 



1 The difference of Accentuation serves also to mark the? difference 
of signification, and has on some occasions given precision to tha 



language, and even determined the ambiguous meaning of a law. 
this distinction a few instances may be given : 



Of 



ayajv, leading ; 
aA^e;, truly; 
aXXa, other things ; 
arfXoo;, unnavigable ; 
af>a, then ; 
ftf, life; 
$l$or/,Bv, we give ; 
3oxo$ t opinion ; 
iitri, he goes ; 
svi, he is in ; 

*xfy a » enrmt y ; 

Zujov, an animal ; 
§ia, «a sight ; 
$eujy, running ; 
lov, a violet ; 
xaAct^, a cable; 
Xao$ t a stone ; 
teuxy}, a poplar ; 
p,6vr) alone ; 
ftvgtoi, ten thousand ; 
veo$, new ; 
yojwj, a law ; 
cf/xw*, yet ; 
iteiQu), I advise ; 
tfovygos, laborious ; 
f$°X S* a c °urse ; 
gw/xo;, a shoulder ; 



ayoyy, a contest. 
OLAYfiag, true. 
aXXd, but. 
dicX&os, simple. 
acoL, an interrogation. 
/3jo^, a bow, 
faSifiEv, to give. 
&5X0J-, a beam. 
sir;, they are. 
sv), in. 

*%0f a, hostile things. 
%,mv, living. 
fetx, a goddess. 
0£u5y, of gods. 
lov, going. 
xaXu>$, well. 
Acto;, the people. 
Asukij, white. 
/xonj, a mansion. 
fivgloi, innumerable. 
veo;, a field. 
Yopos, a pasture. 
e/AwV, together. 
7T£i8cv, persuasion. 
tfoyrigog, wicked. 
t^ayhs, a wheel. 
«J|xo£, cruel. 



The list might easily be extended, particularly in marking tha 



170 

7. Compounds of Perfects Middle with Nouns and 
Adjectives, as ao-r^oXo-yoc, oIxovo'ju,oc, 7ra[j~<payo§. 

8. Many other Compounds retain the Accent, which 
they had in their simple state, as auroQi, ovpoLvoQw, 
airo&og, £7rlcr^sg } xa,Te7%ov, (ruvrjxQov. 1 



difference between a proper and a common name, as Havfloj , a river ; 
£av0o;, yellow ; *Agyo$, a man, or a city ; d§yo$, white, &c. 

In English the same difference may be observed, thus conduct, 
produce, nouns; conduct, produce, verbs. Job, the name of a man ; 
job, a common word, &c. 

1 These exceptions have given occasion to some persons to inveigh 
against the use of Accents^ as vague and arbitrary ; and to more t» 
neglect them entirely. An attempt to reduce these apparent incon- 
sistencies to a system may tend to rescue this branch of Greek Gram- 
mar from that objection. 

The most general cause of these exceptions is abbreviation. Thus 
the original form rvirti^svou, on which the Accent is placed regu- 
larly, was shortened into fvittsy-zv and fvifTsvcu, which retain the 
Accent on the same syllable. From rsrvipspsvcci was formed tetu- 
<psvou, -from •tstv^ol^qh rerutpQcu, from tvitspsvou ^vitsvai, from ?eru- 

Verbals in soy were formed from Uov ; thus yootrfrsov was origi- 
nally ygdrfrsiv Ssov, necessary to write, whence probably was derived 
the Latin scribendum. Nctvri\o$ may naturally be formed from vavrl- 
ksK^s for vavr-n ">ts\o$. UccdUv is abbreviated from tfotrfoigiov, or 
from tfouSlfoov, which is formed from itoCtg as alylSiov is from a?£. 
Thus veav'untos and ir'aiSlffKos are probably formed from vsocvla and 
tfcutii), with eivKuj. 

It is natural that the cases of a Noun or Participle, and the persons 
of a Tense, should retain the Accent through every inflection ; thus 
from Xa^itois Aapra<$'c)$'/&c. from fvit£i$ 9 rvifivro^, &c. and from 
tvituj, Tvirov.tAsv, rwrrovpcu, &c. So <pi\£ov, the neuter of <pihewv ; so 
also itagQsvos, from the original word Ttaffiy. 



171 



Exceptions with the last Syllable long. 

The Attic mode of keeping the Accent on the ante- 
penultima in Mzvitewg for MsveXaog, \kfywg for Xs|soc ; 
or the Ionic Genitive, as nrjXrfatisa) ; or the Compounds 
of yixcog, as (piho-ysXcog, can scarcely be called excep- 
tions, as the two last syllables were in pronunciation 
contracted into one. 

Ai and 0/ final are considered as short in Accentu- 
ation, as povo-at, avQpwiroi. 1 Except Optatives, as 
iroiri<rai, tstv$oi ; Infinitives of the Perfect in all Voices, 
of the Second Aorist Middle, and of the Present of 
Verbs in [m, as T£Tu<pivou 9 rsrifpQai, r£TU7riuay; TV7r£<r6oLi ; 
Icravai. 2 



The Compounds likewise cannot be said to form an exception, a? 
the primitive words are not affected by the junction. On this prin- 
ciple many apparent anomalies may be explained ; thus oXlyog is 
from >Jyos, of which Xlya. is still extant; and otiitoXog from ah/otoXog, 

This is a faint outline of the system: but an acute observer of the 
etymology and origin of the language will easily solve the difficulties 
»f Accentuation on similar principles. 

1 The Diphthongs ou and oi are considered as short, for they were 
generally pronounced at the end of words like j. Thus ai and oi are 
in Russian pronounced i. This pronunciation seems in some in- 
stances, to have affected the quantity, as faoupcu (pltyv, Horn, ypyt 
7£ nod yfeaos, Hes. Cplv psv Qsot oo7sv y Horn. &c. But the best 
critics have suspected the genuineness of the readings, and proposed 
emendations. In the last passage, Qeo) may be read as a mono- 
syllable. 

4 O'ixoi cannot be thought an exception, as it is put for «ma>, of 
vhicli it is the ancfent foi'm. 



188 

The Genitive Plural of the First Declension circum- 
flexes the last Syllable, as poixraiv ; except Adjectives 
of the 1st Declension, whose Masculine is of the 2d, as 
ay log, aylcov, ay la, nyiwv : with erTjo-iVov, ^Koivcov, and 
%prj<rTcov. 

Oxytons of the 1st and 2d Decl. circumflex the Geni- 
tives and Datives, as S. t/^tJ, ti//%, t*ju,yj, ti[ayiv, ripy. 
D. TJ//,a, r*jU,ajV. P. ri[x,a) y Ti[xaiv t rifioug, ri^ag 9 ri^ai. 1 

Vocatives Singular in su and 01 are circumflexed, as 
ftao'i'kev, al3o7. 

Pronouns are Oxytons, except ovTog, exewog, Zeiva, 
and those in repog, as yperepog. 

The Imperatives eX&e, stwe, sup), ISs and "ka$\, are ac- 
cented on the last, to be distinguished from the 2d A Jnd . 

The Prepositions placed after their Case throw back 
their Accent, as dew awo. Except olvol and Sia., to dis- 
tinguish them from am, the Vocative of ava£; and 
from Ala, the Accusative of Jsbg or Jig. 

Oxytons undeclined lose their Accents when the final 
vowel suffers elision, as aXX* aye, Trap efXov. Those 
that are declined throw an Acute on the penult, as 

TTdKK S7TI, 6ew eTadov. 

Contractions are circumflexed, if the former syllable 
to be contracted is acuted, as uqoc, voug ; <pi7Jo(xev 7 
^Xoujxev; otherwise they retain the acute, as cp/Ass, 
<p/>.st ; ecrracog^ e(rrayg. z 



1 MrJ^Tjo and Qvydrrjg, when not syncopated, accent the penult, 
in every case, except the Vocative: a case, which from its nature 
frequently throws back the Accent, as dvef, ■rrdrzo, onamej.. 

4 Except metals, as dgyvgeog dcyvgovc-* with dhkphos d$s\<pifov£, 
?.Iysq$ Kwqv$, Yflffuf edf ito^v^vc f tpQiy'iKSOs QQiymouf* 



173 

Enclitics. 

Pronouns, [aqu, p.sv, ^f,oi, [as ; trou, trso, vsv, <r©* 3 toi, <rs ; 
ou, of, s, //.*?, ef'ipi, <r$)iu ;, <r$cos, cQio-i, <r$soLg ; 
rig, ti, indefinite, in all cases and dialects, as 

TOU, T£U, TCD. 

Verbs, s][ai and (pytAi in the Present Indicative, except slg. 
Adverbs, 7ttj, ttgu, ttco, 7rwg, rroQsv, tots, except when 

used interrogatively. 
Conjunctions, yi 9 ts, xs, xsv, dry, vv, vvv, Trsp, ha^ rot, 
and 6s after Accusatives of motion, as olxovps. 

Enclitics throw their Accent on the last syllable of 
the preceding word, if that word is acuted on the ante- 
penultima, or circumflexed on the penultima, as ^xoueri 
Tivog, ijXQe [aoi. 

Enclitics lose their Accent after words circumflexed 
on the last syllable, as ayoL7rag (as ; and after Oxytons, 
which then resume the Acute Accent, as avrjp rig. 

They preserve their Accent in the beginning of a 
clause, and when they are emphatical, or followed by 
another Enclitic. 

Enclitic Monosyllables lose their Accent after a word 
acuted on the penultima, as T^oyog pou ; but Dissyllables 
retain it, as %.oyog sq~t), else the accent would be on the 
prasantepenultima. 

The Pronouns preserve their Accent after Preposi- 
tions, and after svsxa or rj. as §ia as. 

'Eft) accents its first syllable, if it begins a sentence, 
or follows a?.X\ u, xcu, oux. <vg, or tout, as ovx s<tti. 



174 



DIALECTS 



_i he Pelasgi, a wandering people, are said to have 
been the first inhabitants of Greece. Their language 
was improved by Cadmus, who increased the number 
of letters and introduced the Phoenician characters. 
When the descendants of Hellen, who spread their 
incursions from Thessaly, had made themselves masters 
of the country, their language, which differed from the 
Pelasgic chiefly in its inflections, became the common 
language of Greece, under the name of Hellenic. 

It is probable that the only difference, which existed 
at first, was between the inhabitants of the sea-coast 
and those of the inland part of the country. The former, 
inhabiting Attica, and Hellas or Achaia, then called Ionia, 
spoke what is called the Old Attic and the Ionic, origin- 
ally the same language. 

The people of the interior parts of Greece used a 
rough and broad language, known by the name of the 
Old Doric. The JEolians, a branch of the original 
people, who settled in Bceotia and Peloponnesus, spoke 
a Dialect very similar to the Doric, although distin- 
guished from it by the generality of Grammarians. 

In the progress of commerce and of civilization, these 
Dialects were softened and improved. The Doric wa'S 



175 

mellowed into that beautiful language used by Theo- 
critus. The Ionians made incursions into Asia Minor, 
and settled on a part of the coast which received from 
them the name of Ionia. These, by an intercourse with 
their Asiatic neighbours, softened their language into 
that harmonious sweetness and sonorous grandeur, which 
we admire in Herodotus. The Attic, having passed, 
like the other Dialects, through many gradations, one of 
which was marked by the name of the Middle, was 
refined into what was called the New Attic, and became 
so polished and elegant, that it was adopted by men of 
letters and eloquence in every part of Greece. 

Thus the Attic, Ionic, Doric and JEolic are the four 
principal Dialects of ancient Greece ; but the separate 
interests and pursuits of different independent States 
produced a greater variety ; and it is probable that every 
State had some distinguishing peculiarities. 1 In one 
colony of Asia Minor, four different species of the Ionic 
Dialect were easily observed/ 



1 The difference was not confined to letters and syllables, it ex- 
tended to words. Thus, according to Aristotle, a village in the 
Doric Dialect was xafywj, in the Attic, typof. To do or act in the 
former wa 8§av, in the latter, ircoLtrsiv. 

While the manner of speaking of other Provinces was plain and 
unpolished, that of Athens was studious of delicacy and fearful of 
offence. Instead of a flat denial, it used such expressions as y.a,\w$ 
syji, xa,/M<rTcc, eiraivuj, survyol^c, eu nt^drre, tyXw <rs, ovccio. 

* Writers in the Old Attic, Tiiucydides, the Tragic Poets. 
Middle Attic, Aristophanes, Lysias, Plato. New Attic, 
/Eschines, Demosthenes, Jsocratbs, Menander, Xenophon. 



17 6 

These Dialects are distinguished from the Common lan- 
guage, the xowti foaXsxrog, called also Hellenism, con- 
sisting of those words and inflections, which were com- 
mon to every part of Greece. 

Another important Dialect of the Greek was the 
Latin language. Some Arcadians, driven from then- 
country by the incursions of the Hellenes, emigrated into 
Latium, where they introduced the original Pelasgic 
language and characters. Hence the similarity of the 
Latin and the iEolic dialects. The distance, and the 
separate government of Latium, together with a mixture 
of the ancient Etruscan, produced that variety, which 
formed at length a distinct language, but never forsook 
the analogy of its original JEolic form. 



Old Doric, Epicharmus, Sophron, and the writers of the origi- 
nal Songs to Bacchus, which were succeeded by the more polished 
Choruses in Tragedy. Nets Doric, Bion, Callimaciivs, Moschus, 
Pindar, Theocritus. 

Ionic, Anacreon, Arrjan, Herodotus, Hippocrates, 
Pythagoras. 

JEolk, Alc^us, Sappho. 

This list is far from complete ; but the deficiency will be supplied 
by the experience of the reader. 

It is to be lamented that transcribers often took the liberty of 
changing the Dialect of an ancient author into common Hellenism. 
Subsequent Critics have indeed endeavoured to restore the original 
diction; but in this attempt they could consult only general analogy; 
they could not succeed in displaying with accuracy all those instances 
of nice discrimination, which must have thrown a great light on the 
proper application of the Dialects. 



177 

General Properties of the Dialects. 

The Attic ' 

loves contractions, as <pi\£ for <pi7j<o, yhiv for Msiv. 
Its favorite letter is «>, which it uses for o. 

* A marked difference exists between the Old and the New Attic. 
The former used short and simple forms ; the latter softened, and in 
some cases lengthened the word. The former used the short words 
hi-/, d\clv, QsgetrQcu', velv, K-/a7v ; for these the latter substituted focr- 
(ABvetv, a,\rflsi-;, Sscuctivzo-fai, vrfieiv, xvytisiy. The Old neglected i, 
which the New added or subscribed; the former wrote kccm, xaolcu, 
Awcrroc, irouJ^o; ; the latter x&fttf, jcAa/w, Aw/oto^, tff wVaO£. 

Other changes marked the distinction. The New Attic in some 
cases avoided the sound of <r ; hence it substituted sLpfyp, Qz,f>po$, 
[jsvpflvy), Odkocrrcc, itcarrvo, <pv\0LTTvj to the a^cr^y, QcLo<ro$, pvgirivy, 
QaXctvva., Tt^&'jcrw, fjXoi<rcrt<j of the Old Attic. 

In the Future of Verbs the Old used the contracted form, cIauj, 
xaAw, o'A'J, dvocQificvucci ; the New Attic resumed cr, and made them 
aAsa-ou, xccXbg-uj, okscroo y dvoc(Bip<x<ro^ca. After the adoption of this 
Future, which became the general form in the common Dialect of 
Greece, the Attics still preserved the other form, which is now 
distinguished by the name of the Second Future. 

It may be questioned whether the y. and p£, the it and <p were not 
added to the Perfect, which was originally formed in the Old Attic 
and Ionic by the change of oo into a, as we find traces in IVraa, 
pip,ga, and in the Aorists so-b-jcc, £%£#, Y)Ao>a. It is indeed probable, 
that in the simplest forms of the language those tenses were similar; 
the principle of variery and of precision introduced those changes and 
additions, which adorned the luxuriant language of ancient Greece. 
That of modern Greece has returned to the original simplicity; it 
has only one Past Tense ; as y^a^w, sy§ x^a, ; itA&Koo, BTrXsfa; yvui' 
feov, eyvujQura. ; vJ/aAAw, l^ctKa. 

Even the Accentuation underwent some change. The Old Attic 
said Ojxolo*, t^iicCm \ the New, opoio$, rgoTtouw. 

z 



178 

It changes long into short, and short into long sylla- 
bles, as Kscug for Xao'c. 

In Nouns, it changes o, 01, and ou of the Second 
Declension into o> ; as N. V. tewg, G. tew, D. Xea>, A. 
Tiscou, &c. T 
* It changes sig into tjc, as iV7r% for Iwweig. 

It makes the Vocative like the Nominative, as cS 
TToiTsp, 10 $iXo$, Soph. 

In some Nouns it makes the Accusative in a>, instead 
of ft>v, tod or tt)Via, as 'Kayto, Mivco, JJoasidto for XayaJV, 
M'iVtoot, Uo<re/Oft>va. a 

It changes the Gen, eo£ into s«>c, as fia<riKetos for 
0a<nXso£. 3 

In Verbs, it changes the Augment s into ij, as ^sX- 
Kov for eixsXXof. 

See this exemplified in evyswc, p. 25. 

So in Latin, ^w£ ^£#0, aut Rhodopen, Virg. 

3 This Genitive exemplifies the difference of the Dialects. The 
Common Dialect is pao-iXsos, the Attic ptxo-iXsous, the Ionic fZouriMjos, 
the Doric and JEolic (3a,<ri\£v$. 

It is probable that the Nom. v$ was originally f$, which was 
declined into efo$, eft, sfa, &c. 

The Digamma will explain the principle of many formations. 
Thus ILjA-^a&xo, in the ^Eolic form, was HytefidiSafo : hence a in 
the penultima is lengthened ; hence too s is changed into the Ionic ij. 
The Genitive of Nouns in 05 was probably 0/0, which was shortened 
into of: the Poets changed the Digamma into i 7 and made the ter- 
mination 010. But the Digamma was by the greater part of Greece 
changed into v, in the formation of Cases. Thus the Gen. of en* 
and of was ci/o and sfo, abbreviated into crsf and e/, afterwards 
changed into crtu and sv, or rov and qv } but by the Ionian* into reTt 
and slo. 



179 

It changes si into r h as ffien for sUsiv, and su into r/j, 
as r}u£a[JLT}V for su^a^v. 

It adds a syllable to the Temporal Augment, as bpaco, 
iw oaov for cozaov ; bikcjo. soixa for olxa. 

It adds 3a to the Second Person in <r, as r t ar8a. for ^c, 
ofaourQa., by syncope o?<r$a, for o!oa£. 

It changes Xe and /xs of the Perfect into st, as efartfa, 
for Xetojfpa, d^xapixai for fjLi[xapf&ai. 

It drops the Reduplication in Verbs beginning with 
two Consonants, as ej3xao-T7j*a for /3~0Aa<rT7}xa. 

It repeats the two first letters of the Present before 
the Augment of Verbs beginning with a, s, ; as oXseo, 

It forms the 1st Fut. and Perfect of Verbs in a>, as 
from ea) ; thus 3sA<w, deXr^ay, rSiXyxa, as if from dsXiw. 

It drops o" in the 1st Fut. as vo t u.uS circumflexed for 
vofxura). 

It changes s in the penultima of the Perfect Active 
into 0, as etrrpotya from (rrpsfpw. 

It forms the Pluperfect in r\ y r^, r\ or siv. 

It changes erwo-av and arcoa-uv in the 3d Person 
Plural Imperative into outcdv and avrmv, as ruTrroWeui/ 
for Tr>7rreTO)(rav ; rv^dvrwv for T'Jvf/arftxrav ; and g'&cog'olv 
into <r#ftjv, as TU7rri(rQa)v for TVTrrscrQcDO-av. 

It makes the Optative in qv, as <pfoolr t v for (piXoTpi. 

It changes ju. before jxca in the Perfect Passive of the 
4th Conjugation into <r, as 7rg(pao-/xai for A-I^a^a/. 1 



1 In the construction of sentences, it uses a licence, probably occa- 
sioned by the love of liberty, which characterised the Athenians. 



180 



The Ionic 

loves a concourse of vowels, as rtWsa* for tu7ttyj, or£Xr r 
ualrj for rr^)\rr\vr\. 

Its favorite letter is r^ which it uses for a and s. 

It puts soft for aspirate, and aspirate for soft, Mutes, 
as svSouiroL for eurauSoL, xtSwv for %ircqy. 

It prefixes and inserts s, as kou for <ov, 7roir)ria)U for 

7T0lt\TCOV. 

It inserts /, as peia for £sa ; and adds instead of sub- 
scribing it, as Qp^'ixsy for Opaxzg, prf&iog for pclhog. 

In Nouns of the First Declension, it changes the 
Genitive ou into sw, as 7roir t rsm for ttojijtou. 

It changes the Dative Plural into #£ and tjct/, as fautys 
x£$>&Kf l (ri, Hes. for 5su/a7£ xe$a\a7g. 

In the Second it adds * to the Dative Plural, as toigti 
spyoicri, Her. for roig epyoig, neglecting v before a vowel 
in prose. 

In the Third it changes s into tj, as fia<ri7\.YJog for 
fiao-ihsog. 

It changes the Accusative of Contracts in to and w$ 
into ouv 9 as aiSouv for at|oot. 

In Verbs, it removes the Augment, as 0?j for s/3tj. 

It prefixes an unusual Reduplication, as xsxol(xou for 

It terminates the Imperfect and Aorists in <rxov, as 

T\)7TT!z(rX<iV, TttyflWXOV, for aTUflTOV, £Tin[/a. 

It adds <r* to the Third Person Subjunctive, as tut- 

TfifTl for TV7TTr r i 

It changes eiv, eig, si of the Pluperfect into <ra, sag, 
'ge, &c. as sreTv&sa, ag } &c. 



181 

It forms the Third Person Plural of the Passive in 
arai and oLto, as Tuirrkarai for tutttovtou, sTi&iaro for 

STtQsVTO, SOLTO for Y t VTO. 

It resumes in the Perfect the Consonant of the Active, 

aS TSTUtyOLTOLt for TSTV[JL>A£V01 £J<f/. 

It changes o- into the Consonant of the Second Aorist, 
as Trztypos/iaTOLi for irsQpaa-fJLevoi sir I. 

The Doric 

loves a broad pronunciation ; its favorite letter is a y 
which it uses for s, r h o, to and ov. 

It changes £ into o-o\ as lalco for o^o*. 1 

In Nouns, in the First Declension, it changes ou of the 
Genitive into a, as -cuda for a/Sou. 

In the Second Declension it changes ou of the Geni- 
tive into (o, as Ssw for Ssou ; and ou£ of the Accusative 
Plural into og and cog, as Qsog for Qsoug, av^p/oTcog for 
av$pto7roug. 

In the Third Declension it changes eog of the Geni- 
tive into svg, as %zfasag for %£i\sog. 

In Verbs, it forms the 2d and 3d Person Singular of 
the Present in sg and 'g, as Td-nrrzg, tutts, for rdwrzig, 



TVTTSIm 



It changes ojxev of the 1st, and oucri of the 3d Person 

Plural into o[j.sg and ovn, as Jdyo^eg, Xsyovri 9 z for Asyo- 
jasv, /^iyovcri. 

1 Z is composed of $j, the Doric only reverses the order of those 

letters. 

* See page 42. 



182 

It forms the Infinitive in //„sv and [abmi, as ruirf!jU£y 
and TUTri^evoLi for tutttsiv. 1 

It forms the Feminine of Participles in oura, sura, and 
coca, as TiWTOKra, r\)7TT5X)(ra and Tu7rra><ra for TU7TTOt>o"a. 

It forms the First Aorist Participle in aig, aira, aiv 9 
as Tm|/-a*£, aura, aiv for r^-ag, aca, av. 

In the Passive it forms the 1st Person Dual in ea-ftov, 
and Plural in s<r#a, as tvttt6[i.-sg-$ov, ea-Qa for TV7rro[Jtr 
adov, sda. % 

It changes ou of the 2d Person into ey, as totttsu for 

TU7TT0U. 

In the Middle, it circumflexes "the 1st Future, as 
ru\{/ouaou for Tmj;o/x,a*. 

It forms the 1st Person Sing, of the Future in sujaa/, 
and the 3d Plural in swtou, as rinf/sujuaj, rvtysuvTai. 

The iEoLic 
changes the Aspirate into the Soft breathing, as ^ipa 
yfiLepa. 



for --■• 



1 It has been thought that tuTtfsfreycu was the original form, which 
was shortened by Syncope into rvrftzvccir, and by Apocope ihto rvirrs- 
pev : the next abbreviation was tviitezv, which was contracted into 
TUtftsiv. The Doric shortened it still more, into tbittzv. 

* Some forms are promiscuously used by more than one dialect. 
Thus those in £cr(5ov and £<r9a are Attic as well as Doric. 

3 On the same principle, the Latin Dialect had originally no aspi- 
rate ; hence Jama from (pr^y, Juga from <pvyvj, cano from %a/vw, 
Jallo from ctpaWuo, vespa from tr^ojj. It used aedus for hcedus, 
ircus for hircus. Afterwards the aspiration was imitated from the 
Greek; and, in consequence of the propensity to extremes natural 
to mankind, the Latins carried the use of Aspirates to a ridiculous 
excess, some pronouncing prccchones for prcecones, chenturiones for 
centuriones, chommoda for commoda. 



183 

It draws back the Accent, as syco for syco, <prj[ju for 
$r}[JM, (TvvQ&a for cruvoTda, ayadog for ayaftog ; and cir- 
cumflexes acuted monosyllables, as Zsug for Zsvg. 

It puts $a for flei/. as oTrxerfla for on-i<r9sv. 

It resolves Diphthongs, as Trai's for 7ra*£. 

In Nouns of the 1st Declension it changes ou into ao 7 
as ocioao for a/Sou. 

It changes o>v of the Genitive Plural into acov, and 
ei£ of the Accusative into aig, as fxovo-acov, povo-oug for 
fJLOixraiv, [xova-ag. 

In the 2d Declension it drops the i subscript in the 
Dative, as xog-ju,o> for xoVjiuo. 

In the 3d Declension it changes the Accusative of 
Contracts in a> and cog into wv, as a&dSv for aJSo'a ; and 
the Genitive oug into a>£. 

It forms the 3d Person Plural of the Imperfect and 
Aorists of the Indicative and Optative in ray, as £TU7r- 
To<rav for stutttov. 1 

It changes the Infinitive in av and ow into oug and o/£, 
as yi'KcLig for ys7^a.v, %pv(roig for %pi)(rouu. 

It changes ejjy of the Infinitive into >jt/, as T-jirrrp for 

T'J7TTSJV. 

In the Passive it changes [tdoi. into j&sfls and ^tsfl^j/, 

as Ti>7TTo[AeQe and tuttto^sSsv for TV7TT0fjL£$a. 

The Poets 
have several peculiarities of inflection. 

They use all Dialects ; but not indiscriminately, as 
will be seen in the perusal of the best models in each 

*.« . . .» - . . , — . .i . i. , . .,,. , . — .,. ... «. ■ , 

1 This is properly in the Baotic Dialect. 



184 

species of Poetry. In general they adopt the most 
ancient forms, as remote from the common Dialect. 1 

They lengthen short syllables, either by doubling the 
Consonants, as ea-crsrai for e<reToit 9 or by changing a 
short vowel into a diphthong, as slu for lv, [xodvog for 
[aovo$, ei?ajAou5/x?v for eX7)h66a[Asv. 

They add syllables, as <pows for <pa>£, (raa)(ripzvai for 

They drop short Vowels in pronunciation, to diminish 
the number of syllables, as fyu,aa> for ^a^aw, sysuTo for 
syivsro. 

They drop syllables, as aX<p* for ahtyirov, xpi for 
Kpl[xmv, AiVa for 'h'nra.pov ; §vvol for Simeon, &c. 

In Nouns, they add <p* to Feminines of the 1st De- 
clension, as j3*?5<p* for filrj, Trap* auro'cp* for wap aura7§. 

In the 2d Declension, they change the Genitive oi> 
into o/o, as 7roXe'ju.o/o xaxoio for rroXspou xoLxau, Horn, 
and o/v in the Dual in o/i'v, as hoyouu for "koyoiv. 

In the 3d Declension, they form the Dative Plural by 
adding / or tri to the Nominative Plural, as 7ra7c, irouhg, 
7ra/oW/ or 7ra/oWo"/. 

In Neuters they change a into £<n or so-c/, as /S^ara, 

They form several Verbs, of a peculiar termination, 
in Geo, a-yco, crQa), <rxw, (nrw, d"/vi 9 {;a) 9 siw 9 siva) 9 tjco, 
tnaco 9 ova) and moo, as $efipfo6w 9 ?%w 9 &C. 

They have Particles peculiar to themselves, as aju,a/, 
Syjfla, sxtj'H, ^//.oc, ^s<r(pa, ve^fls, o^/a, *s, /?a, &c. 

1 Thus^they frequently omit the Augment, which was not use^in 
the earliest Ionic and Attic forms. 



185 



DIALECTS OF THE PRONOUNS, 




S.N. 
G. 

D. 

A. 



<rsn) } <reo, 
o~so9sv 



*Eyw, 

Doric. 
hycov, eycovq, 
eyaoyoi, kywvya 

lfj<ev 



hMV 



upsg, etppss 
apoLc,, cx.fJ.Sf 

CL\L\L* 

TU, TUV*], TU-/« 
TSt), TeOf, TS0U£ 

to), t*v, re'Vv 

T6, TU 



jEoIic . 

eyw, eywv_, 
B. Ico, levy a 

B. IjutoOj 



uppcuv, uppeccv 



<reu, crsflev 



Poetic. 

> * 
yco 



IpttiV 



■*■ ' ir 






YI[AS1U§ 



c-eloQ 



tl 



T»V*J 
T»V, TS'iV 



PI. and Dual like syw, substituting u for a and >j. 



2 A 



186 



0. 
A. 


Ionic. 

f!o, oh, holo, 
so, eoflfV 


05, 

Doric. 
iff 


JEolic. 


Poetic, 






jtclv, vh l 


w 


<r<pee 
o~$)v, <r<fi 


<rp«>f, <r£a> 
<r<pc$ 




K N. A. 


» 






P.N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 


o~<peisg 
0"<peiot$ 








<r<pe ? tyt 



Dialects of the Verb JBift/, 
Indicative. — Present. 



Sin s- 

^. r ¥ ,i. v | e>j - — 

I. ,, Cff|^ -— — 

. e/x/xi evri 

JE. rifM — — 



P. ' .,. ■ " , sst, l<nn 



Dual. 

IP — 



Plur. 



eip.h 



ICtATi 

evri 

gVT/, BVVti 



IjttSV, tt/*SV Ite £txo-<ri 



* M)v and vjv are of all Gpndcrs and Numbers. 

In Celtic, njw, our, your, thqr, is of all Genders and Numbers. 



Sing. 



A, n 



iz, jj«, ee$, en;, — 
hh eiijv, fe, &$, 
iov, ijov, e>j<r0a 
eo-xov 

D. ft 

JE. i^x — 

P. Jqy ■ , . ■■ gtjv^fev 



Sing. 



187 

Imperfect 
Dual. 



ecrrov — 
erov, ?(TT^v, 

j<TTOV^ ?(TT1)V 

Pluperfect. 
Dual. 



Piur. 



BCtTS 



r)[xtg 



Ijiwv 



— ecav, 
sWav, Icrxoy 



PIujt. 



Future. 



Sing. 

A. £«"« — — 

I. fO"c«<, e<r<re«i — - ■»— 

D. l<rou/xai, Icrp l<rfircu 

earevfutiy eWj IcrtrgTrai 

P. eVo-o,uai, lirxif eWerou 



Dual, 



Plur. 



— - — l<rowyT«i 



Sing. 



1m pek ATI y k. — Present. 



Dual. 



A. 
P. 



gcro-B — 



Plur, 



E0IU1 5QK ffO| 



Optative. — Present. 



**gy 



188 



Subjunctive. — Present. 



Sing. 

1»r v v >r >i » 

. ea>, em eys, eys ejj, e»j, 



Dual. 



Plur. 



elcopev, 



Iweri, 



Infinitive. — Present, 

I. Ijxsv, stftzv 

D. eftevott, »)]x?v, ijju-gc, s</x?£ 

iE. eleven 

P. g/xasv 

Future. 
P. £Ws<70a» 

Participle.— Present. 



I. 


5WV 


couca 


sov 


D. 




evaa, solera, esL<r<rot 








iE. 




Future. 

1 . H(T<TOpSVO$ 


h 



" This Verb will appear less irregular, if it is observed fhat it forms 
its tenses in every Dialect from sw, stu, bsva or slu), and io~eu,l. From 
"uj are formed hi$, hi, contracted into -sis, si; and from its Future 
JVw is formed its Middle Icroaa;. From etu and sorsfM are formed, 
Irs, sVsr) or sVr<, &c. From el^) we have sw, &c. Thus the tenses 
of the Verb sum are formed from sw» 7 fuo, forem, ho and eifxfi 



189 

Changes of Letters by the Dialects. 1 

A is put for 

E, D. euxa. for afos. So in Latin maneo from phco, annus 

from ei/voj. 
H, M* fotp.x for f r}^? jMtrrig for ja^n^, p.£Xov for ^vjXov ; hence 

the Latin/ama, mater, malum. 
JUL I. in the 3d Person Plural Tceictro for Ksirro ; Port. Lisbo^ 

for Lisbon. 
O, D. etKoivi for eYxo<n ; aratrum from lgor^ov f baud from ovS". 
T, L. ca/?jr from xuA*£, c«/m# from *w4« 
fly D. fj.o'j<rav for fj,ov<rwv. 
EI, D. 7tXa$ot§ for ?cAs<S«£, 
OP, D. ^ivsfa for Alvslov. 

It is added, ac-ra^us for (rra^vg, avTralpw for <r7r<x!gos.. 
It is dropped, mulgeo from dpshyu:, balneum from /3aA«yinoy, 

pal ma from 7raXxf&Y). 

A, 'JE. fisXsoLg for UXe&g ; bis from $£ > helium for dutllum. 

0, L. alibi from «AAo0/ 3 «£er from o50ag. 

M, JE. /3up/x#£ for fj.vpp.rig. 

Jl, D. fiixgos for wrK(tQ$; ab from «tt^ sw6 from frr, Z»ax?^ 

from 2ry£or, comburo from vvqqm. 
T, P. xa/3/3«/\e for xarfiute ; libra from AiTga. 



1 This is by no means -a complete list of the Changes. The 
reader's attention will easily increase it. 

It must however be noticed that these changes do not take place 
indiscriminately. Thus, if the Attics changed <?vv into £uy, it must 
not be concluded that they changed aru into £y, <rvx,y into £'j/Oj, &c. 
The authority of the best writers is the only sanction. 

* The Mutes are coramutable with those of the same organ ; thus 
jf3 with the other Labials it aud <p, to which may be added a and i£. 
The modern Greeks use u.it for /3, 



190 

"#, D. Bi\i-x7re$ for <P/x<7r7ro£ ; aw^o from a/x^so, balcena from 
p&Aaiva, nebula from re^lXi}, 

V. Bjffav from Farro; ferbui '-from ferveo ; S. Pabfo 

for Paulo. 
It is added to /x in ^jr^Pgia. for fjt f s<rr l fisgloL ; S. hombre from 

homo; F. chambre from camera; E. number from 

ntmerits. 
it is inserted for the Digamtna in the Lacoiiian Dialect, w/3ov 

for w/ov or wov. 

. ^' 

15, D. y\s$uqw for fi\=(pctgw,; glans from fiotXavog. 

K, xf. ay^Tfj for axpjTsc, lotyftiv for soixajttsy ; L. gubern* 
from fcU/fyyA, augulus from ayxyAov, cygnm from 
xuxvo£ ; rifto'j from 6W*s ; guitar from xMgx. 

M 9 L. agmis from upvo: 9 for uyfisvo; from aya>. 

It is added, y^ai for vipo^. 

Jt is dropt, ctLx for y«7a, ictt for £yw, hence the Italian ?'o, J; /ac 
from y«Xa ; //a^/s for gualm. 

It is put for the Digamma, ylvro for /=vro, yo7vo; for /olvoj or 

jT, X). S« for yij ; dulcis from yXyxuc. 

2, D. jxagoi for patys ;* odor from $$*, 

©, L. Dews from (Neg» inde from «4s? ; daughter from 0yya- 

-njp, door from 0ypa ; murder for miirther, Bedlam 

for Be i Idem. 



* r is comrautable with the other Valatah x and ^, to %vhrch may 
he added £. 

* A is commutablc with the other *peniah 19 and t, to which may 
fce added £, a and v. 

3 Or, in other words, omitting cr, for g is composed of «£. 



^191 

Jf, /. e£jx>j for ocrju,)) ; D. 7§jx«y for to^tsv, xsxoBjisvoj for xsxajv 

ftivof ; medius from fj.i<ro$. 
Tj P. xa&Svvapv for x«t Suvafuv ; mendax from menlior; S. 

fo^os from £o/a«, cindad from civitas. 
It is added, {jf&ay from ua>, «vfyo$ for a:/^- ; l medulla from pgg- 

Xo 5 - • prodes for /woes, redeo for reeo, m^i for me. 
It is dropt, luixr) for &«>x^ ; ros from S^oVoj. 

^4, ^. \vjjc for Xaoj ; talentum from TaAavrov; exerceo fromarceo. 

H, I. e<ruv for ijtrav, f sgo; for £>}go; ; /era from ^jjg. 

J, X. Muste 7, from Movo-ou ; mare for #?an, itde for s/61. 

O, D. c-sO for crou ; genu from yo'vw, pedes from 4rall|. 

T, X. pejero from jaro. 

fl, L. stamen from arrowy. 

It is added, .4. Icugaxa for a^axa, IfliAa; for $=A«>; J. u$*\$=q<$ for 
a§gA£o$ ; AutsIvos from Latitats* ' Avruovfivog from ^rf/i- 
toninus ; lateo from Actfla;, pile us from 7f7Aoc. 

It is dropt, ftou for g/*ou ,• /. /3aA= for e/3«As ; A. rjgns for ij'ga?* ; 
rwo from l^yw, iibo from XetfZoo, into from vtva ; ma- 
Titus for mareititSy Vertumnus for VertomenosS 

Z 

F, ^S. <pu?a for fuyjj. 

i', In the Old Doric, Jxixgov for crfuxgov* 

* See p. 12. 11. 1. To prevent the position of r after n, <f is 
inserted in viendrai from venir. Thus we say Deanery for Deanry ; 
and the vulgar Henery for Henry. 

* Originally Musai. 

3 Originally Lateinus. 

4 The Greek Passive form is found in many other words, thu# 
alumnus for ah?nenos, for tuna for fortumena, autumnus for ahc- 
tomenos ; so catechumen from xanj^ou^xEvo^. 

? This change may be traced in our Western Dialect. 



1 

4, 


/. 


«> 


/. 


4* 


I*. 


£,, 


D 


Euj 


L 



192 

H 

Trq^y^cti for Kgoiy{j.ci, crofty for trotyla, ogyv for c^ai/. 1 
fSacnArja for f*ourt\£oL 9 r^zncL for tirsnct; P.r^vai for 

T&ivcu. 
'naXriog for TraXoucg. 
xr t vog for exiivog. 
Ulysses from 'OSu^j-eu^. 
It is added, P. ifov for ojv ; D. otm) for oV»; arjes from ox&. 
It is dropt', ^. sT/jcsv for eivytev ; Mars from "Ag^g ; audibam for 
audiebam. 

i. e 

^, JE. \[>v#0£ for \|/su'8o£, Tlgo^svg from pjSoc. 

3f, -^f. Sofyx^ for 8u<rpj ; a /. ireirsiQotT.w for ire/rsicr pivot elcrL 

Tj 1. x&-j)v for %tTa)v. 

It is added, ^E. icfaovba, for ireirova. ; D. h^a for &%«. 

It is dropt, D. ItrAoj for ia-0Ao£ ; minuo from fttvu&o. 

1 

J, A. toluti for Tavra ; machina from jxr^avij, jzWr// from a^«,, 
$Me from aveu ; contingo for contango. 

E t I. n6\iog for iroXsog ; D. vug for 0so£/ 2» from ev, plico 
from nXUoo, legit is from XeygTs, animus from uvwag ; 
pitppim for puppem. 

H, anciently, ipiga for ij/xJg«. ; vesf 2£ from £r%. 

A r , -D. evSoi for Evdw. 



The Attic adopts this Doric change in 8$?;, Kf<, tzirf> X§? TOCl * 
and yjri<rQoci. 

a Perhaps this mode arose from an imperfect pronunciation, which 
in this case we should call lisping. Thus the .0 was by the Dorics 
pronounced $ and £, as the English th is by foreigners, dat and zaf 
for that. 



193 

O, A. hvpi for huqo; cinis from xovig, imber from opfigoc, 
caulis from xauKog, legimus from ksyopsv. 

T, D. fjt,6i<rot for ^ovvol; dulcis from ykvxbc, garrio from yuquca; 
optimus for optumus. 

Ov, L. animi from otvspov. 1 

It is added, /. s7fx,=v for gjw,sv ; toivi for roT^ ,• P. gslvog for %ivo$ 9 * 
icotqcti for Tra^a ; ^. I1/1 for sv ,* mzwa from ^cycc ; Kott- 
<rctpslctfrom Ccesarea ; peculii from peculi. 3 

It is dropt, A. eg for sis; -0» Asyev for Ksysiv ; Medea from 
MYjhicc, dextera from fagnsgot, est from icrn, we/ from 
jus%, legunt from Asyovn ; iriquam for iriquami, sum 
for s?*w2?'j gradus for graduis, doctum for docitum.- 

K 

A L. misceo from plo-yct) ; actum for agtum, lece anciently 
for /ege, macistratus for magistrate. 

Tl, I. XQ*io$ for 7T0J0C. 

Jf, JL. cwm from <ruv. 

T, D. ox« for ore; i J . xtx.xxs<pct\Y}V for xar xs^aAijv. 

X, J. Zexopou for tsyo^ut ; lancea from Aoy%»j. 



1 Probably from avsaoio, which was shortened into a.vspoi t and 
became the Genitive animi, in the same manner as the Nom. Plural 
is formed from a,vs[jiOL 

4 This is a most convenient letter for Poets, an advantage equalled 
only by the power of doubling the consonants. They use at pleasure 
ifj^sh for s[j,sQ, elvtxoL for svsxoc, slug for e'j>$ 9 z'ntw for iituo, 0e<w for #£a>, 
xXslcv for xXsuj, &c. 

3 Till the end of the reign of Augustus, the Gen. of Nouns in ius 
and ium was in i 9 as Corjieli, consili, peculi: the only difference then 
between the Genitive and the Vocative was in the Accent, the Gen. 
of Valerius was Valeria the Voc. Vdleri. Afterwards the i was 
doubled in, the Genitive. 

* C was pronounced like k ; hence docitum was easily abbreviated 
to doktum or doctum ; thus audacter for audaciter. 

2 B 



19 i 

It is added, specus from <rvlos, nunc from vuv. 
It is dropr, sa-TOLct for eWaxa ,•' /?o& for hoc die. 

A 
F, L. s'rfeo from <nyaco. 

A, L. Ulysses from 'GSucrcreuc, lacryma from 8axgu/ii#. 
J, F. , j?//e Uom Jilia. 1 

N, A. XiTgov for vlrgov, 7rA<£Uja«;v for wveujxeov ,* P. aXXsyco for 
avuXsyco ; lympha from vujx^jj, Palermo from JZavop/xoc. 
P, X. lilium from Xsigiov ; intelligo for inter/ego. 
T, P. xxXXms for xura\i7rs. 

It is added, relligio for religio ; syllable from syllaba. 
It is dropt, e7/3cy for AsifSco ; pwfor from $uAAa. 

M 

B. D. rsqs^i'Aog for rsgsfitvQo$. 

JV, J/. A«jx/3avco for AavjSavco ,• mu&am from ^wgolv, Deum from 

0sov, es.sew from s'/vjy. 2, 
i7, JS. jaa-rsa; for Trariw; somnus from uttvos. 
It is added, eg=fx,(3o$ for sgsfioc, opfigipos for ojS^ijKrOj, TrfytTrAyjjU,* for 

7rl7rXYjfXi, fjt,6or^o§ for ocrp^oj, ju-r^Aoj for o%Xog ; Mars 

hom ,, AQYi$, mom from ococ. 
It is dropt, j« for pa ; sclpio from cx/jxttow, imitor from pifLov- 

\lol\; circueo for cireumeo. 
It is transposed^ forma from pog<pv}, num from ju,wv. 

iV 
I, D. a!=v for a»s/. 
^ D. ^v0e for ?A0=. 



1 Hence the reason will appear why / is mouilUe in Jille, famille, 
and not in ?w7/e, utffe. 

a M was anciently put for v before j3, p., #, <2, o, as r^ tfoAfy. 
Thus in Latin inscriptions, i?/z perpetuum. On the same principle it 
is put for v and r in words compounded of aya and xar# before /3, jx, 

tT, <£, as ajx@a£ov, xa^al^af. 



195 

M, L. ne from p) ,• quendam for quemdam, tanquam for tain- 

quam. 
P, L. plenus from 7rA^c, donum from §«3^ov, woks from ogoj, 

po?/5 from wopoj. 
2*, D. Iv for lc, Ivn for Ictti ; JE. tstuQoov for tstu^wc ; houien 

anciently for houses. 
T, D. xuvvs6<rcts for xaravsuo-ac ; joiwws from 7rn-uc. 
It is added, D. viva) for via) ; Karoov for Caio ; pango from vctya), 

cincirmus from x'Uivvo$ f magnus from /xsyac ; totiens 

for toties; lantern from laterna. 
It is dropt, 7". jxe/£oa for peltyvot ; J2. ru\[/avrco for the Attic 

Tuvl/avrwv, hence X. amanto ; draco from Spaxcov, 

Plato from TIKoctcov. 
It was anciently preserved in Composition, inrideo for irrideo, 

conludo for colludo. 

S 
Z, L. rixor from tg/£a>. 
X, J), j^woj for xoivo'c. 
5*, ^. £uv for o-uv; 1 ^'aj: from ^7ac, ^i.r from vitro-a ; Ulyxes 

for Ulysses. 
It is added, comix from xogdovi\. 
It was preserved in Composition, exfociunt for ejjugiunt* 

O 

A, D. tsttoqci for riiTG-upsg ; TroAe^oc from 7raAapj, as pugna 

from pugnus ; dorno from Sajxw. 
£, ^. AeAoya for AeAsya ; woiws from ve&f, o/ewm from eAaioi/ ; 

anciently tfoste?' for vester. 
I, _L. o//« for ?7/i. 
?, L. wo^ from vu£, anchor a from ctyxvp* ; anciently dederont 

for dederunt, servom for servum, colpa for ctf/pff. 



1 The Doric puts jjf for cr in the Future of Verbs in £a>, <r<ru; and 
-ma, as xaQlfcu) for kolQIg-uj. 

1 S is formed of kc ; the /Eolian and Latin Dialects transpose the 
letters, as «r>t£j>oc for £fVoc, ascia for ag/y^. 



196 

SI, 1. #*} for §»ij ; • J5» oga for dig*. 

It is added, P. <pooo$ for <p«»j ; D. bouyurriq for 0uya-n)§, siA^Aoufla 
for siAjjAufla ; ^uyouorof from Augustus, aroMpiov from 
sudarium ; l opacus from nor/yc* 

It is dropt, D. ju^a-a for ju,ou<ra, whence wiMStf ," oT/^at for owfta* ; 
#i from oi, Jewfes from o&ovrsc, nomen from ovo/xa, 
Zephyri from ?6<fwgoi, #& from cbro, /ors from $o'gos, 
gews from ysvo$, mens from jxivos, mors from ^o'ooj. 

n 

£, L. p#/>tf from /3a/3a» ; scripsi for scribsi. 7, 

K, D. ttvol^os for xvxpog ; lupus from Auxoc. 

M, D. oinroiTU for OjXjxara. 

T, D. (T7ra5«ov for ora&iov ,' _/E. 7rejX7re for TreVrs, 7F. pj/wp ; 
P. xa?r7r£o-ov for xar«7r=a-ov ,* pavo from racoc. 

#, /. 67re£>js for l^efijj ,' purpura from irogfvgot. 

#, L. p«/e.r from \J/uAAa. 

It is added, lapis from Aa«s; sumpsi, sumptum for --sumst, sumtum. 

It is dropt, /flfas from TrXaruj. 

P 

J, X. meridies for medidies, amis from audio. 

A, D. $civgo; for pawAo$ ," p^aysAAov from Jla gel I u?n. 

N, L. dims from 8s*vo£, legere from XeysiV, or, in the Compa- 
rative, from coy. 

5*, ^. apprjv for uq<tv\v; D. xXsog for x\sog; turris from tvqvic, 
celer from xeA^, cn/or from x^uoj, A en from %0e<n, 
legero from Ae£co, i. e. Aey<rco. 3 

T, P. xag poov for xaT poov ; parricida for patricida. 

1 This derivation exhibits a curious mixture of both languages : 
voo, liScvg, sudor, sudariurn, <rov§cx,gioy. 

2 This change probably arose from the supposition that ty was 
always expressed by ps. But Xsl^/co from Ae/jSco is Ae/jScrco, as from 
Aer/ru; it is \E\it<ruo. Thus scribsi as properly comes from scribo, as 
repsi from repo. See page 52. 

3 The Greek form is preserved inyiwo, adaxo, and in levasso, &c. 



197 

It is added, nurus from vvo$, musarum from ^ovo-clm, eram from 



ecu. 



It is dropt, D. uurxiw for ala-^gicw, ttot) for 7rgoT» ; Zectas from 

It is transposed, D. xgo&la. for xctgftla. ; rapax from *%tcol%, cerno 
from xglva), repo from ejpn-ee, £e#e/' from ts^»jv. 

J, L. rosa from po&ov. 

Z, X. patrisso from 7ra.Tgi^oo. 

6, Z). '^crava for 'AQyjvyi, 6p<r9$ for ogfloj, Soj for Sod* ; loves for 

loveih. 
M, A. 7rs$ct<r[j,cti for Trs^oL^pai. 
iV, D. XsyofMsg^ L. legimus from Xeyopev ; 2E. ys\<xi$ for ye\£iv 

or yeXuv. 
3, A. rsdv^trjj for reSyijfjj ; sesfws for sextus, visit for vmV. 
P, L. «r6os anciently for arbor^quczsere for qucerere. 
T, L. ossa from oora. 
X, L. e;?.s?s from ey^oj. 
It is added, 1 JE. <n5? for 5$, hence JL. 5?i5 ; <rfuxgb$ for fuxgbc, 

xsXcrco for xsAow, TreAojU-scrfla for irekopeQct, (rvj^sgov . for 

ypegov ; super from ws^, 2, //os from vw; Scarpanto 

for Carpathus 3 

1 In old inscriptions we find conjunxs, lixsit, uxsor, &c. But 
probably the engravers of inscriptions were not more correct in Italy 
than they are in England. In France their ignorance is still more 
glaring: the word Hotel is written Autel, Ostel, Otel, Othel, Otelle. 
Euu is written Au and 0. 

z The Aspirate is generally expressed in Latin by s : ciXig, satis; 
oLWopai, salio ; oLh;,sal; i, se ; s$o$, secies ; gg, sex ; sitta, septem ; 
erfou, sequor ; s^ifov, serpo ; y^ja, semi ; Ivtyjim, sisto ; o\xo$, sulcus; 
vowg, sudor; v Kr t or vXft), sylva ; viteg, super; viro, sub; vitvog, 
somnus ; v;, sus. 

Sometimes the Soft assumes s : d\<ros, saltus ; si, si; e](U, sum ; 
evo$ t senex ; scoj, sero ; 'Ikw, sica ; olxs~o$, socius. 

3 S or St are frequently prefixed to the ancient names of Grecian 



198 

It is dropt, A. vo\M'~o for vofil<reo; _D. q>h for o-Qhy'vcia for Trao-a; 1 
/. <S>6fleai for (pofSsnai ; P. oris for o<tti$ ; tego from 
<TT&yoo, fallo from o-$«AAa> ; dixe for dixisse. 

T 

Ay D. Qspiro c for Q&fi&oc ; intus from &8ov, wzw^s from (tufas > 

aput for apwd ,- p«s£ for passed. 
0, I. owns for a30i£ ; lateo from A«0a>, triumphus from fl^/- 

a/AjSoc. 
J£, i). tyjvos for exsivoc ; Lutetia from AsuxstIu. 
A, L. satis from «X*$« 

17, JD. «Tra for utticol ; studium from o-Troy&j. 
X, -^. flaAarra for '6aXour<rai ; D. tv for cry, <£om for $ijcn, 

Xsyovri for Agyoua-*, hence, dropping i, the Latin /e- 

gwftf; quatio for quasso. 
It is added, D. to* for of ,• ^. tttoAij for tto'Ajc ; plecto from 7iAsxw, 

tfm-tf from eg« ,* linteum from linum ; ret (u lit for re- 

fat/itf ,* jp. aime-t-il for azme z7, where / is restored 

from the original amat. % 
It is dropt, jD. vjyoLvov for T^yayov ; pema from flregva ; possum 

for pot'mum. 



places, because the Preposition and the Article have been taken as 
a part of the name. Hence from sl$ frjv Alav, to Dia, they have 
formed Staiidia, from Lemnos Staiimene, from Cos Sta?ico t from 
Thebes Stibes, &c. Thus Constantinople is called by eminence 
Stanboul, from gi£ rrjv itQAiV ; Troas Eski-Stanboul, i. e. the old 
city. 

1 The Cretan, Lacedaemonian and Pamphylian dialects put the 
aspirate for <r, as zoid for TTaou, jxwa for povcra,. 

% These expedients to prevent the hiatus are natural to all lan- 
guages. Various letters are interposed for this purpose. Thus in 
English the vulgar add r to a word ending in a before a vowel, as 
idea- ?•-()/ for idea of. 



199 
r 

A, M. o-6(>xu$ for <rcigxct$ ; Hecuba from 'jExa/3>j, triumpkas 

from Qglupfipg ; further for farther. 

B, L. aufero for abfero. 

E, D. opYiyugys for opjysp^ ; fugs from rsoj, unus from Ivoj, 
i</cws from eXxoj, scopidus from o-xqVsXoj I faciundum 
for faciendum. 

I f I. fiu(3\o$ for fitfiho; ; l carnufex for carnifex, lubens for 
libens, 

^4, Z). aujtta for aX^. 7 " 

O, JR. h^zv for 1^=0, 0su$ for fledf, hence the Greek termination 
oj became ?*s in Latin; purpura from 7ro£$u-ga, C7^f5- 
ses from ' OSuo-o-euj, animus from oivepos, bulbus from 
jSoA/3oj, legunt from Asyovn. 

il, L. fur from <£wp, w/«a from wAiwj, brachium from /3^a- 

It is added, P. jxouvoc for jxovoc. 

It is dropt, P. Tg/n-oj for rglnov; ; t'olo from (SovXoo, parum from 

Traugov ; saclum for saculum, Hercle for Hercule ; 

single from singuhis. 

JB, L. fremo from j3gI/Lta>, triumphus from Qglotpfios. 

9, D. $vjp for 0)jg, hence /era ; yb?75 from Syga. 

i£, L. /eo from %Aa/a>. 

U, A acr^agayov for «(T7ra^ayov ,' a Bosphorus from jBoWoga^, 



1 The modern Greeks pronounce u like j, i. e. like the French i 
grec, or y. i 

1 This change has been adopted in the French language, thus 
autre from alter, chaud from calidrfs; haut from altus ; au for d le. 

3 The Attics generally change it into <p t and >c into %, after a-, as 

cr£oyyo£ for (rtfoyyos, G"xj:\lfo$ for crxeXitiss. 



200 

trophceum from Tg07rctiov ; fire from Trup, father from 
TTXTrjp ; for from pro. 
X y -L. ^os from yXoog. * 

It is added, ^E. <pplyog from pjyo^, hence L.frigus; frango from 

pvjywju./. 
It is dropt, >jv for g^>]v. Sometimes it is changed into an aspi- 
rate, as heu from <psv. 

X 

r, G. ich from kyw. Hence in English, dropping the guttu- 
ral, /. 

S, D. ogviyos for ogvdog. 

K, L. anchora from dyycugct. 

It is dropt, lama from ykouvot., aranea from dg^vr). 1 Sometimes 
it is changed into an aspirate, as humi from %a/x,a/. 

5*45, D. \(/e for <r$g, hence ipse. 
It is dropt, apxQos for ^a^aflo £. 

/2 

J, 1. Qwv[jt,oi for Quufiot ; P. >j/3a>a) for ^jBotoo. 

E, P. 7T\WC0 for 7TASCO. 

H, .4. sppajywj for epprjyc^; pronus from tt^v^, for from xijg. 

J, ^. a^lcoxa for aipejxa. 

O, ^. 7ro\ect)$ for tt6\so$. 

T, I. pa for /tui. 

^4u, J. rpooj^a for rpaOju,a ; plodo for plaudo, codex for caudex, 

sodes for si audes. 
Ov, A. tew for Aaou ; J. wv for o3v ; D. ^wcra for ju,cu<ra ; Deo* 

from 0£oOf. 
It is added, P. ysAweov for ysXwv. 
It is dropt, D. ajxuflav for upvQotw ; comix from xogwvv). 

1 X was a guttural, a sound, which does not exist in Latin. The 
JFrench and Italian languages have rejected it, and in English it ha* 
totally ceased. ^ 



201 



DIGAMMA 



J he old Dialects of Greece admitted few, or no 
Aspirates. The Digamma was calculated to prevent the 
hiatus, which the concurrence of vowels would produce. 1 
Aspirates were afterwards introduced into all the Dia- 



The form of this character was at first a Gamma reversed, then 
a Gamma : afterwards it assumed the shape of a double Gamma, F, 
whence it derives its name. Hence it has sometimes been written T, 
SLsTajSiot for Fdfitoi, Tsizv for FsSev, Tsvro for Vivro, ^Eol. for svro, 
Dor. for s'/-o, from saw, &c. The Emperor Claudian ordered that 
it should be written j, or F reversed ; but probably that form ended 
with the inscription on his temb, TERMINA jlT. It has frequently 
been expressed by B, and sometimes by K, M, II, P, $, X. 

It cannot be ascertained with precision what was the pronunciation 
of t\ie Digamma, which underwent some changes. In its origin it 
was probably a soft guttural sound, like the German g final in wenig. 
Such is the present Greek pronunciation of the Gamma, which may 
be exemplified in the word auyw, an egg, pronounced of one, gut- 
turalizing one* 

From a guttural the transition was natural to the sound of our W. 
In this state it passed into Italy, under the form of V, and retained 
this pronunciation during the rougher periods of the Latin language. 

The frequent recurrence of this sound must have produced an 
effect so harsh and inelegant, that in the most polished states of 
Greece it was changed into an aspirate, and in the /Folic and Latin 

2 C 



202 
lects, except the iEolic, which adhered to the Digamma. 

dialects 4t was softened into F or V, and became the Digamma. The 
Lacedaemonian dialect, a branch of the JEolic, always pronounced, 
and generally wrote, the Digamma like B, a letter, which in modern 
Greece has the sound of V. 

The Italians, and the other nations, whose language is derived 
from the Latin, pronounce the Digamma V, in vino, vent, &c. like 
our V. [a the Southern provinces of Europe the B and the V are 
nearly similar in sound; a'ld that the same similarity existed in 
Latin appears by the ded action of ferbui from fervto, and by the 
promiscuous use of both characters in many words. 

The Latin V was frequently expressed in Greek by B, as Bxopujv 
from Varro. And the Greek B was changed in Latin into V, as 
ficiSaj, vado. V was indeed also sometimes changed into ov ; thus 
Virgilius was written BigylXios and O'j i§yi\ios, Nervii Ne^fitoi and 
NJEQOuju ; but Vossius and other eminent critics give the preference 
,-to the more modern form in B. 

The change of the sound of -W into that of V is not confined to 
the Greek and Latin; in the rough Arabic language^ is pronounced 
W; but iii the soft Persian, which may be called a polished dialect 
of it, it is sounded V. 

According to these principles, it is probable that the Digamma 
final, or before a consonant, was pronounced like our F, and before 
a vowel like our V. Indeed, V and F were so nearly similar, that 
Fotum and Fir go were written for Vol urn and Virgo. Thus /3a«- 
Xsvc is now pronounced vasilefs. The analogy subsists in the French 
neuf, neuve, and in the English half, halves. But our pronunciation 
of the Greek and Latin languages is so different from that of ancient 
Greece and Rome, that it is perhaps as unnecessary, as it is difficult, 
to fix the genuine sound of the Digamma. 

The German g, commonly expressed by gh in the English lan- 
guage, has shared in South Britain the fate, which the Digamma 
experienced in many parts of Greece, and is disused. The few 
instances, in which it is sounded, follow the principle of the Digamma 
F, as cough, enough, laugh, rough, tough, trough. 



203 

Hence it has preserved the name of the iEolic. It has 
also with great propriety been called the Homeric Di- 
gamma. That great Poet adopted the original forms of 
the JEolic and Ionic Dialects, 1 which threw a majestic 
air of antiquity on his poetry. This ancient form Homer 
dignifies by the appellation of the language of the Gods. 
Virgil, and among the moderns Tasso and Milton^ suc- 
cessfully imitated that practice by the introduction of 
antiquated expressions, which removed their language 
from the common idiom, and cast a venerable gloom of 
solemnity on their style. To that principle may, in a 
great measure, be attributed the frequent use of the Di- 
gamma by Homer. 

The use of the Bigamma having been insensibly abo- 
lished by the introduction of Aspirates, the transcribers 
of the works of Homer neglected to mark it, and at 
length the vestiges of its existence were confined to a 
few ancient Inscriptions. The harmonious ear of the 
Poet had led him sedulously to avoid every hiatus of 
vowels ; but the absence of the digamma made him 
inharmonious and defective. To remove in some degree 
this difficulty, his Commentators interposed the final v, a 
or the Particles y, 3\ r ; but these could be only par- 



1 It is not to be imagined that Homer adopted arbitrarily the 
different Dialects. His was the pure appropriate diction of Verse, 
the classical language of ancient Greece, the source of all that was 
sublime and beautiful in poetry, and the model of all succeeding 
poets. 

* They have even, by the addition of v, altered the Case, and con- 
sequently the sense, of some words. An instance of this appears in 



204' 

tially adopted, and were far from exhibiting the Poet in 
all the charms of his original style. Numberless pas- 
sages remained in their naked deformity, and exercised 
the conjectural sagacity of Grammarians and Commen- 
tators. Thus in the verse in the opening of the Iliad, 
'HfMoou oLurohg 3= sXcopia tso%s x6vsa-(rw, aware of the 
inharmonious effect of the concurrence of the two e, 
they cut off the former. The quantity of the latter 
created another difficulty. Some doubled the A, and 
others asserted that s was lengthened before the liquid. 
But there were passages, to which even these and similar 
expedients were inapplicable. A successful effort was 
made by the great Bentley to remove these embarrass- 
ments. The restoration of the Digamma has at length- 
vindicated the Poet, and displayed the harmonious beau- 
ties of his original versification. To give the learner 
some clue to guide him through these intricacies, an al- 
phabetical table is added of the words in Homer, 1 which 
either constantly, or generally, admit the Digamma in 
the initial Vowel. 



the last Book of the Odyssey, 312, where vmv eujXirebh&s been put 
for vou hfikXitzi, 

Some words had originally the Digamma, but had lost it in the 
time of Homer; thus dvr^ is said by Dionysius of Haliearnassus to 
have been digammated, but no trace of it appears in Homer.. 



205 



"? a > ] to break, 



alto, 

u\y\[Xij 

uaic, 

a. am [xi 9 

ccvxg, 

dvouvct), 

Stpotiog, 

OLpHTTO'/y 

UVTV, 

OtV<TTCtAS0$. 



^ 





exa?, 


Beipet) 


exaaro^ 


a* 


SX«T0£, 


g^voc, 


exvjAorj 


>5>' 


§3ttJCT, 




envpbc, 


eTSwXoy^ 


exoov, 


eixsAo& 


e\=oc y 


eTxocri 5 


eA<x=f, 


e«so 5 to resemble, 


!AjXS077cf 3 


elketp, 


k/^TVOOy 


sIasvj, 


SA7r)c, 


eJAuw, 


'ikKM, 


sIav$zcm, 


eAco, 


cjAcO; 


£A0)£, 


sfy.«, 


lAcup;ov, 


fTpyo;, 


eWo<, 


fTpw, 


evvvfxiy 


6»'<XX«, 


goixa, 


fcX«.0£Vj 


&& 



1 Augments often retain the Digamma of the Verb, as eoAira, from 
tATTuu, hiTTdc from l7rw, &c. Many words take a double Digamma, 
one before the Augment, the other before the Verb, as war* hhinw;, 

iireira, /s'/oA?ra, &c. 

In many compounded words the Digamma is placed in the middle, 
as ntpfetout, <xh\Y.y\s, KatKofepyog, &c. It is inserted in several simple 
words, as o/j;, pX/t^ &c. 

It has been before observed that i and u were substituted to the> 
Digamma. Hence to 'Ar^for^ or 'Arff/*<% succeeded 'Arp!^; 
to 'kyjxFlg *A^a*o;. Thus aw, afuu made a/cru/ in the Future, 
changed into avg-y ; $a.w t ydfu into ipz6<rw, &c. 



206 



S7TW, 

sgyov, 
egyco, 

ilpco, 

*p4p*ih 

Eovoo, to draw, 

1(7%, 

fa- foe, 

Irocy 

loo,, to put on. 
H 

v$vr, 

%0C, 



v)xu, ; 


adv. 


\<TK'J3j 




- 


'KTTlYjy 

'{(TTGOgf 


^ ? - 




ITSCty 


**H 




ITVCy 


Yjglov, 




I$l, 


fan- 








I 


> / 
IO/XVJ. 



"iXiOCy 

hsc 9 

iVlOVy 

v 



icrr^iy 
hoc. 



O 



oxgsc, 

Olfyoly 

olxoc, 

OlVOCy 

ouKutxoCy 
cvXoc, 

GVOOV. 



n 



cog. 



The Latin Dialect naturally adopted the JEolic Dl- 
gamma, which it expressed generally by V, as will be 
seen in the following list : 



207 



«yojx«i, vagor; 
ulwv, aevum ; 
aAcu7nj£, vulpes ; 
uogvoc, avernus ; 
ft^an;, achivus ; 
aw, aveo : 
fiiocjo, vivo ; 
(5o=c, boves; 
lloc, divus ; 
sloea, video; 
swan, viginti ; 
sKoo, volvo; 
spa), vorao ; 
evSUw, vindico ; 
evsToi, veneti ; 
evregog, venter j 
spX M > vergo; 
epog, seryus ; 
epco, verto ; 
eo-Qris, vestis ; 
s(T7rspog, vespera ; 
sittiol, Vesta ; 
cro£, vetus; 
rig, ver; 
1%o$, viscus*; 
7ov, viola ; 
% vis; 
jw, ivi ; 
xux, cavo ; 



x-puog, cervus ; 
x\=ic, clavis ; 
xogog, coitus ; 
Xxiog, laevus; 
hugy, larva; 
Xzio$, levis ; 
Xouoo, lavo; 
\6w, solvo ; 
^«A>j, malva ; 
y-aopoc, Mavors; 
ftaw, movco ; 
vaio$, naevus; 
vavc, navis ; f 
v/oj, novus ; 
vixtb, vircco ; 
clxo;, vicus; 
olvos, vinuni ; 
o^, ovis ; 
oXw, volvo ; 
ox^oc, vulgus ; 
oca, voveo ; 
nctvooc, parvus; 
nplco, privo; 
pica, rivus ; 
o-xsubs, saevus^_ 
txoos, pavo; 
v\yj, sylva ; 
vco, uvesco ; 
vobv, ovum, &c. 



1 NauV was probably pronounced nafs, hence navis. Thus Ilau- 
£ o$, pafros x was transposed into parvus, vzv%'jv into nervus. 



208 

Sometimes by other letters, among which are B, as 
m<a> dubiurn ; fiApmSy morbus ; p/oao, robur ; uco, uber. 

C, as srspa, cetera. , 

F, as ayopa, forum; opfoog, famulus; afolg, felis ; 
hsg, funes ; uw, fluo. 

R, as fior h Boreas; euco, uro ; "xaog, hilaris; >tfof, 

murex ; (xoucracouy musarum ; vuog, nurus, &C* 1 

In English, the DIgamnia has become W, as vsog, new ; 
xinuniy wine; vicus, wick-, fistula, whistle; vespa 9 wasp; 
mcii way. It is pronounced, without being written, in 
the word one. 

V, as vaog, nave, &c. 



* The Digamma lias been considered as a principal agent in the for- 
mation of Tenses in Latin; thus from amo, amai, was formed amavi ; 
from deleo.delei, dclevi ; from cupio y cupii, cupivi ; from audio, audii, 
audivi. From amo, amavo, we have amabo, from moneo, monebo. 
Perhaps this analogy may be carried to Plural Cases in bus. Thjs 
termination was formerly more extensive ; hence we find in Plautus 
audibo, Dibits, hibus, &c. 

Another formation of the Latin Future has been suggested ; — by 
the addition of fiovXou.ai or amo to the root of the Verb. Thus 
mnabo is an abbreviation of amare fiouXofxai, and regam of regere 
amo. Thus also in Italian from amare ho 3 1 have to love, is formed 
amerb ; and in French' from j'ai a aimer is formed faimerai. On 
the same principle the modern Greeks prefix QsAw or 0s to the Verb 
in the Future, as flsXcw y§a$£i or Qsygd^si. And the English Future 
will, originally tool, is the same as $ov\ for /3rj/,o/y,a/, and vol for 
tolo. 



20Q 



Primitives of the Greek Language. 

The original form of Verbs, in the opinion of many 
learned etymologists, consists of two letters, the former 
denoting the Action, the latter the Person. From these 
Primitives, or radical elements, spreading out into all 
the ramifications of vowels and consonants significantly 
combined, was formed that copious variety of words, 
which distinguishes the most perfect of languages. 

The five simplest combinations are aw, sw, ico, oco, 
and vet). Of these the last letter denotes the Person, 1 
and is changed into other letters to signify the different 
Persons, Numbers, Tenses, and Moods. The former 
will be found to indicate some of the principal functions 
of Naturei 

*Aco, signifies to breathe, to JIouk 

3f Eco, to produce, to clothe, 

"lay, to send. 

"Oooy to hear. 

"Toy, to pour, to rain. 



1 The First Person of the Active has the force, and the abbrevi- 
ated form of syoo; that of the Passive, of pj. The most simple 
change of the former into the latter formed the Middle Voice. Thus 
sco, I produce, 1 send into existence ; eep or sia;, J produce myself 
I send myself intp existence, or simply, J exist, I am. v Ew, I clothe ; 
&iu,c/A, I clothe myself. From the same principle the origin of the 
Passive Voice may be deduced. 

2 D 



210 

After these Duads, the next combination consisted of 
Triads, formed by the addition of a Vowel, or a Gonso? 
nant prefixed or inserted. 

1. A Vowel inserted: avco, to breathe ; Ida), to per- 
mit; \aco, to send; ilea, to bear, to think. 

2. A Consonant prefixed : %da), to live ; hsco, to 
Nnd ; xla), to go; 7row, to drink; <po«>, to produce. 

3. A Consonant inserted : ayco, to drive, to lead ; 
stia), to eat; 'Ixco, to come; opw, to excite; uSco, to Jlow. 

From these original combinations the formation of 
Verbs and their derivatives will be easily deduced. 1 
Thus from ay a) are formed dyav, dydXka), dyi'kri, 
ay si pto, dyopd, ay pa, dyuia, &c. From |3aa> are formed 
J3a£a>, fidQog, @oitva), fiaiog, fiaKKa), he. From Uw come 
§iog, hsttia), dsiXog, 8s/a«>, Seo-pbg, SstrTrorTjs, Ssuw, 8i;£ojw,a/, 
Sot)Ao£, &c. 

1 It is remarkable that the oriental Primitives generally end in 
Consonants. Thus from the Hebrew, 

AR, to flow, are derived Aur, light, dyg, ovga,vo$ t ogdw, of^a, 
aura, aurora, aurum. 

AT, to fly* Act, a bird of prey, dsro$. 

EL, to shine, eKr t , yj\io$, <rsXcc$, crsAijyij. 

OR, to rise, l^uo, ogoc, orior, origo, Jwrreo, &c. 

Hence the study of Hebrew will not only enable the Christian to. 
read the Scriptures with greater accuracy and satisfaction, but will 
supply the Philologist and the general Scholar with some of the, 
most probable etymologies of many words in the Greek and Latin 



§nfce£ 



PAGE 

Accents, •• •• 5, 1&5 

Accusative, 11 

— Syntax of, • • 128 

Active Voice, 42 

Adjectives, ; . . . . * IS 

Adverbs, ... 113 

*^ Syntax of, • ••• 136 

JEoYic Dialect, 1 82 

Anapestics, 1 6l 

Apostrophe, * • • 4 

Article, ...*.;........ f 

Syntax of, .... 120 

Attic Dialect, 177 

Augment, .......... < . 48 

Breathings, • • « ••••*• • 4 

Cases, ■ • • 6 

Changes of Letters, • • • • 1 89 

Characteristics, ......•• 41 

Comparison, .........* 54 

Composition, Prosody of, 153 

Conjunctions, ........ 145 

Consonants, 2 

Contracted Verbs, '. 71 

Contraction, 12 

« Prosody of, 152 

Dative, 12 

Syntax of, 126 

Declensions, .......... 7 



PAGE 

Deponents, * • ••••••• • 70 

Dialects, •••• • ••'. 174 

Digamma, .......... 4, 201 

Digammated Words, • • » • 205 
Diphthongs, .......... 2 

Doric Dialect, ........ 181 

Dual in oy, tjv, • • • • • • • • 39 

ETu.ai 9 to put on, ••«... 94 

tluX ................ 38 

Dialects of, ..... . 186 

EljtAj, to go, • • ......... i 87 

Enclitics, • • • • • 3 72 

r H,aa*,...... .......... 94 

Feet, ...... .;*......♦ 158 

'4>r y a<, ..;... irfi....... 97 

First Aorist Active, «... 54 

— — ■ Passive, .... 66 

Middle, 70 

First Future Active, .... 52 

Passive,* » • • 67 

Middle, .. 70 

Formation of the Tenses, 51 

Genders, 6 

Genitive, Syntax of, » • » • 122 

Iambics, • * * 160 

"%/, to go, 89 

"lyui, to send, * • • 90 



212 



INDEX. 



PAGE 

Imperfect Active, •♦•••. 52 
— Passive, • • • • 64 

Active in p, 81 

. Passive, • • • • 84 

Infinitive, Syntax of, • • • • 130 

Ionic Dialect, • • • • 1 80 

Irregular Nouns, • 15 

Adjectives, • • 26 

Verbs, 99 

- Verbs in p, » • 87 

"lo-r^i, 96 



Letters, 



95 
1 



Metres, 160 

Middle Voice, • • 67 

N, added, » • 4 

Nominative and Verb, • • 117 

Noun, 7 

Numbers, 6 

Numerals, 30 



Participle, Syntax of, 
Parts of Speech, 

Passive Voice, 

Syntax of, • • • « 

Patronymics, « 

Perfect Active, 

- — Passive, ...... 

Middle, 



134 

6 

57 

129 
17 
54 
65 
69 



PAGti 

Pluperfect Active, 55 

Passive, • •■• • 66 

Middle, *--• 70 

Poetic Dialect, 184 

Prepositions, 115 

- Metrical, •• 144 

Primitives, 209 

Pronouns, 33 

• Dialects of, • • 185 

' Prosody, 149 

Relative, Syntax of, • • - • 120 

Second Aorist Active, •• 55 

Passive, • • 67 

Middle, - • 70 

• Active in p, 81 

— Middle in yu, 86 

Second Future Active, • • 57 

■ Passive, •• 67 

, — . Middle,.. 70 

Stops, • ••• 5 

Substantive and Adjective, 118 

Syntax, ...... 117 

Trochaics, • 1&» 

Verbs, 36 

in XI, 41 

in MI, 76 

Verbal-Nouns, 112 

Vocative, • ••• .•• 11 

Vowels, ...» 2 



llontron : 

Printed by A, J. Falpy, 

XOOKE r S COURT, CHANCERY LANP, 

1814. 



223 



Improved 'Editions of the following Books by the sante 
Author, may he had of the same Booksellers. 



THE ELEMENTS OF LATIN GRAMMAR; with Notes 
for the use of those, who have made some Progress in the Lan- 
guage. Tenth Edition. Price 5s. bound. 

DELECTUS SENTENTIARUM ET HISTORIARUM, Ad 

usum Tironum Accommodatus. Thirteenth Edition. Price 2s. 6d. 
bound. 

DELECTUS SENTENTIARUM GRZECARUM. Ad Usum 

Tironum Accommodatus; cum Notulis et Lexico. Price 4s. 

A NEW LATIN VOCABULARY, Adapted to the best 
Lat. Grammars ; with Tables of Numerical Letters, English and 
Latin Abbreviations, and the value of Roman and Grecian Coins. 
Fourth Edition. Price 2s. bound. 

POETICAL CHRONOLOGY OF ANCIENT AND ENGLISH 
HISTORY; With Historical and Explanatory Notes. Sixth Edi- 
tion. Pr. 2s. bds. 

LATIN DIALOGUES; Collected from the best Latin Wri- 
ters. Third Edition. Price 2s. 

PRINCIPIA OFFICIORUM, HISTORIC ET GEOGRA- 
PHIC ; E Cicerone, Plinio Secundo, Justino, Caesare, &c. ex- 
cerpta. Second Ed. Price Ss. 6d, bound. 

t IRST EXERCISES ; To be translated into Latin, with familiar 
Explanations. Third Edition. Price Is. 6d. 

AN ADDRESS V ROM A CLERGYMAN TO HIS PARISH- 
IONERS. Third Edition. Pr. 3s. 6d. Fine Paper 5*. bds. 



214 



FXEGANTI/E LATIN/E ; Or Rules and Exercises illustfa:- 
live of Elegant Latin Style. Intended for the iise of the middle 
and higher Classes of Grammar Schools; 

By the Rev. EDWARD VALPY, B. D. 
Fourth Edition, Improved and made easier. Prite 4s. 6d. bound. 
A general List of Phrases, arid an Index are also added. 

BROTIER\S TACITUS, which combines the advantages of 
the Paris and Edinburgh Editions, with a Selection of Notes 
from all the Commentators on TACITUS,- subsequent to the 
Edinburgh Edition : the Literaria Notitia and Politica are also 
added; the French passages are translated, and the Roman Money 
turned into English. 5 Vols. 8vo. Pr. in boards, 4/. 4s. A few 
on writing paper at 61. 6s. 

EPISTOL/E M. T. CICERONIS; in Usum Scholarum. ex- 
cerpts. Second Edit! Pr. 2s. bound. 

EPITOME SACR/E HISTORIC, In Usum Scholarum. Se- 
cond Edit. Price 2s. bound. 

ELEMENTS OF MYTHOLOGY; Or an easy and concise 
History of the Pagan Deities. Intended to enable the Young Rea- 
der to understand the ancient Writers of Greece and Rome. Second 
Edit. Price 2s. 

CORNELII NEPOTIS Excellentium Imperatorum VIT1E, 
ad fldem exemplorum denuo castigatce. Edit. Sextadecima. 
Price 3s. 

CICERO DE AMICITIA ET DE SENECTUtE, from the 
Text of 'Ernesti, frith all his Notes, arid citations from his Index 
Latin. Ciceron. and much original matter critical and explanatory. 
Second Edition. By E. II. BARKER, Esq. Trin. Coll. Cambridge. 
Price 6s. 6d. bound. 

THE GERMANY AND AGRICOLA OF TACITUS, with 
English Notes; and with all Broticr's Critical and Explanatory 
Notes. By THE SAME. Price 6s. 6d. bound. 



%%t Classical journal ; 

{Of which is just published No. XVI, tor December, 1813. 

Price 65, continued Quarterly.] 

Containing, 

On the Origin of the Druids. No. 2— Account of the Wahabis— - 
Animadversiones in Juvenilis Satiras, sive Censura Editionum 
Rupertianarum, auctore J. R. Aug. Heinecke— Fontes quos Ta- 
citus in tradeudis rebus ante se gestis videatur sequutus paucis 
indicat J.'H. L. Meierotto. This is reprinted from a, scarce tract 
in folio, 1795— Inquiry into the Etymology of" Peor'' — Biblical 
Criticism — On the Platonic Use of wS'jvivhv, as explained by II. 
Stephens, Ruhnken, Valckenaer, and Le Clerc — Heumannns De 
Summo Bon, — Arabian Anecdote — Analecta critica in Antholo- 
giam Gr&cam cura Supplemento Epigrammatum maximam Par- 
tem meditorum collegil Imm. G. Huschke — Classical Criticism — 
Carmina- Homerica, Ilias et Odyssea, a Rhapsodorum Interpolation- 
ibus repurgata, et in pristinam formam, qiiaterms recuperaiida 
esset, tam ex veterum monumentorum fide et auctoritate, quam ex 
anliqui sermonis Indole ac Ratione, redacta; cum Notis ac 
Prolegcm'enis, m qui.bus de eorum origine, auctore, et estate ; 
itemque de prisca maturitate, diligenter inquiritur, opera et studio 
Ricardi Payne Knight. Editio Secunda. This Edition, witlt 
many additions, is printed exclusively in The Class. Journ. A copy 
of the 1st edition, of which only 50 were printed, was lately sold 
by auction for above ll. — A Sketch of Modern and Ancient 
Geography for the use of Schools, by the Rev. S. Butler. — On the 
Republication of Casteli's /Ethiopia Lexicon — On the Repetition 
of certain Words ; applied to the Illustration of English, Latin, 
and Greek Writers, and of the New Testament — On a verse of 
iEschylus — Heliodorus burn a Christian, and not a Pagan — Cri- 
tical Remarks on Racine — Thesaurus Criticus Novus sive Syn- 
tagma Scriptionum philologicarum rariorum cevi recentioris, cum 
Indicibus locupletissimis — An Attempt to determine the Contro- 
versy about the Construction of Macte, and the Etymology of 
Equidem — Notarum Romanarum ac Literarum singularium cou- 
pendiique scriptionis in antiquis codicibus et monumeniis obvii 
Interpretatio, ex variis auctoribus collecta; — Notas Juris, a Ma- 
gone collects — The Number Seven — On the Study of the Chris- 
tian Fathers — An Essay on the Hebrew Points, and orrthe Inte- 
grity of the Hebrew Text — Classical Criticism — On Dr. Hales's 
♦Chronology — Th.Chr. Hnrles De Nominibus Graecorum Libellus 
— On Mr. Boolhroyd's Edition of the Hebrew Bible — Question re- 
lative to the German Translation of Josephus — Winchester En- 
glish Prize Poena, Prometheus Desmotes — Adversariorum Criti- 
corum Specimen Antonii HaakmaTresling — Latin Poem — Obser- 
vationes in Euripidis Heraclidas et in Notas P. Elmsleii. No. 2 — 
^Fragment of Longus; with Latin Translation — Remarks on Sir 
W. Drummond's " Essay concerning the Shield of Achilles"— ^Bib- 
3 ical^ Criticism — Prologus in Adelphos, Fabulam ab alumnis Reg. 
j5cr?ol. VVestm. actam A. D. 1813 — Kpilogus — Euripuiis Supplices; 
Reeensuit Godofredus Hermannus — A Defence of Public Schools. 
No. 2 — Manuscripts, Classical, Biblical, and Biblico-Oriental, No. 
3 — Literary Intelligence, Bibliography, c\:c. — Westminster Abbey,, 
by Mr. Maurice — Account of the Classical Works sold at Dr. Gos* 
set's Sale, with the Prices, and occasionally the Purchasers — Pro- 
spectuses of' New ]Vurks — Notes to Correspondents — Index to Vo»ls. 
yii. and viji. 



SCARCE TRACTS. 



THE PUBLISHED NUMBERS OF 

%\yt 'Classical journal 

Contain, among a variety of 
CLASSICAL, BIBLICAL, AND ORIENTAL, LITERATURE, 

THE FOLLOWING SCARCE AND VALUABLE 

GREEK, LATIN, AND ENGLISH TRACTS: 

I. Carmina Hoiwerica, Mas et Odyssea a rfiapsodortim interpola- 
tionibus repurgata, et in pristinam formam redacta ; cum notis ac 
trolegomenis, s/wdwRfCARDi Payne Knight. 2d edition, 
with very many additions. * # * A copy of the first Edit, (of 
which only a few copies were printed,) was lately sold by Auc- 
tion for vpwards of <£7. 

XI. A Chart of 10 Numerals in 200 Languages, with a Descriptive 
Essay. By the Rev. R. Patrick, Hull. 

III. Account of Herculaneum, By the Rev. Mr. Hayter. 

IV. An Introductory Essay on the Prepositions of the Greek Language. 
By Professor Moor. 

V. Bishop Pearson's minor Tracts chronologically arranged. 

VI. T. Falconer's two Letters On the Oxford Strabo. 

VII. De Grctcorum Verbis in Regula. flectendis ; a C. S. G. Haupt- 
mann. 

VIII. G. Canteri de rathne Emendandi Grcecos Auctores, Syntagma 
recens auctum. 

IX. Wasse On Latin Scholiasts. 

X. Oratio de Publicis Atheniensium Moribus, a Valckenaer. 

XI. Lamberti Bos regulcs praxipuce accentuum. 

XII. Ruhnken's Animadvv. in Xenophontis Memorabilia. 

XIII. Oratio de Lingua: Arabicce utilitate, antiquitate, et prastantia ; a 
Hyde. 

XIV. De Ludis privatis ac domesticis Veterum: a J. C. Bulengero. 

XV. Fontes quos Tacitus in tradendis rebus ante se gestis videatur se- 
quutus paucis indicat J. H. L. Meierotto, This is reprinted 
from a scarce tract in folio. 1795. 

*** The Proprietors of the Classical Journal have engaged a 
celebrated Scholar, resident in Paris, to give them a critical notice of 
books of consequence that appear on the Continent. 

The Seven First Vols, may be had, price 41. 4s. in boarcjs. 
Two Nos. to each Vol. 



268 



V*°-' ,, l< v ' i ' %**^P*V* \/^f>\,\** \ 






„0 









•i j?-^ v 



•• *► 


















o, **.T 



* AY -t^. . 












«b/ 



•fc « 



^otffcA 






•l^r. *< 



°*. *.T 









_^ ^ v 



•4 cu 



'.• > 0-7 *, v 






*^* v • 



^^ 



.« 






-w—%* Ay c» *:>»* 



^'•\ ^.:itt./>* V\»aifr.% 



k^ v .MimST, >„^" .*AW/A"<> '^A ;^imts: -v 













: ^o< 



r of 



• * ^ "• 



\~ . t * 



*5 ** .1 



** ** • 



r *> *'"* <T 



o*. *•- 






+* **t; 



fc** 



W 



*«£* A*' » 






°~.^ •' 







# , * ^ 



VV 



'^V 



















^. ^rr; 







& 



P /^Irf-L ^ . CV A ^ "^ ^' ^ 



0#. *•««' A©' 









** 



%-^S?*6^ \*'f.^A* V3*£y 









i V „ « • « ^ 












^/ ; . 















w:<vm 



W 



aBsL 



I 






^M 



I ^ 



w* 






m 















■ 



H 



